FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 2-Way Mobile Radio (with Bluetooth, Bluetooth LE and WIFI)

 

Page APX TWO-WAY RADIOS APX8500 MOBILE RADIO INSTALLATION MANUAL aft

-i D raft 0 Foreword This manual covers the O2, O3, O5, O7 and O9 models of the ASTRO APX mobile radios. It includes all the information necessary to install mid power radios and configure radio installation inside vehicles. For details on radio operation or component-level troubleshooting, refer to the applicable manuals available separately. A list of related publications is provided in the section Related Publications RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-way Radios See Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards,. Manual Revisions Changes which occur after this manual is printed are described in PMRs (Publication Manual Revisions). These PMRs provide complete replacement pages for all added, changed, and deleted items. To obtain PMRs, go to https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com. Parts Ordering See Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering for information on how to obtain replacement parts. For part numbers, refer to the ASTRO APX Mobile Radio Basic Service Manual (Motorola Solutions publication). Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola Solutions products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs, including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola Solutions products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Document Copyrights No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola Solutions reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability, function, or design. Motorola Solutions does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others. Trademarks MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2016 by Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. ghted com ghted com ghted compute ghted comput Motorola Solutions pr Motorola Solutions stributed in any manner stributed in any man rola Solutions products shall rola Solutions produ any portion thereof shall take p ortion thereof s eproduced, distributed, or t ed, distributed, or xpress written permission of xpress written permission o elieved to be elieved to be ent es the righ der the copyrights, patents or der the copyrights, pa arises arises by operation of law in by operation o the assumssu e reproduc diadia w i Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards ATTENTION!

This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions, where users have full knowledge of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet FCC limits. This radio device is NOT authorized for general population, consumer, or any other use. To ensure compliance to RF Energy Exposure Regulations:

Install only Motorola Solutions approved antennas and accessories Be sure that antenna installation is per Antenna Installation of this manual Be sure that Product Safety and RF Safety Booklet enclosed with this radio is available to the end user upon completion of the installation of this radio Before using this product, read the guide enclosed with your radio which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for compliance with applicable standards and regulations. which lists approved accessories for your radio model: http://www.motorolasolutions.com.D For a list of Motorola Solutions-approved antennas and other accessories, visit the following web site tions-approved antennas ions-approved ante sories for your radio mode sories for your radio y awarenes y awarenes closed closed raft ii Table of Contents Table of Contents iii Foreword..........................................................................................................i RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-way Radios..............................................i Manual Revisions .........................................................................................................................................i Parts Ordering ..............................................................................................................................................i Computer Software Copyrights ....................................................................................................................i Document Copyrights...................................................................................................................................i Disclaimer.....................................................................................................................................................i Trademarks ..................................................................................................................................................i Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards.......................ii Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme..................................................xiii ering ering D y .................. y ........................ Commercial Warranty ..................................................................................xv COMMUNICATIO overs And For How Long .. ............................ ......................................... S COMMUNICATION PRO Limited Warranty .......................................................................................................................................xv MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS .........................................................xv I. What This Warranty Covers And For How Long ....................................................................xv II. General Provisions...............................................................................................................xvi III. State Law Rights .................................................................................................................xvi IV. How To Get Warranty Service ............................................................................................xvi V. What This Warranty Does Not Cover...................................................................................xvi VI. Patent And Software Provisions ........................................................................................ xvii VII. Governing Law.................................................................................................................. xvii raft

................................. ........................................ e ........................................ ..................................... over................................. over................................... .............................. ..................................... ............................ ........................ Introduction ......................................................................... 1-1 And For How

......................................... ............................ Chapter 1

...... 1.1 Mobile Radio Description............................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 Dimensions ....................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Standard Configurations ................................................................................................................ 1-6 1.2.1 Dash Mount Configuration ................................................................................................ 1-6 1.2.2 Remote Mount Configuration............................................................................................ 1-8 1.2.3 Multi Control Head .......................................................................................................... 1-11 1.3 Motorcycle Configurations ........................................................................................................... 1-11 1.4 Base/Control Stations .................................................................................................................. 1-11 1.5 Tools Required for APX Mobile Installations ............................................................................... 1-11 Chapter 2 Standard Configurations.................................................... 2-1 2.1 Planning the Installation................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1.3 Radio Operation Wiring for Dash and Remote Configurations ....................................... 2-12 2.1.3.1 Dash Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation.......................... 2-12 2.1.3.2 Remote Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation...................... 2-13 2.1.4 Ignition Sense Switch (Radio Wide Advance) ................................................................ 2-15 2.1.5 Motorola Branded SB9600 Siren/PA Configuration/Programming ................................. 2-17 MN003109A01 iv Table of Contents 2.2.3 2.2 Radio Mounting ........................................................................................................................... 2-18 2.2.2 Remote Mount with Trunnion.......................................................................................... 2-21 2.2.2.1 Remote Mount Control Head Installation............................................................... 2-21 2.2.2.2 Multiple Control Head Installation.......................................................................... 2-24 2.2.2.3 Cable Installation ................................................................................................... 2-26 2.2.2.4 Setting the Initial Control Head ID ......................................................................... 2-26 2.2.2.5 O3 Control Head and Remote Mount Cabling....................................................... 2-27 Locking Kit (Optional) ..................................................................................................... 2-29 2.2.3.1 All Radios .............................................................................................................. 2-29 2.3 Power Cables (Transceiver and Control Head)........................................................................... 2-30 2.3.1 O2, O5, O7 or O9 Control Head Power Cables.............................................................. 2-30 2.3.2 Battery Selector Switch................................................................................................... 2-31 2.4 Antenna Installation ..................................................................................................................... 2-32 2.4.1 Selecting an Antenna Site/Location on a Metal Body Vehicle........................................ 2-32 2.4.2 Multiplexers and Vehicle Installation............................................................................... 2-34 2.4.3 QMA Connection (APX8500 Only) ................................................................................. 2-34 2.4.4 GPS/GLONASS/Wi-Fi/Antenna Placement (APX8500 Only)......................................... 2-34 2.5 Speaker ....................................................................................................................................... 2-35 Internal Speaker Disassembly........................................................................................ 2-36 2.6 Microphone Hang-Up Clip ........................................................................................................... 2-38 Standard or O3 Control Head Hang-Up Clip .................................................................. 2-38 2.7 RFID (Option) .............................................................................................................................. 2-38 2.7.1 RFID Reading................................................................................................................. 2-39 2.7.2 Programming RFID (If Equipped) ................................................................................... 2-41 2.8 Completing the Installation .......................................................................................................... 2-42

................. ................ trol Head Hang-U trol Head Hang

................................... ........................... ........................................ ...........................

(If Equipped) ...................

(If Equipped) ....... ..................................... ............ mbly.. mbly.. 2.6.1 2.5.1 Chapter 3 Universal Relay Controller Installation ............................. 3-1 ContCon roller Installat oller Inst 3.1 Universal Relay Controller Mounting ............................................................................................. 3-1 3.2 O7/O9 Universal Relay Controller Cable Assembly ...................................................................... 3-3 3.2.1 Power Cable ..................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2.2 Ground Cable ................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2.3 Wires ................................................................................................................................ 3-4 3.2.4 O7/O9 to URC Cable........................................................................................................ 3-5

......................................... .................................... embly ........................... embly ............................... ............................. ................................ ........................ ....................... ................ ...... ...... ..... Chapter 4 Options and Accessories Installation ............................... 4-1 4.1 Dash-Mount Accessory Installation ............................................................................................... 4-1 4.1.1 Dash-Mount Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch Installation ....................................... 4-1 4.1.2 Dash-Mount Horn and Lights (External Alarms) Relays................................................... 4-2 4.2 Remote-Mount Accessory Installation ........................................................................................... 4-2 4.2.1 Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch Installation............................................................ 4-3 4.2.2 Horn (External Alarm) Relay Installation........................................................................... 4-3 4.2.3 Lights (External Alarm) Relay Installation......................................................................... 4-3 4.2.4 Gunlock Installation .......................................................................................................... 4-3 4.2.5 Horn-Ring Transfer........................................................................................................... 4-5 4.2.6 Record Audio Out Jack of Transmit and Receive Audio................................................... 4-5 4.2.7 Earphone Jack.................................................................................................................. 4-5 4.2.8 USB Data Cables.............................................................................................................. 4-6 4.2.9 RS232 Cables .................................................................................................................. 4-6 4.3 Vehicle Interface Port Overview .................................................................................................... 4-6 VIP Output Connections ................................................................................................... 4-7 VIP Input Connections...................................................................................................... 4-8 4.3.1 4.3.2 MN003109A01 Table of Contents v 4.4 Accessory Connector Assembly Details (P2) ................................................................................ 4-9 4.4.1 Disassembly and Assembly.............................................................................................. 4-9 4.4.1.1 Disassembly ............................................................................................................ 4-9 4.4.1.2 Assembly ............................................................................................................... 4-10 4.5 Motorola Branded SB9600 Siren Connection to APX 8500......................................................... 4-11 4.6 Compatibility of Emergency when Attaching a Motorola Branded SB9600 Siren........................ 4-13 Chapter 5 Motorcycle Radio Installation ............................................ 5-1 5.2 5.3 5.4 allation H rcycle Inst rcycle WireWire

............. ........... with Speaker and Control Control Head ..................... ounting Plate.......... ounting Plate.................... Head ........ .................... ................... tion cation .................... cation ............................ lation ............................... lation ................ D 5.1 Motorcycle Radio Description ........................................................................................................ 5-1 5.1.1 Transceiver Enclosure ...................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1.2 Control/Display Unit .......................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1.3 Control Head Cable .......................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1.4 Microphone ....................................................................................................................... 5-2 5.1.5 External Speaker .............................................................................................................. 5-2 5.1.6 Headset Capability............................................................................................................ 5-2 5.1.7 Antenna ............................................................................................................................ 5-2 5.1.8 Ignition Sense (ACC) Wire................................................................................................ 5-2 Installation Overview...................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 5-3 5.2.2 Important Motorcycle Installation Hints............................................................................. 5-4 5.2.3 Parts Identification ............................................................................................................ 5-5 5.2.4 Order of Installation .......................................................................................................... 5-5 Installing the Universal Mounting Plate.......................................................................................... 5-6 Installing the Speaker and Control Head ....................................................................................... 5-7 5.4.1 Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together...................... 5-8 5.4.2 Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together ........ 5-9 5.4.3 Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately................. 5-11 5.4.4 Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately ... 5-12 Installing the Speaker .................................................................................................................. 5-14 Installing the Microphone Hang-Up Clip ...................................................................................... 5-14 Extension Bracket Mounting ........................................................................................... 5-14 5.6.1 5.6.2 Speaker/Control Head Bracket Side Mounting ............................................................... 5-14 5.6.3 Other Hang-Up Clip Mounting ........................................................................................ 5-15 Installing Antenna Base, Cables and Multiplexer ........................................................................ 5-15 5.7 5.8 Installing the Antenna .................................................................................................................. 5-21 5.9 Cable Routing .............................................................................................................................. 5-21 5.10 Installing the Weather-Resistant Enclosure................................................................................. 5-23 5.11 Transceiver, Cabling and Multiplexer Installation ....................................................................... 5-24 5.11.1 Installing Cabling in the Enclosure.................................................................................. 5-24 5.11.2 Installing the Transceiver................................................................................................ 5-25 5.12 Installing the Emergency Switch Option ...................................................................................... 5-27 5.13 Installing the External Alarm Relay Option .................................................................................. 5-27 5.14 Installing the Headset Accessory................................................................................................. 5-27 5.15 Installing the O5 Control Head Sunshield.................................................................................... 5-29 5.16 Horn/Lights Wiring ....................................................................................................................... 5-31 5.17 Emergency Switch Wiring............................................................................................................ 5-31 raft eaker and Control Head Speaker and Control Head and Contr with Speake with Speaker and Control

.................................... ........................................ .............................. ...... ...................... ........................ ....................... th Speaker and C lation with Speaker and Co ation with Speaker nting ......... g .... ..... .... 5.5 5.6 Chapter 6 Finishing the Installation.................................................... 6-1 6.1 Cable Connection .......................................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1.1 O2 Control Head............................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1.2 O3 Control Head............................................................................................................... 6-1 MN003109A01 vi Table of Contents 6.1.3 O5 Control Head............................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1.4 O7 Control Head............................................................................................................... 6-2 6.1.5 O9 Control Head............................................................................................................... 6-2 6.2 Dust Cover Installation .................................................................................................................. 6-3 Chapter 7 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting ............... 7-1 7.1 Check Wiring of Ignition and Radio Ignition Sensing..................................................................... 7-1 7.2 Check Physical Installation of Radio Ground and Radio Accessory Wiring .................................. 7-2 7.3 Improve the Electrical Quality of the Power and Ignition Lines ..................................................... 7-2 7.4 Minimize the Effect of Poorly Grounded Antennas........................................................................ 7-3 7.5 Jump-Start the Vehicle .................................................................................................................. 7-3 7.6 Eliminate Noise/Howling from PA Speaker ................................................................................... 7-3 Appendix A Replacement Parts Ordering..............................................A-1 A.1 Basic Ordering Information............................................................................................................A-1 A.2 Motorola Online Service and Support............................................................................................A-1 A.3 Accessories Aftermarket Division (AAD) .......................................................................................A-2 on (AAD) ... on (AAD) ... port.... port.... Index .....................................................................................................Index-1

........................... .................... D Glossary .........................................................................................Glossary-1

............................... ..................... raft Related Publications ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O2 Control Head User Guide.......................................................... 68012006035 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O3 Control Head User Guide .......................................................... 6875946M01 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O5 Control Head User Guide .......................................................... 6875947M01 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O7 Control Head User Guide.......................................................... 68012006034 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O9 Control Head User Guide ......................................................... 68007024014 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio Basic Service Manual .................................................................. MN003076A01 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O2 Quick Reference Card ................................................................. PMLN6193 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O3 Quick Reference Card ................................................................. PMLN5591 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O5 Quick Reference Card ................................................................. PMLN5592 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O7 Quick Reference Card ................................................................. PMLN6194 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O9 Quick Reference Card ................................................................. PMLN5711 ASTRO APX Mobile Safety Manual ............................................................................................... NNTN7851 ASTRO APX Wi-Fi Provisioning Leaflet ................................................................................... MN001435A01 e............................ e................................. ....................... .......................... .................. ...... .......... ..... MN003109A01 List of Figures List of Figures vii Figure 1-1. Front View of O2 Control Head Attached to APX 8500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion .............................................................. 1-1 Figure 1-2. Side View of O2 Control Head Attached to APX 8500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion............................................................... 1-1 Figure 1-3. Front View of O3 Control Head with Coiled Cable................................................................ 1-1 Figure 1-4. Side View of O3 Control Head with Coiled Cable ................................................................. 1-1 Figure 1-5. Front View of O5 Control Head Attached to APX 8500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion............................................................... 1-2 Figure 1-6. Side View of O5 Control Head Attached to APX 8500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion................................................................................. 1-2 untunt Figure 1-7. Front View of O7 Control Head Attached to APX 8500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver D Mount and Mount and ntrol Head with ntrol Head wi ContControl Head with R rol Head with 5 Control Head wit 5 Control Head with Re m ContControl Head with Remot ad wit and Trunnion......................................................................................................................... 1-2 Figure 1-8. Side View of O7 Control Head Attached to APX 8500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion................................................................................................................................ 1-2 Figure 1-9. Front View of Remote Mount and Trunnion .......................................................................... 1-2 Figure 1-10. Side View of Remote Mount and Trunnion ........................................................................... 1-2 Figure 1-11. Front View of O2 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion....................................... 1-3 Figure 1-12. Side View of O2 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion ........................................ 1-3 Figure 1-13. Front View of O5 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion....................................... 1-3 Figure 1-14. Side View of O5 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion ........................................ 1-3 Figure 1-15. Front View of O7 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion....................................... 1-3 Figure 1-16. Side View of O7 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion ........................................ 1-3 Figure 1-17. Front View of O9 Control Head with Trunnion ...................................................................... 1-4 Figure 1-18. Side View of O9 Control Head with Trunnion........................................................................ 1-4 Figure 1-19. Top View of O9 Universal Relay Controller with Trunnion (URC is an orderable accessory)1-4 Figure 1-20. Side View of O9 UniversalRelay Controller with Trunnion(URC is an orderable accessory) 1-4 Figure 1-21. Siren and Lights Interface Module (SLIM) ............................................................................ 1-4 Figure 1-22. Front View of SB9600 Whelen Siren .................................................................................... 1-5 Figure 1-23. Siren/PA Cable Connections................................................................................................. 1-5 Figure 1-24. Dash Mount Configuration for O2 Control Head................................................................... 1-6 Figure 1-25. Dash Mount Configuration for O3 Control Head................................................................... 1-6 Figure 1-26. Dash Mount Configuration for O5 Control Head................................................................... 1-7 Figure 1-27. Dash Mount Configuration for O7 Control Head................................................................... 1-7 Figure 1-28. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, raft Controller with Trunnion ay Controller with Trunnion Controller with Trunnion Controller with Trunnion(U(

SLIM) ........................... SLIM) ............................... ............................. ................................ ........................ ...................... ontrol Head with Re ontrol Head with Remote M with Rem ead w unnion ........ unnion ad with Trunnion... ad with Trunnion.............. rol Head with Remote Mou Head with Tr ead........... ..... d...... .... CHIB Rear Assembly and O2 Control Head ........................................................................ 1-8 Figure 1-29. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board and O3 Control Head................................................................................................................... 1-8 Figure 1-30. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly and O5 Control Head ......................................................................... 1-9 Figure 1-31. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly and O7 Control Head................................................................................... 1-9 Figure 1-32. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board and O9 Control Head................................................................................................................... 1-9 Figure 1-33. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Radio Transceiver, Universal Relay Controller and O7 Control Head (URC is optional).............................................................................. 1-10 Figure 1-34. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Radio Transceiver, Universal Relay Controller and O9 Control Head (URC is optional).............................................................................. 1-10 Figure 2-1. Dash Mount Radios Can Be Located in the Middle Console, on the Transmission Hump, or Under the Dash..................................................................................................................... 2-2 MN003109A01 viii List of Figures Figure 2-2. Remote Mount Radio Control Heads Can Be Located in the Middle Console, on the Transmis-

sion Hump, or Under the Dash ............................................................................................. 2-2 Figure 2-3. Remote Mount of the Radio, O9 Control Head and Universal Relay Controller (URC is on Ori on Or optional)................................................................................................................................ 2-2 Figure 2-4. Radio Installation (O2 Mid Power Dash Mount).................................................................... 2-3 Figure 2-5. Radio Installation (O3 Mid Power Dash Mount).................................................................... 2-3 Figure 2-6. Radio Installation (O5 Mid Power Dash Mount).................................................................... 2-4 Figure 2-7. Radio Installation (O7 Mid Power Dash Mount).................................................................... 2-4 Figure 2-8. Radio Installation (O2 Mid Power Remote Mount) ............................................................... 2-5 Figure 2-9. Radio Installation (O3 Mid Power Remote Mount) ............................................................... 2-6 Figure 2-10. Radio Installation (O5 Mid Power Remote Mount) ............................................................... 2-6 Figure 2-11. Radio Installation (O7 Mid Power Remote Mount) ............................................................... 2-7 Figure 2-12. Radio Installation of O9 Remote Mount with Transceiver (URC is optional) ........................ 2-7 Figure 2-13. Radio Installation (O9 Remote Mount with Pinouts) ............................................................. 2-8 Figure 2-14. Remote Control Head Pinouts.............................................................................................. 2-8 Figure 2-15. Cabling Interconnect Diagram for Dash Mount..................................................................... 2-9 Figure 2-16. Cabling Interconnect Diagram for Remote Mount .............................................................. 2-10 Figure 2-17. Cabling Interconnect Diagram for 09 Remote Mount (URC is optional) ..............................2-11 Figure 2-18. APX8500 Mid Power Trunnion Orientation......................................................................... 2-18 Figure 2-19. Transmission Hump Trunnion Mounting ............................................................................. 2-20 Figure 2-20. Below Dash Trunnion Mounting.......................................................................................... 2-20 Figure 2-21. O5 Control Head Installation Exploded View (Also applicable for O2 and O7 Control Heads)........................................................................................................................................ 2-22 Figure 2-22. O9 Control Head Installation Exploded View...................................................................... 2-23 Figure 2-23. O5 and O9 Control Head Rear View .................................................................................. 2-23 Figure 2-24. Multiple Control Heads Parallel Configurations .................................................................. 2-24 Figure 2-25. Multiple Control Heads Series Configurations .................................................................... 2-25 Figure 2-26. APX Mobile O5 Control Head Front View........................................................................... 2-26 Figure 2-27. Radio Display with Current Control Head ID ...................................................................... 2-26 Figure 2-28. APX Mobile O5 Control Head Front View Mode Knob .................................................... 2-26 Figure 2-29. O3 Control Head................................................................................................................. 2-27 Figure 2-30. O3 Control Head Rear View ............................................................................................... 2-28 Figure 2-31. Hang-Up Clip Installation Exploded View ........................................................................... 2-28 Figure 2-32. Locking Kit (Optional) ........................................................................................................ 2-29 Figure 2-33. HKN6188_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector ............................................... 2-30 Figure 2-34. HKN6187_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector, Record raft tion ons ...... View............... Head ID ........................... ead ID .......................... ew Mode Knob ........... ew Mode Knob ............. ............................... ..................................... ........................ ............................ .............. .................... ...... .... nnenne D Rear View ........... Config ations .......... allel Configur Configur Con Mounting........... Mounting.......... stallation Expl oded Vie ded stallat

............................ ........................................ d Rear View ...................... allation Exploded View...... allation Exploded V ont View........................... ations ................ nion Mounti nion Mount Audio Output Jack (2.5 mm) and Earphone Jack (2.5 mm)................................................ 2-31 Figure 2-35. Battery Selector Switch....................................................................................................... 2-31 Figure 2-36. Multiple Antennas Separation for locations 1-10 ................................................................ 2-33 Figure 2-37. Multiplexer Views................................................................................................................ 2-34 Figure 2-38. GPS/GLONASS and Wi-Fi Antenna Connector on the Back of the Mid Power Radio ....... 2-34 Figure 2-39. Speaker Mounting............................................................................................................... 2-35 Figure 2-40. Removing the screws on the Control Head ........................................................................ 2-36 Figure 2-41. Removing the Control Head ............................................................................................... 2-36 Figure 2-42. Disconnecting the Speaker Connector ............................................................................... 2-37 Figure 2-43. Reattaching the Control Head ............................................................................................ 2-37 Figure 2-44. RFID Location on Mid Power Radio ................................................................................... 2-38 Figure 2-45. Read Angle for Mid Power Radio........................................................................................ 2-39 Figure 2-46. Tag Angle for Mid Power Radio .......................................................................................... 2-39 Figure 2-47. Examples of Reader and Tag Aligned (Reader Orientation)............................................... 2-40 Figure 2-48. Example of Reader and Tag Misaligned (Reader Orientation) ........................................... 2-40 Figure 3-1. Universal Relay Controller Orientation ................................................................................. 3-1 Figure 3-2. Universal Relay Controller Installation Exploded View ......................................................... 3-2 Figure 3-3. Power and Ground Cable Glands......................................................................................... 3-3 List of Figures ix D Figure 3-4. Cable Gland Assembly with Gasket...................................................................................... 3-4 Figure 3-5. Wires Installation................................................................................................................... 3-4 Figure 3-6. Wire Installation with Black Stick .......................................................................................... 3-5 Figure 3-7. O7/O9 to URC Cable Installation.......................................................................................... 3-5 Figure 4-1. Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram ...................................................................................... 4-1 Figure 4-2. Horn/Light Wiring Diagram.................................................................................................... 4-2 Figure 4-3. Radio MAP Connector .......................................................................................................... 4-2 Figure 4-4. Gunlock Switch Redundancy Diagram ................................................................................. 4-4 Figure 4-5. Siren/PA Horn-Ring Connections.......................................................................................... 4-5 Figure 4-6. Remote Control Head Pinouts .............................................................................................. 4-6 Figure 4-7. HKN6196_ VIP Connector Detail.......................................................................................... 4-6 Figure 4-8. Relay Coil.............................................................................................................................. 4-7 Figure 4-9. Exploded View of Accessory Connector Assembly (HLN6863_) ........................................ 4-10 Figure 4-10. J600 Accessory Connector Y-Cable KT000247A01............................................................ 4-11 Figure 4-11. Pinout for cable KT000247A01........................................................................................... 4-11 Figure 4-12. Interfacing the Y-cable to the Motorola Branded SB9600 Siren and External Accessories 4-12 Figure 4-13. Field adjustment for Emergency Operation with Siren Accessory ...................................... 4-13 Figure 4-14. Location for Pin 8................................................................................................................ 4-13 Figure 5-1. Identification of a Motorcycle Radio by Using a Label .......................................................... 5-1 Figure 5-2. Universal Mounting Plate Installation (Part of Radio Enclosure Kit) ..................................... 5-6 Figure 5-3. Motorcycle Control Head Cabling (3075217A01) ................................................................. 5-7 Figure 5-4. Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together .......................... 5-8 Figure 5-5. Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together ........... 5-10 Figure 5-6. Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately..................... 5-12 Figure 5-7. Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately........ 5-13 Figure 5-8. Antenna Band Identification................................................................................................ 5-15 Figure 5-9. Antenna Port Locations....................................................................................................... 5-16 Figure 5-10. Routing the GPS/Wi-Fi Cable ............................................................................................. 5-17 Figure 5-11. Routing the VHF Antenna Cable......................................................................................... 5-18 Figure 5-12. Routing the 700/800 Antenna Cable................................................................................... 5-18 Figure 5-13. Routing the UHF Antenna Cable......................................................................................... 5-19 Figure 5-14. Multiplexer and Trunnion Mounting..................................................................................... 5-19 Figure 5-15. Cable Routing ..................................................................................................................... 5-20 Figure 5-16. Cable from Radio to Multiplexer.......................................................................................... 5-20 Figure 5-17. Cable Routing ..................................................................................................................... 5-21 Figure 5-18. Weather-Resistant Enclosure Installation ........................................................................... 5-23 Figure 5-19. Installing Cables.................................................................................................................. 5-25 Figure 5-20. Installing the Transceiver .................................................................................................... 5-26 Figure 5-21. Motorcycle Wiring Harness Rework.................................................................................... 5-28 Figure 5-22. Remote Mount Trunnion with Sunshield ............................................................................. 5-29 Figure 5-23. Position the Sunshield ........................................................................................................ 5-29 Figure 5-24. Slide the Control Head onto Trunnion................................................................................. 5-30 Figure 5-25. Position Control Head as Desired....................................................................................... 5-30 Figure 5-26. Horn/Lights Wiring Diagram................................................................................................ 5-31 Figure 5-27. Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram .................................................................................... 5-31 Figure 6-1. Dust Cover Installation Locations ......................................................................................... 6-3 raft ycle R ycle R ate ate Installat Installa HeHead Cabling (3 ad Cabling (

lation ake lation with Speaker an ole Installation with Speak ole Installation with tion with Speaker and tion ea

.................... ............................ ....................................... e ........... ............... ................................ .................................... e........................................ e.................................... e....................................... .................................... with Speaker a Con nstallation with Sp stallation with Speaker an

........................... ........................ ...................... ation.................................. ................ ..... ........... ..... MN003109A01 x List of Tables List of Tables Table 2-1. Dash and Remote O2, O3, O5, O7 or O9 Radio Power ON @ J2 ................................ 2-14 Table 2-2. Remote O2, O5, O7 or O9 Radio Power ON @ J200.................................................... 2-14 Ignition Interface Cables ................................................................................................ 2-14 Table 2-3. Table 2-4. Ignition Sense Switch Settings in CPS........................................................................... 2-15 Table 2-5. Power Level Configurations ...........................................................................................2-17 Table 2-6. Mid Power Trunnion Kit.................................................................................................. 2-19 Table 2-7. Available CAN Cables.................................................................................................... 2-25 Table 2-8. Power Cables................................................................................................................. 2-30 Table 2-1. Model Number Chart in 12-Digit ASCII Format.............................................................. 2-41 Table 2-2. Serial Number with Radio Band/Tier/Power................................................................... 2-41 Table 4-1. VIP Output Connections................................................................................................... 4-7 Table 4-2. VIP Input Connections ..................................................................................................... 4-8 Table 5-1. Transceiver Installation Parts List .................................................................................. 5-27 D raft 6878215A01 List of Tables xi Notes D raft 6878215A01 xii List of Tables D raft 6878215A01 Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme xiii Typical Model Number:

Position:

M 3 7 1 2 3 T 4 S S 5 6 9 7 P W 1 8 10 9 A 11 N S 12 13 0 P 1 14 15 16 24 = APX 2500 22 = APX 4500 37 = APX 8500 Position 1 - Type of Unit M = Mobile L = Table Top Station Positions 2 & 3 - Model Series Model Series 30 = APX 7500 25 = APX 6500 36 = APX1500 Position 4 - Frequency Band

=

A

=

B

=

C

=

D

=

E

=

F

=

G

=

H Less than 29.7MHz 29.7 to 35.99MHz 36 to 41MHz 42 to 50MHz 300 to 345MHz 66 to 80MHz 74 to 90MHz Product Specific VHF Range 136 to 162MHz 146 to 178MHz 174 to 210MHz 190 to 235MHz

=

=

=

=

UHF Range N P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 330 to 370MHz 366 to 410MHz 403 to 437MHz 438 to 482MHz 470 to 620MHz Product Specific 806 to 870MHz*

825 to 870MHz 896 to 941MHz z 403-470MHz Hz 1.0 to 1.6GHz 6GHz 1.5 to 2.0GHz

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

Positions 13 - 16 SP Model Suffix Position 12 -

Unique Model Variations C = Cenelec N = Standard Package Position 11 - Version Version Letter (Alpha) - Major Change Position 10 - Feature Level 1 = Basic 2 = Limited Package 3 = Limited Plus 4 = Intermediate 5 = Standard Package 6 = Standard Plus 7 = Expanded Package 8 = Expanded Plus 9 = Full Feature/

Programmable epresen J K L M

* For APX 7500 "K" in Position 4 represents 136-174MHz.

* For APX 7500 "Q" in Position 4 represents 380-470MHz.

* For APX 7500 "S" in Position 4 represent 470-520MHz.

* For APX 7500 "U" in Position 4 represent ent 762-870MHz. Note: Values represented are not absolute, and are given to indicate range only. n 4 rep represe D 2.0GHD D r raft raraafhone Position 9 - Primary System Type

=

Conventional

=

Privacy Plus

=

Clear SMARTNET

=

Advanced Conventional Stat-Alert

=

Enhanced Privacy Plus

=

Nauganet 888 Series

=

Japan Specialized Mobile Radio (JSMR)

=

Multi-Channel Access (MCA)

=

CoveragePLUS

=

MPT1327* - Public

=

MPT1327* - Private

=

Radiocom

=

Tone Signalling

=

Binary Signalling

=

Phonenet

=

=

IDEN Basic IDEN Ba

=

=

IDEN Advanced Feature IDEN Adv

=

=

JSMR Digital JSMR Digita

=

LTR Protocol TR Proto

=

Single Sideband Single Sid

=

=

Programmable Programm

=

=

Secure Conventional Se

=

=

Secure SMARTNET

=

TETRA

=

SmartZone

* MPT = Ministry of Posts and Telecommunications 36 to 60 Watts 61 to 110 Watts Up to 125 Watts 1 to 25 Watts 25 to 40 Watts 25 to 45 Watts 10 to 35 Watts 10 to 50 Watts 25 to 110 Watts A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R R S S T T U U V W X X Y Y Z Z 2 2 0 to 0.7 Watts 0.7 to 0.9 Watts 1.0 to 3.9 Watts 4.0 to 5.0 Watts 5.1 to 6.0 Watts 6.1 to 10 Watts 10.1 to 15 Watts 16 to 25 Watts 26 to 35 Watts Position 5 - Power Level

=

K

=

A

=

L

=

B

=

M

=

C

=

N

=

D

=

P

=

E

=

Q

=

F

=

R

=

G

=

S

=

H

=

T

=

J Note: Values represented are not absolute, and are given to indicate range only. Position 6 - Physical Packages A

=

B

=

C

=

D

=

E

=

F

=

G

=

H

=

J

=

K

=

L

=

M

=

N

=

P

=

Q

=

R

=

S

=

T

=

=

U

=

V

=

W Position 7 - Channel Spacing 0 =

1 = 5KHz 2 = 6.25KHz 3 = 10KHz 4 = 12.5KHz RF Modem Operation Receiver Only Standard Control; No Display Standard Control; With Display Limited Keypad; No Display Limited Keypad; With Display Full Keypad; No Display Full Keypad; With Display Limited Controls; No Display Limited Controls; Basic Display Limited Controls; Limited Display Rotary Controls; Standard Display Enhanced Controls; Enhanced Display Low Profile; No Display Low Profile; Basic Display Low Profile; Basic Display, Full Keypad Tranceiver with Selectable Control Head 5 = 15KHz 6 = 20/25KHz 7 = 30KHz 8 = 12.5/25KHz 9 = Variable/Programmable VDV Control Head Control Head #2 MN003109A01_aa A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T Position 8 - Primary Operation

=

Conventional/Simplex

=

Conventional/Duplex

=

Trunked Twin Type

=

Dual Mode Trunked

=

Dual Mode Trunked/Duplex

=

Trunked Type I

=

Trunked Type II

=

FDMA* Digital Dual Mode

=

TDMA** Digital Dual Mode

=

Single Sideband

=

Global Positioning Satellite Capable

=

Amplitude Companded Sideband (ACSB)

=

Digital Dispatch

=

Programmable

=

Digital Interconnect

=

Digital Multi-Service

=

9600 Capable

=

TDMA

* FDMA = Frequency Division Multiple Access

** TDMA = Time Division Multiple Access xiv Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme Notes D raft MN003109A01_aa Commercial Warranty Commercial Warranty xv Limited Warranty MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. What This Warranty Covers And For How Long MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

ASTRO APX Mobile Radio e Re One (1) Year Product Accessories ssories One (1) YearD ssorieDD D re become the prope become the ts option, will at no charge ts option, will at n ed b MOTOROLA SOLU ded by MOTOROLA SOLU ransferable to any other pa ransferable to any other p ce it (with a new or ace it (with a new or recond nty period provided it is ty period provide s are warranted f ards are warranted for the ct shall ct raft Motorola Solutions, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. SOLUTIONS. MOTORT ions to this warr Unless m Unless made purchas urc ProPro ns to this warrantyan S LA A SOLUTIONS. MO MN003109A01_aa xvi II. General Provisions Commercial Warranty This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS's option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. III. State Law Rights SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. al rights, a al rights, a N IV. How To Get Warranty Service rvice rvice urchase (bearing the da urchase (bearing th You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by Motorola Solutions through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product, it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also t can facilitate your obtaini n facilitate your obtaini call Motorola Solutions at 1-888-567-7347 US/Canada. 7 US/Canada. US/Canada. rvice and, also, de vice and, also, deliver or s l ed warranty serv warranty service locatio s authorized warranty s authorized warran serv ice te V. What This Warranty Does Not Cover A. Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary e PrProduct in oth uct in manner. B. Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. C. Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, or modification, or adjustment. D. Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. E. A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassemblies or repairs

(including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-Motorola Solutions supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with Motorola Solutions's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. F. Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. G. Rechargeable batteries if:

- any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering.

- the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. H. Freight costs to the repair depot. MN003109A01_aa Commercial Warranty xvii I. A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSs published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. J. Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. K. Normal and customary wear and tear. VI. Patent And Software Provisions MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

A. B. that MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim;

that MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and UTIONS UTIONS D ettlement or co ettlement or c uct or parts become, o uct or parts becom ubject of a claim of bject of a claim of infringe ff C. should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS's opinion be likely to ROLA SOLUTIONS, at its ROLA SOLUTIONS become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes noninfringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. o continue using the Produ o continue using the s retureturn. The depreciation deprec g or to grant su inging or to grant such pur raft ts as s established by MOTO established by MOT iability with respect to any ability with respect to an parts furnished he UTIONS, nor will M LUTIONS, nor will MO ware not furn ware not furnishh Product. T oduct nt of nt of uct or uct or parts furnished here MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, nor will MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such Motorola Solutions software. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS patent rights or copyrights. VII. Governing Law This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, USA. MN003109A01_aa xviii Commercial Warranty Notes D raft MN003109A01_aa Chapter 1 Introduction This manual covers the installation procedures for ASTRO APX mobile and motorcycle radios with O2, O3, O5, O7 and O9 control heads, and accessories required to complete the radio system. The radio system consists of a control head, radio, antenna, microphone, speaker, cabling, Universal Relay Controller (URC), and accessories. 1.1 Mobile Radio Description 1.1.1 Dimensions When installing the radio, make sure to plan the installation carefully and leave additional room in the rear of the radio for cabling and accessory connections; in the front of the radio for access, controls, and cabling (if remote mount); and to the sides of the radio so that you may access and install the trunnion screws/wing screws. NOTE: The measurement unit used in Figure 1-1 to Figure 1-20 is millimeter. used in used i 206 293 306 D D D D DD DDDDDDDDDDDD DDDD D DD D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDD D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDD D DDDDDDDDDDD D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DD D DD DDDD DDDD r r r r r rr rr r r r r r r r r rrr r r r r raft r r rr rr rr r afaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaafaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaafaafaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaafafafafafafafaaafaafaafafafafafaafafafafafafaaaaaaafaaaaaaaaafafafafafaaaafafafafaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaafaaaaaaaaafaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaafafafafafafaaaaaaaafafaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaafaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaafafafafafafaafafafaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaafaafafafafafafafafafafafafaaaaaaaaaaaafaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa id Power D Powe to APX 8500 51 84 Figure 1-1. Front View of O2 Control Head Attached Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion Figure 1-2. Side View of O2 Control Head Figure 1-2. S Figure 1-2. Attached to APX 8500 A Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion 61 38 153 Figure 1-3. Front View of O3 Control Head with Coiled Cable Figure 1-4. Side View of O3 Control Head with Coiled Cable 1-2 Introduction Mobile Radio Description 206 178 286 274 51 84 Figure 1-5. Front View of O5 Control Head Attached to APX 8500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion Figure 1-6. Side View of O5 Control Head Attached to APX 8500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion 206 178 291 278 51 84 D DD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD r r r r r rafts of the Figure 1-7. Front View of O7 Control Head Attached to APX 8500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion Figure 1-8. Side View of O7 Control Head Attached Figure 1-8. Side Vie gure 1-8. Side Vie to APX 8500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver to APX 8500 Mid Pow to APX 8500 Mid P and Trunnion an and Figure 1-9 and Figure 1-10, show the basic dimensions of the remote mount transceiver trunnion APX mobile radio. of th 206 178 261 51 84 Figure 1-9. Front View of Remote Mount and Trunnion Figure 1-10. Side View of Remote Mount and Trunnion MN003109A01_aa Introduction Mobile Radio Description 1-3 209 123 97 99 Figure 1-11. Front View of O2 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion Figure 1-12. Side View of O2 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion 75 51 180 D D D DDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDD DD D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D DDDDDDDDDDDDD D D D D D D D D D D D DD D DDD DD DD DDD D DDD DD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D D D D D D D D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDD DDDD DDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDD D D D D D DDDDDDDDD D D D D D D D D DDDDDDDDDDD DD DDDDD D D D D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D DDDD DDD D D D D DDDDD D D D DDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D DD DDDDDDDDDDDDDD D DDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D DD D D D D D D D D DDDD r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r rr r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r rr r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r5151551 ra raftwith ra ra ra ra ra ra rrrr r r Figure 1-13. Front View of O5 Control Head with th Remote Mount and Trunnion Figure 1-14. Side View of O5 Control Head with Figure 1-14. Side Figure 1-14. Si Remote Mount and Trunnion Remot Rem 209 178 108 82 91 Figure 1-15. Front View of O7 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion Figure 1-16. Side View of O7 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion MN003109A01_aa 1-4 Introduction Mobile Radio Description 190 83 178 Figure 1-17. Front View of O9 Control Head with Trunnion Figure 1-18. Side View of O9 Control Head with Trunnion 185 D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D D D D D D D D D D rrrrraft rrararrrrrrrrrrrrr rraaararara rrrrraaara rr0 rrrr rrrrrrrr rrrrr r r raft raft ra rarraafft raft araraft raft rara ra r af aaft afaf ft ftftftft 210 61.5 Figure 1-19. Top View of O9 Universal Relay Controller with Trunnion (URC is an Figure 1-20. Side View of O9 Universal Relay Controller with Trunnion (URC is an orderable 2020 orderable accessory) accessory) Figure 1-21. Siren and Lights Interface Module (SLIM) MN003109A01_aa Introduction Mobile Radio Description 1-5 Figure 1-22. Front View of SB9600 Whelen Siren T-Cable for Dual Control Head Only DD D D rraft raaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa raft raft raft aft aft Siren/PA Unit Red Fused Cable Connects to Battery Positive Terminal Figure 1-23. Siren/PA Cable Connections To Switch Box or DEK Speaker Leads Black Chassis Ground Cable MN003109A01_aa

 

 

 

 

 

 

Standard Configurations Planning the Installation 2-13 2.1.3.2 Remote Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation The single control head O2, O5, O7 or O9 remote mount configurations receive power from the J200 connectors red and black wires. The yellow wire at J200 is one ignition sense wire. On mid power radios, the J2 connector can also be used for ignition sense. If the HLN6863 is attached at J100 of the O2, O5, O7 or O9 control head, the thin red wire will NOT function as an ignition sense wire, since the J100 connector has no ignition sense electrical connection. NOTE: It is incorrect for installation to attach ignition sense at more than one wire or connector. Refer to Table 2-1 or Table 2-2 for its correct wiring configurations. The O3 control head receives its power down the CAN cable, and detects the ignition state by the ignition sense pin at J2. On mid power radios, the J2 connector can also be used for ignition sense. In Multi-Control Head installations, the yellow ignition wire must be connected to the head assigned ID # 1. Section 2.2.2.4: Setting the Initial Control Head ID for further information. The design of the control head is different compared to the transceiver, therefore it is also NOT necessary to attach HLN6863 at J100 to prevent accidental emergency operation. The control head can have an emergency accessory attached at connector J100 instead of at the transceiver connector J2. Wherever the emergency accessory is placed, it is recommended to only attach at one location rather than multiple emergency accessories attached at different points of the radio. emergency emergency ergen ergen D raft MN003109A01_aa 2-14 Standard Configurations Planning the Installation Dash/Remote Mount Connected to battery Connected to ignition switch Ignition switch controls Remote Connected to battery Connected to ignition switch Ignition switch controls Table 2-1. Dash and Remote O2, O3, O5, O7 or O9 Radio Power ON @ J2 Transceiver Transceiver Red Power Red Power Transceiver Red Power Thin Red Wire Thin Red Wire HLN6863 HLN6863 Wire

@ J2 Wire

@ J2 Wire HLN6863 Thin Red Wire

@ J2 X X X X X X X No ignition switch control. Enables ignition switch functionality as programmed in the codeplug. Illegal wiring configuration. See CAUTION note. Table 2-2. Remote O2, O5, O7 or O9 Radio Power ON @ J200 Control Head Red Wire

@J200 Control Head Yellow Wire

@J200 Control Head Red Wire

@J200 Control Head Yellow Wire

@J200 Control Head Red Wire

@J200 Control Head Yellow Wire

@J200 X X Illegal wiring configuration. See CAUTION note. No ignition switch control. X X X X X Enables ignition switch functionality ignit Enables Enables ignition switc as programmed in the codeplug. as programm as programmed in the c D D DDDD raf r rraafaft aftwith Only Ignition and aftDescription aftftt ftand DB 25 Cable, M.A.P. 26pin with Only Ignition and SPK Table 2-3. Ignition Interface Cables Ignition Interface Cables tion Interface Cables Y-Cable, M.A.P to M.A.P. and DB 25 h Only Ignition an Description Description d DB Part Number HLN6863_ KT000274A01

!

C a u t i o n DO NOT connect any wires to the battery terminals until you have finished the entire radio installation (Dash or Remote Mount) configuration to avoid potential equipment damage. Incorrect wiring of the radio may result in incorrect ignition sense detection, incorrect power-on state, or incorrect power-off state of the radio system. The Control Head Power cable wire (RED) and Transceiver Power cable wire (RED) are always attached to the battery terminal and NOT to the ignition switch. MN003109A01_aa Standard Configurations Planning the Installation 2-15 2.1.4 Ignition Sense Switch (Radio Wide Advance) CPS selectable settings to control the radios functionality based on the state of the vehicles Ignition status. These descriptions can be found in the CPS (customer programming software) tool HELP Guides and are repeated here for convenience. Feature Blank TX Inhibit PTT TX Inhibit Table 2-4. Ignition Sense Switch Settings in CPS Description Radio POWERS ON when the Power Button is pressed or with the emergency power up feature. Radio POWERS OFF when the Power Button is pressed.

(Available only when: the radio is model/option capable) Radio POWERS ON with a radio Power On button / knob selection. Radio POWERS OFF with a radio Power Off button / knob selection, or when the Inactiv-

ity Auto Power Off timer expires. While IGNITION is not present, certain communications are not possible:

ONON i I. II. adio does nn adio does n: the radio is model/option ca

: the radio is model/o The radio does not register with ASTRO 25 (APCO) - Trunking Systems and there-

fore cannot receive this type of Trunking communications (see the System Type ceiv field), however, Type II Trunking Systems can receive dispatch without being regis-

field), however, Typ field), however, Type II tered. tered. tere Also, the radio cannot be powered-on with the Emergency Power UP feature, and so, the radio cannot cannot lso, the radio Emergency Alarm transmissions using the Emergency Power UP footswitch are not ergency Alarm transmissions rgency Alarm transm possible. e. D De e cannot canD receive D rbe pow ra raft ra PTT button tft

(Available only when: the radio is model/option capable) Radio POWERS ON with a radio Power On button / knob selection. Radio POWERS OFF with a radio Power Off button / knob selection, or when the Inactiv-

The radio does not register with ASTRO 25 (APCO) - Trunking Systems and therefore cannot receive this type of Trunking communications (see the System Type field), however, Type II Trunking Systems can receive dispatch without being registered. Also, the radio cannot be powered-on with the an Emergency Power UP footswitch-press; however, the footswitch can be used to initiate Emergency Alarm transmissions if the radio is already on. While IGNITION is not present, all PTT button transmissions are inhibited:

ith a radio Power On butt N with a radio Power On butt with a radio Power Off button with a radio Power Off butto xpires. xpires. ity Auto Power Off timer expires. ter with AST ter with ASTRO is type of T ent, all PTT button tra ent, all type runk runk II. I. Required Radio POWERS ON when the Power Button is pressed and Ignition is present. Radio POWERS ON when Ignition is cycled and radio was previously ON. Radio POWERS OFF when the Power Button is pressed, or when Ignition is lost. Soft Power Off Radio POWERS ON when the Power Button is pressed, or when Ignition is detected. Radio POWERS OFF when the Power Button is pressed, or when Ignition is lost. Ignition Only Power Up Radio POWERS ON when Ignition is present. Radio POWERS OFF when Ignition is lost. Control head power button is ignored. MN003109A01_aa 2-16 Standard Configurations Planning the Installation NOTE: When either TX Inhibit, PTT TX Inhibit or Required are selected, the Emergency Power Up feature will not be available to the radio-user. When any other Ignition Switch setting is made, Emergency Power Up is available to the radio-user, regardless of current ignition state. Any optional inactivity time-out timer setting in CPS may delay the power off of the radio once Ignition sense is removed. D raft MN003109A01_aa Standard Configurations Planning the Installation 2-17 2.1.5 Motorola Branded SB9600 Siren/PA Configuration/Programming The Siren/PA is shipped pre-wired for 100W operation. It can be rewired for 65W, 75W, or 130W power levels. To change to another power level, perform the following:

1. Open the Siren/PA connector cover to gain access to the two-connector speaker leads. Do not change the speaker common lead (pin 20). The other lead is connected to pin 35 (for 100W operation). 2. Using an appropriate pin removal tool, extract pin 35 and move it to one of the following pin locations:

- pin location 36 for 75W operation

- pin location 28 for 65W or 130W operation 3. For 65W or 75W operation, no further changes are required. Reassemble the connector. 4. For 130W operation, you must parallel two 11 speakers, each rated at 65W minimum. nana ple, if th ple, if th and connect and connect er and connect t er and connect ho Proper phasing of the two speakers is important--when connecting two speakers in parallel, wire similar speaker terminals together to ensure maximum loudness and prevent

"deadspots." For example, if the terminals are marked "1" and "2", connect the terminals marked "1" together and connect those wires to one speaker lead. Connect the terminals marked "2" together and connect those wires to the other speaker lead. Before continuing, remember that under a high-line supply condition

(16.6V), up to 30% more power will go to the speaker(s) after reconfiguring for 130W operation. Do this only when your PA speakers are capable of handling the extra power. D D D r raf raf C a u t i o n aftr dual speak 5. When the Siren/PA is configured for dual speaker, 130W operation, it is necessary to remove a resistor and move two jumpers to set the correct power level. Remove the Siren/PA cover, and locate resistor R219 (0 ohm). This resistor should be removed for 130W operation. Locate jumpers JU100 and JU101. These jumpers should be installed for 130W operation. pers 6. Close and reconnect the Siren/PA connector cover. oveve 130W operation. D able of handling the extra p of handling the extra ntinuing, remember ontinuing, remember that u more pow power stor should be esisistor should be umpers sho dual speaker, 130W ope er, 130W op t the corr t the correct power le or 130W operation. Do this to 30% % more power will go

!

NOTE:Jumpers JU100 and JU101 do not affect the Siren output level. JU100 and JU101 compensate for the lower speaker load and the two speakers in parallel, by decreasing the gain U102-1. JU100 affects the radio PA level and JU101 affects the PA audio level. Pin locations of various power level configurations are listed in Table 2-5 Table 2-5. Power Level Configurations Pin location of speaker leads 65W 75W 100W 130W 20,28 20,36 20,35 20,28 R219 IN IN IN OUT JU100/JU101 Across pins A and B Across pins A and B Across pins A and B Across pins B and C MN003109A01_aa 2-18 2.2 Radio Mounting Standard Configurations Radio Mounting

!

C a u t i o n DO NOT mount the radio on a plastic mounting surface without first reinforcing the mounting surface; the weight of the radio may crack or break the mounting surface. DO NOT mount the radio on any surface where the radio could be partially submersed in water. This is especially important if the cab area of the vehicle is cleaned by spraying with water. If the radio sits in water for a length of time, moisture may seep inside the radio and damage the electronic components. DO NOT allow water to stand in recessed areas of vertically mounted radios. Remove any moisture immediately to prevent it from seeping down into the radio. Care must be taken to shield the control head (front and back) from direct exposure to pressurized water. The pressurized water from a hose, in most cases, is more severe than the stated test and conditions in typical environments. ondit onditio The mounting location must be accessible and visible. Select a location that will permit routing the st be ac st be a cessible and RF antenna cable as directly as possible. ctly as possible. ectly as possible. e a D D NOTE: For optimum radio performance, orient the mounting trunnion as shown in Figure 2-18 for mid power. For new or existing installations of all use only the APX mobile trunnion, kit number HLN7002_. rformance, orient th rformance, orient the moun allations of ng installations of all use o raf raft raftttftffaft aaaaaaftftffaafaaaaaft afaft afaaaaaftftt aft aftttt aaftft aft aft afftft afaft aaaaafaaaaafafafafafafafafafafftftftftftftfftfffftft aftftftftft RADIO APPLIES TO RADIOS IN DASH AND REMOTE INSTALLATIONS Figure 2-18. APX8500 Mid Power Trunnion Orientation MN003109A01_aa Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2.2.1 Dash Mount with Trunnion 2-19 1. Select the location to mount your radio on the transmission hump (see Figure 2-19) or under the dash (see Figure 2-20) NOTE: When mounting the trunnion on the transmission hump take care that the transmission housing is not affected. Plan your installation ensuring enough room for the Accessory connector and cable in the back of the radio. 2. Using the trunnion mounting bracket as a template, mark the positions of the holes on the mounting surface. Use the innermost four holes for a curved mounting surface such as the transmission hump, and the four outmost holes for a flat surface such as under the dash. 3. Center punch the spots you have marked and realign the trunnion in position. 4. Secure the trunnion mounting bracket with the four self-drilling screws provided

(see Figure 2-19 and Figure 2-20). 5. Ensure that the plastic guides are aligned (horizontal) to the grooves of the trunnion. Slide the radio into the grooves until it snaps into place (see Figure 2-20). Mid Power Transceiver APX 8500 Description on Mounting Screw Trunnion Mounting Screw Self-Drilling Tapping Screw Table 2-6. Mid Power Trunnion Kit DDescriptionnDTable 2-6. M Table 2-6. DDDD D D rraraf ron Mounting Screw raTapping Screw APX 8500raft g Screwa on Hardware Kitaf Mackinaw Trunnion Hardware Kit on Hardware Kit APX 8500 AP APX 85 Item Part Number 1 2 3 0371859H01 0312002B14 HLN7002_ MN003109A01_aa 2-20 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 3 1 1 Figure 2-19. Transmission Hump Trunnion Mounting Transmis Transmi 2 3 1 D D D D D D D DDDDDD D DDDDD DDDDDDDDD D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D D D D D D D D D D D D DDDDDDDDDD D D D D D D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DD DDD DD DDD D D D D D D D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D D D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DD DD D D D D D D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDD D DD DD D DD D DD D DD D DDD D DD DDDDDDDD DDDDDDD D D D DDD D D D D D D D D D DDDD D D raf rafarar r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r raft raaft raraaaaftftftftft ra ra ra rrarrrrrrrrraraaaaaaf rafaaaafffaaftf rrrrrrarrrrrrraft rararaaaaf rrraaraafaarr rararaarrrararararaaarrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrarrraaaarrrafffft araaafftt raafa affttffftfftfaafaaaraafa raffft rafafaaaf raraafaaaaaaaaaf rararararaafafa raaaaf raaftt raft raf raraafa rrrraaaraaaaaaaaaaaaafafffafaffff ffaaaaraafaffff raraafafff raafaaaafaafaf raraffffaffffafafffffffafaraaararararararararaafaafaafaffafafafafafafafafafafafafafaaaaaaaafaffffffff rrarrrrarrrraafaafafaaaafaaafafaaaafafaaaaaafafaafafaaaf rra rarraarrrrr raa rarr r afa aft aft aft aftft afafftftf aftfftfftfftt tftfftfftffafaffftftfffffffafaafaaffafft aftt aaftfftfftffafftttftft af afft afaafafttt aft aft afftft affafftastic tff ft ffffftfff tftf f t t t t Plastic Guides Guid Tabs 1 Groove Threaded Hole for Screw Figure 2-20. Below Dash Trunnion Mounting 6. Secure the radio with two screws provided (Item 1 in Table 2-6). The torque down force for 0371859H01 should be between 50in-lbf to 52in-lbf. NOTE: This configuration shows the O5 control head. The TIB is used for O3 control head for the same configuration. MN003109A01_aa Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2.2.2 Remote Mount with Trunnion 2-21 Before installing any electrical equipment, check the vehicle manufacturers user manual.

!

C a u t i o n The installation of this device should be completed by an authorized servicer or installer. Before making any holes in the trunk for radio mounting, check the vehicle manufacturer's user manual for restrictions (e.g. due to the gas tank location). For a remote mount installation, the transceiver may be mounted anywhere in the vehicle, provided that the installation location is safe, follows the cautions mentioned at the beginning of this section, and is accessible for servicing/maintenance as well as cabling. A typical mounting location recommended by Motorola is in the vehicles trunk. The trunnion provided may still be used to mount the transceiver, and the mounting process is the same as for the dash mount installation

(Section 2.2.1). See Figure 2-10 or Figure 2-11 for a remote installation. 2-102-10 or o FiguFigu ng pro ng pro ntrol Head Installat 2.2.2.1 Remote Mount Control Head Installation ntrol Head Insta ation for the radio, conside ation for the radio, c D Choose a mounting location for the radio, considering accessibility, and control and antenna cable lengths. The recommended mounting surfaces for the control unit are under the mounting surface, on the transmission hump, or on the center console. Figure 2-21 and Figure 2-22 shows how the trunnion, control head, and cables should be installed for the O2, O3, O5, O7 or O9 control head. NOTE: Connector-protective covers (Remote Mount Dust Cover kit) KT000246A01 are provided with Figure 2 the radio. They should be installed on exposed connectors for added environmental robustness. raft aces for the control unit a rfaces for the contro sole. Figure 2-21 er console. stalled for the O2, O3, O5 alled for the O2, O3, O5 mote Mount Dust mote Mount Dust Cover kit) nnennectors for add ctors for add Cover ki an MN003109A01_aa 2-22 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting An adjustable trunnion, which allows a number of mounting positions, is supplied for mounting the control unit. The installation must not interfere with the operation of the vehicle or its accessories, nor disturb passenger seating or leg room. The control head must be within convenient reach and viewing of the user. If the trunnion is mounted on a plastic mounting surface, all four mounting screws should penetrate the mounting surfaces supporting metal frame. If that is not possible, use a metal backing plate (not supplied) to strengthen the installation. Install the control follows:

1. Use the control unit trunnion as a template to mark the mounting holes; drill 5/32" holes. If mounting on a plastic surface, use a metal backing plate. 2. Attach the trunnion bracket using all four 10-16" x 5/8" self-tapping screws provided. 3. Temporarily install the control head (adjusting for proper viewing angle) and fasten it to the trunnion with two wing screws. Test the installation to be sure the control head feels securely locked in place while you are pressing its buttons. 4. Finish installation by fully tightening screws. Metal Backing Plate

(Not Supplied) D D D D D D D D D D D D D DD D D DDDDD DD D D DD D raaaaaa ra rrr r r r r r r r r r r r raft rafttftft raft raftftft ra ra rraft rafafafafafafaaft arrrr arrararararrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrarararararararararararararara afafaf aft aft aft aft afaftftft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft Figure 2-21. O5 Control Head Installation Exploded View (Also applicable for O2 and O7 Control Heads) MN003109A01_aa Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2-23 Adjust the control head to desired angle and secure with wing screws Use four mounting screws on all installations Trunnion IMPORTANT:

Mounting surface Use a metal backing plate (not supplied) if mounting trunnion on D D DDD D DD DDDDD DDD D DD D DDD D DD D D D D D D D D D D D DDDD raf r r r r r r raft raft raffffftft rararararararararararararararararararaffffffffffffftftftftftftftftftffffffffffffftftftftftftftftftftftft ra ra ra ra ra ra rara ra aaaraf plastic or unstable surface raftd Installation Explod raf raraft rararara rararara rrrrrrrarrrarara rarara aafffaa a f fft t Figure 2-22. O9 Control Head Installation Exploded View nstallation Explo Drill four 5/32 holes in mounting surface Figure 2-23. O5 and O9 Control Head Rear View MN003109A01_aa 2-24 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2.2.2.2 Multiple Control Head Installation Control heads in a multiple control head configuration should be installed per the steps detailed in Section 2.2.2.1: Remote Mount Control Head Installation . Two heads can be connected to each of the two CAN connectors on the transceiver, see Figure 2-24. Control heads can also be connected a daisy chain configuration from a single transceiver CAN connector. See Figure 2-25 for examples. NOTE: The transceiver must be configured for Multiple Control Head via CPS programming. Navigate to the Control Head tab in the Radio Wide section of CPS, and select Help for further information and tutorials. J J200 FUSE J300L J300L J300R R D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D DD D D D D D raf r r r raft raft raft rarararararararararararrarrrrrraarararararararaaaaaaaaraaaarrarararararararararararararararararararararararararrrararararrrarrarararrrararararararararararararrarararrarararararaaaafafffffffafafafaft rara aftft afttt200 aft aft afafafaft afafafafafafafafafafafafafftftfffftfffffffffffffffffffafaafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafafftftftftftffftftftftftftftfftfftftftftftftftfftfft ftftftft Co Control Head 4 Control Head 3 J300R J300R FUSE FUSE FUSE J200 J200 J300R J300L Control Head 1 Control Head 2 Figure 2-24. Multiple Control Heads Parallel Configurations FUSE J200 RED LEAD

(+)

(-) BATTERY MN003109A01_aa Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2-25 FUSE J300R J300L J200 J300R J300L J200 FUSE Control Head 1 Control Head 2 RED LEAD

(+)

(-) BATTERY FUSE J200 FUSE J200 J300 J300L L J300R ntrol Hea Control Head 3 D DDDDD DD J30D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D DD D D D DDDDD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D rra rrrara raaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r rrr r rr rr r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r ra raa rar ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra J300Rraft Control Heads Se r r ontrol Heads Series Con ries Co nstallations, nstallation the yellow ign the yellow ig Section 2.2.2.4:

# 1. 1. Section 2.2.2.4: Se Figure 2-25. Multiple Control Heads Series Configurations allation, en Control Head 4 NOTE: In Multiple Control Head (MCH) installations, the yellow ignition sense wire must be connected to the head assigned ID # 1. Section 2.2.2.4: Setting the Initial Control Head ID for further information. Use the most convenient configuration for your installation, ensuring that the combined cable lengths do not exceed 131 feet (40 meters). See Table 2-7 for a list of available CAN cable lengths. Control head ground, power and ignition sense wires (black, red, and yellow respectively) may need additional length (not supplied) in installations that locate the head more than 10 feet from a power source. ation a lisa li Table 2-7. Available CAN Cables Part Number Description HKN6164_ Cable, Remote Mount, 40m (131ft) HKN6165_ Cable, Remote Mount, 35m (115ft) HKN6166_ Cable, Remote Mount, 23m (75ft) HKN6167_ Cable, Remote Mount, 15m (50ft) HKN6168_ Cable, Remote Mount, 9m (30ft) HKN6169_ Cable, Remote Mount, 5m (17ft) HKN6170_ Cable, Remote Mount, 3m (10ft) PMLN4958_ Cable, O3 Extension, 5m (17ft) MN003109A01_aa 2-26 2.2.2.3 Cable Installation Standard Configurations Radio Mounting Route the cables where they are protected from pinching, sharp edges or crushing. Use grommets in any holes where the cable passes through metal panels. Figure 2-15 shows how the cables and components are connected. It is not recommended to route cabling or wiring inside the wheel wells of a vehicle. 2.2.2.4 Setting the Initial Control Head ID The Front Panel Programming (FPP) mode allows you to define which control head in a Multi Control Head system becomes control head number 1-4. Set the control head ID number for each attached head the first time Multi Control Head is used. 1. Press the power button to power off the radio. 2. Press and hold left-most menu and the orange button on the control head simultaneously. O5 Emergency Button 3. Press the power button to power on the control head. The head will power on into FPP mode Figure 2-26. APX Mobile O5 Control Head Front View Control Head Contro the control h and display the current control head ID number:

ad ID number:

d ID number:

D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D Power Button Left-most Left-most Left-most Menu Button Menu Button Menu Button Mob X Mobile O5 5 er on the control head. The raft aft afttt CH ID#

1 Figure 2-27. Radio Display with Current Control Head ID 4. Turn the Mode knob to change the control heads ID number. O5 Mode Knob Figure 2-28. APX Mobile O5 Control Head Front View Mode Knob 5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 above to set the ID of the remaining control heads. NOTE: In Multiple Control Head (MCH) installations, the yellow ignition sense wire must be connected to the head assigned ID # 1. MN003109A01_aa Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2-27 2.2.2.5 O3 Control Head and Remote Mount Cabling Choose a mounting location for the radio, considering accessibility, and control and antenna cable lengths. The control head extension cable and the accessories cable should be installed and routed properly to avoid complications. Route the cables in the vehicles wiring troughs (where available) or route the cables where they are protected from pinching, sharp edges, or crushing. One suggested route is along one side of the driveshaft hump under the carpet. Use grommets in any holes where the cable passes through metal panels. Top Left rafFront Figure 2-29. O3 Control Head 29. O3 Control Head 2-29. O3 Control Head the control unit is on the ce the control unit is on the c should be installed les s should be installed fo ed with the radio. d with the radio Right R Front Front Back The recommended mounting surface for the control unit is on the center console. Figure 2-31 shows how the hang-up clip control head, and cables should be installed for the O3 control head. NOTE: Connector-protective covers are provided with the radio. They should be used for added environmental robustness. A mounting clip, which allows the control head to be mounted, is supplied together with the control head. The installation must not interfere with the operation of the vehicle or its accessories, nor disturb the passenger seating. The control head must be within convenient reach and viewing of the user. Install the mounting clip as follows:

ouou 1. Use the provided mounting clip to determine the location of the two screw holes. 2. Drill 7/16 deep holes for upper and lower screws. 3. Use the tapping screw provided to install the mounting clip.

!

C a u t i o n Care must be taken to shield the control head (front and back) from direct exposure to pressurized water. The pressurized water from a hose, in most cases, is more severe than the stated test and conditions in typical environments. MN003109A01_aa 2-28 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting Vehicle Mounting Surface VEHICLE DASHBOARD 1 1 2 2 2 2 Part Number Description D Item No. 1 r2aa 2 01-80743T91 03-07644M19 View Mic Hang-Up Clip Assembly Screw, Machine, 8-32 x 7/16 Figure 2-30. O3 Control Head Rear View View w Figure 2-31. Ha Figure 2-31. Hang-Up Clip Installation Exploded Figure 2-31. Ha MN003109A01_aa Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2.2.3 Locking Kit (Optional) 2.2.3.1 All Radios 2-29 If an optional locking kit (HLN6372_) is used (shown in Figure 2-32), position the lock housing on the trunnion after installing the radio mounting screws. Then rotate the lock with the key in it and remove the key to lock the radio. You can install the lock on either side of the radio, and in dash and remote mount installations. Existing Mounting Screw Lock Housing 2-32. Locking gure 2-32. Locking Kit (Op Figure 2-32. Locking Kit (Optional) D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD r raft Lock MN003109A01_aa 2-30 2.3 Standard Configurations Power Cables (Transceiver and Control Head) Power Cables (Transceiver and Control Head) Route the RED power cable from both the radio and the control head to the vehicles battery compartment, using accepted industry methods and standards. Be sure to grommet the firewall hole to protect the cable. Remove the 15-amp (part number 6580283E06), 20-amp (part number 6580283E07) or 30-amp (part number 6580283E09) fuse from the fuseholder and connect the red lead of the radio power cable to the positive battery terminal using the hardware provided as shown in Figure 2-33 and Figure 2-34. Connect the black lead to a convenient solid chassis ground point. DO NOT connect the black lead directly to the batterys negative terminal. Table 2-8. Power Cables Description Part Number Mid Power Dash Mount Mid Power Remote Mount O5, O7, and O9 Remote Control Head Power Cable ableable HKN4191_ HKN4192_ HKN6188_ 2.3.1 O2, O5, O7 or O9 Control Head Power Cables trol Head Pow trol Head Po D DD r raftttftft Figure 2-33. HKN6188_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector MN003109A01_aa Standard Configurations Power Cables (Transceiver and Control Head) 2-31 Figure 2-34. HKN6187_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector, Record Audio Output Jack (2.5 mm) NOTE: Audio Out Does not require CPS programming. Attaching a headset will mute the external oes not require CPS progra oes not require CPS dio whic dio which are attached at speakers of the radio which are attached at the SPK jack of the control head. Record Out Requires CPS programming. In CPS, navigate to Radio Wide/Advanced/

Record Audio and select TX + RX Audio. X + RX Audio. h are attach P D D able with External S able with Externa and Earphone Jack (2.5 mm) rph and Earphone CPS programming. In C CPS programming. raft X Audi In vehicles which have installed a Battery Selector Switch, the ignition sense (yellow) wire should be the only wire connected to the battery selector switch (see Figure 2-35). Radio transceiver and control head power wires (red) must be connected directly to the vehicle battery. If the control head power wire and the control head ignition sense wire are both connected to a battery selector switch, but the radio transceiver power lead is not, improper power-cycling and off-state battery drainage may occur. If the desired state of the radio is a total battery drain elimination, then all power and ignition sense wires must be routed through the battery selector switch, so that the control head and radio transceiver both see the loss of battery power at the same time. ector Switch, the ig ector Switch, the ignit switch (see witch (see Figur Figur ectly re bo re b directly to 2.3.2 Battery Selector Switch Figure 2-35. Battery Selector Switch MN003109A01_aa 2-32 2.4 Standard Configurations Antenna Installation Antenna Installation IMPORTANT:

regulations, To assure optimum performance and compliance with RF Energy Exposure installation guidelines and instructions are limited to metal-body vehicles with appropriate ground planes and take into account the potential exposure of back seat passengers and bystanders outside the vehicle. these antenna 2.4.1 Selecting an Antenna Site/Location on a Metal Body Vehicle 1. External installation Check the requirements of the antenna supplier and install the vehicle antenna external to a metal body vehicle in accordance with those requirements. 2. Roof top For optimum performance and compliance with RF Energy Exposure regulations, mount the antenna in the center area of the roof. 3. Trunk lid On some vehicles with clearly defined, flat trunk lids, the antennas of some radio models (see restrictions below) can also be mounted on the center area of the trunk lid. For vehicles without clearly defined, flat trunk lids (such as hatchback autos, sports utility vehicles, and pick-up trucks), mount the antenna in the center area of the roof. Before installing an antenna on the trunk lid,

- Be sure that the distance from the antenna location on the trunk lid will be at least 85 cm

(33 inches) from the rear seat head-rest to ensure compliance with RF Energy Exposure regulations. D tenna on t tenna on stance from the an stance from the m the rear seat head-rest m the rear seat hea

, m, m

- Ensure that the trunk lid is grounded by connecting grounding straps between the trunk lid ne k lid is grounded by con k lid is grounded by and the vehicle chassis. s raft rafft C a u t i o n fts.s. 4. Mounting restrictions for certain radio models. d then mount the antenn then mount the ante

!

If these conditions cannot be satisfied, then mount the antenna on the roof top. NOTE: Do not cut antenna cables to ensure compliance with RF Energy Exposure regulations NOTE: VHF and UHF 1/4 wave antenna should be mounted only in the center area of the roof, not on the trunk lid, to ensure compliance with RF Energy Exposure regulations. 5. Ensure that the antenna cable can be easily routed to the radio. Route the antenna cable as far away as possible from any vehicle electronic control units and associated wiring. 6. Check the antenna location for any electrical interference. NOTE: Any two metal pieces rubbing against each other (such as seat springs, shift levers, trunk and hood lids, exhaust pipes, etc.) in close proximity to the antenna can cause severe receiver interference. MN003109A01_aa Standard Configurations Antenna Installation 2-33 NOTE: Do not cut the antenna cable F F E LOC:7 Roof Center LOC:8 E A B LOC:1 LOC:2 LOC:3 G LOC:9 Trunk Center C D LOC:10 G H LOC:4 LOC:5 LOC:6 H Figure 2-36. Multiple Antennas Separation for locations 1-10 ss-hss-h is to is to lolo Figure 2-36 indicates the separation distances required for the various antennas used with an APX 8500 midpower radio. Each "cross-hair" symbol represents a possible location (i.e. LOC) of an antenna. The recommendation is to locate them as close to the center of the roof and/or trunk as possible, without interference with a lightbar. This picture is not drawn to scale. For letters A, B, C, and D, the table indicates the EXACT distance for separation of the LMR antennas. For letters E, F, G, and H, the table indicates the maximum distance between the edge of the ground plane and the accessory antenna location. ntenna location. ntenna location. D e with a light e with a ligh D, the table indica D, the table indicate H, the table indicates t H, the table indicate he m Table 2-1 Distance Between Antenna istance Between Antenna raf raf rarafafaft aftH aftG aft aftes Faft aftft ftween ft Hft ce Between A Distance istance stance ches es 8 inches es 8 inches 8 inches 8 inches Distance 8 inches 8 8 inches 8 8 inches 8 8 inches Characters Characters Char E E E F F G G H wee Characters A B C D NOTE:

A minimum of 18 inch separation is required between lightbar and any roof mounted antennas, to prevent interference with the lightbar circuitry (see lightbar manufacturers installation information). The LMR 700/800 antennas should only be placed at LOC:2 or LOC:5. Standard LMR VHF and UHF antennas should only be placed at LOC:1, LOC:3, LOC:4 and LOC:6. 1/4 wave LMR VHF and UHF antennas should only be placed at LOC:1 and LOC:3 (i.e.roof only) to ensure compliance with RF Energy Exposure regulations. The VML antenna must be separated from any LMR antenna by at least 40 inches. The LTE Main and Diversity Antenna locations should be at LOC:9 and LOC:10 when the LMR All-Band or LMR 700/800 narrow band antennas are at LOC:2 (i.e LTE opposite location from the LMR). The LTE Main and Diversity Antenna locations should be at LOC:7 and LOC:8 when the LMR All-Band or LMR 700/800 narrow band antennas are at LOC:5 (i.e LTE opposite location from the LMR). In some mobile installations that include an LTE modem, external filtering on the LMR port and/

or the LTE port may be needed to reduce interference. Contact your local Motorola Solutions Service Center for more information and for filter kit numbers (See Appendix for contact info). MN003109A01_aa 2-34 Standard Configurations Antenna Installation 2.4.2 Multiplexers and Vehicle Installation Figure 2-37. Multiplexer Views the antenna cable p 2.4.3 QMA Connection (APX8500 Only) 8500 Only) 8500 Only) disconnect conne cient slack in the APX8500 is using a quick disconnect connection called QMA. This does not require any tightening. Ensure there is sufficient slack in the antenna cable. Ensure that the collar of the antenna cable plug does not bind. Engage the QMA cable plug onto the jack, listening for a click to ensure proper engagement. o the jack, liste Gently tug on the cable to ensure that it is engaged. re that it is engaged To disengage, pull back on the cable plugs collar and pull the cable straight off the jack. DD D D r r raraf raf ement (APX8500 Ott 2.4.4 GPS/GLONASS/Wi-Fi/Antenna Placement (APX8500 Only) ement (APX8500 On plugs collar and pull the Figure 2-38. GPS/GLONASS and Wi-Fi Antenna Connector on the Back of the Mid Power Radio MN003109A01_aa Standard Configurations Speaker 2.5 Speaker 2-35

!

C a u t i o n DO NOT ground the radio's speaker leads. This system has a floating speaker output

(DC voltage on both leads); damage to the audio circuit will result if either lead is grounded or if they are shorted together. The speaker kit includes a trunnion bracket that allows the speaker to be mounted in a variety of ways. With the trunnion bracket, the speaker can mount permanently on the mounting surface or in accessible firewall areas. The trunnion allows the speaker to tilt for best operation. Mount the speaker out of the way so that it will not be kicked or knocked around by the vehicle occupants. Mount the speaker as follows:

1. Use the speaker mounting bracket as a template to mark the mounting hole locations. 2. Use the self-drilling screws provided to fasten the trunnion. 3. Attach the speaker and fasten to the trunnion with two wing screws. 4. Route the speaker wires under the carpet or floor covering, or behind the kick panels. Be sure fasten fasten the wires are out of the way and will not be snagged and broken by the occupants of the vehicle. ofof the way and will ff ires under the ires under th the way and w 5. Do not submerse the 2-pin speaker connector in water nor place this connector in an area e the 2-pin speaker connec the 2-pin speaker that could have standing water. nding water. nding wateraftftftftft raftftftt aftft aft aft aft aft Dashboard Trunnion Bracket Firewall OR Figure 2-39. Speaker Mounting MN003109A01_aa 2-36 2.5.1 Standard Configurations Speaker Internal Speaker Disassembly NOTE: This configuration is only applicable for O2 Control Heads. You can disable the internal speaker of your radio by following the instructions below. Use the following procedure to disassemble your radio:

1. Unplug power, antenna, microphone and all accessories connections. If the radio is a remote-mount radio, disconnect the remote-mount control cable from the front of the transceiver. 2. Remove the four screws found on the control head with a Torx T-20 bit as shown in Figure 2-40. Discard the screws. D D D D D DD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D raf r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r rrarararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararararara rrraraarararara ra ra ra ra ra raf r rrrrr rrrrrrrr rr rrrrrrrrr rrr r rrrrrrrrrrr rrr r rrrr r rrr r r rr rrr afthe screws on the Control H t he screws on the Control l head. Carefully rem ol head. Carefully remov n in n Figure 2-41 Figure 2-41. NN Figure 2-40. Removing the screws on the Control Head 3. Firmly grasp the front panel of the control head. Carefully remove the front housing assembly from the back housing assembly as shown in Figure 2-41. Note the position of the attached flex and do not pull on it excessively. Figure 2-41. Removing the Control Head MN003109A01_aa Standard Configurations Speaker 2-37 4. Put the control head face down on a clean, flat surface to avoid damaging it. Do not touch the o-ring on the back housing. 5. Carefully disconnect the speaker connector from the circuit board as shown in Figure 2-42. Figure 2-42. Disconnecting the Speaker Connector 6. Reattach the front housing assembly to the back housing assembly as shown in Figure 2-43. g ag a Make sure that the flex is returned to its original position and that the o-ring on the back is return is retur housing assembly is not pinched. not pinched not pinched. D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D r raf raf raft ra ra ra ra ra ra ra raft rrrararararaftftftftftft rararaaraft afftftftftftfaaffafaaaffafaaaraft raaft araftftftffftfaftfaftfaftftftfftftffttfttttftftftftftftftftftfttftftftftftt raftfttftftftfttftft rrararafffffffffafaafaaffftftftftffffftttftftftftftftftftftftftftfttttftftftttttttftftftftftft raftftftftftftfttftttftfttttftftttttftftftftftftt rarararrrararaararaaraafftft raf rararaaarafaf rafaaaraa raftftftftftffafafaa aft af afafafafafftft afaffafftft afft aftft afft afaft afaafft afft aaft aft afft aaft aaft afafaft aafftft aftftftfttftft afttftfttftftfttftttft aftft aft tttttftftfftffafafaaaaaffffffffttftftttt aafftftftftftftftftftft a aaa a ftft tttttt t Figure 2-43. Reattaching the Control Head 7. Secure the front housing assembly back to the back housing assembly with four new screws using the Torx T-20 bit as shown in Figure 2-43. Apply 9 in. lbs. torque for each screw. MN003109A01_aa 2-38 Standard Configurations Microphone Hang-Up Clip 2.6 Microphone Hang-Up Clip 2.6.1 Standard or O3 Control Head Hang-Up Clip The hang-up clip must be within reach of the operator(s) and close enough to the control head to prevent cable strain. Measure this distance before actually mounting the bracket. Since the bracket has a positive-detent action, the microphone can be mounted in any position. Use the hang-up clip as a template to locate the mounting holes. To avoid interference when removing the microphone, install the flathead screw in the top clip hole. Some microphone models require the grounding of the microphone clip in order for HUB operation to work correctly. Refer to the documentation that comes with your Motorola microphone model. NOTE: For multi-control head configuration where only one of the control heads has a microphone, the control heads without a microphone attached must have their HUB or Monitor pin

(J100-22) jumpered by a wire to GND (J100-1 or J100-14) for HUB operation to work. 2.7 RFID (Option) An APX mobile radio equipped with an RFID tag allows an alternate option for tracking the radio asset. Each RFID equipped radio has an RFID tag preprogrammed with the individual radios serial number (also found on the FCC label) as well as band and radio model information (see below for further information). dio has an R dio has an R CC label) as well CC label) as we th an R th an R D D D D DDDDDDD D DD D D D D D D D DD D D D D D D D D D D D DD DD D D D D D DDD D D D D D D D D D D D D D DDDDDD raf rrararaft rraraftffftftftftftftftftftftftffftftfttttt rraaaraaaaaarararararafff r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r raft ra raft rararaffff raf raaaaaf ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra raft raft raaafffaf raftftft raft raft raft raaraaraftftftftft aararararararaaafft rararaafaa raraf rararaaft rararaftftftftftftftftftftftftfftftftft rarararararararararararaa aaftftftf aftft aaaftftfft fffaft aftfftftffftfffft aftftft aft aftftft aftftftft aftftftftft aft aft aftttff aaaaaafafafaft ftftftftftftftftftft ttftfffftftftft ftftftftftffftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftfttttftfffff tt t tt RFID Tag Figure 2-44. RFID Location on Mid Power Radio MN003109A01_aa Standard Configurations RFID (Option) 2.7.1 RFID Reading 2-39 To read an RFID tag using a UHF Gen 2 RFID reader (e.g. Motorolas MC9090-G), open an appropriate RFID read application, point the RFID reader at the tag and activate the reader's RFID antenna (e.g. pull Motorolas MC9090-G scanning trigger). RFID reader must be within 1 foot from tag in order to read. Two variables, Read Angle and Reader Orientation, aid in the distance needed to read and write to the RFID Tag. Read distance is independent of Tag Angle, but the reader should be as close to perpendicular to the tag as possible (Read Angle). As Read Angle increases past 60 degrees, read distance will begin to decrease; tag will become unreadable once Read Angle exceeds 90 degrees (see Figure 2-45). RFID tag cannot be read through metal. The orientation of the reader (Reader Orientation) and the tag must be aligned to improve read and writability (see Figure 2-47). Read Angle RFID Tag RFID T RFID T D D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D D D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D DD DDDDDD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D DDDD rra r r r r r rr r rr r r r raft ra ra ra ra ra rar ra rarara rararr ra ra ra rara ra ra rarararararara ra ra rararararararaaaaaaararaararaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa rarrararararaaaar ra r aftftftftftfftftftftftffffftftftffftfftffftftftftftftftftftftftfftftftftftftftftfffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffftfffffftffff Figure 2-45. Read Angle for Mid Power Radio Read Angle for Mid Power d Angle for Mid Power Tag Angle RFID Tag Figure 2-46. Tag Angle for Mid Power Radio

. MN003109A01_aa 2-40 Standard Configurations RFID (Option) Reader Tag Reader Tag Figure 2-47. Examples of Reader and Tag Aligned (Reader Orientation) Reader Tag D ample of Reader anDDDDDDDDD ample of Reader and Tag Figure 2-48. Example of Reader and Tag Misaligned (Reader Orientation) raft MN003109A01_aa Standard Configurations RFID (Option) 2-41 2.7.2 Programming RFID (If Equipped) The user can reprogram the tag (up to 12 ASCII characters when encoded to hexadecimal format) using any UHF Gen 2 capable RFID writer (e.g. Motorolas MC9090-G). NOTE: Follow read direction in Section 2.7.1 to optimized reprogramming. Table 2-1. Model Number Chart in 12-Digit ASCII Format Model Number Radio Tier/Band/Output Level Last Two Digits T0 D2 D8 D9 D3 E2 E3 D2 R2 R3 F2 F8 F9 E8 E9 E8 E9 F8 M37TSS9PW1AN APX Mobile 700/800 VHF UHFMP M30KSS9PW1AN APX Mobile SBMP VHF M24KSS9PW1AN M22KSS9PW1AN APX Low Tier MobileMP VHF M36KSS9PW1AN APX Lowest Tier MobileMP VHF M30KTS9PW1AN APX Mobile SBHP VHF Mobile Mobile M30QSS9PW1AN M30QTS9PW1AN M30SSS9PW1AN M20TSS9PW1AN M30TXS9PW1AN M30URS0PW1AN M22URS9PW1AN M24URS9PW1AN M36URS9PW1AN MP 70 APX Mobile SBHP UHF1 APX Mobile SBMP UHF1 APX Mobile SBMP UHF2 APX Mobile SBMP APX Mobile DBMP 700/800MP VHF D D DDAPX Mobile SBHP U APX Mobile SBDDAPX Mobile SBM APX Mobile SBDD DDDDDD rrarafaftftt rAPX Mobile SBMP UHF2 raX Mobile DBe DBMP 700/800M raftSBMP 700/800 rafbile DB afteMP 700/800 ftP 700/800 BMP 700/800t eMP 700/8tt APX Mobile DBMP 700/800HP VHF MP 700/800HP VH MP 700/800 APX Lowest Tier MobileMP 700/800 APX Low Tier MobileMP 700/800 APX Mobile SBMP 700/800 700/8 bile M24QSS9PW1AN M22QSS9PW1AN APX Low Tier MobileMP UHF1 M36QSS9PW1AN APX Lowest Tier MobileMP UHF1 M24SSS9PW1AN M22SSS9PW1AN APX Low Tier MobileMP UHF2 M36SSS9PW1AN APX Lowest Tier MobileMP UHF2 M22WRS9PW1AN APX Low Tier MobileMP 900 Table 2-2. Serial Number with Radio Band/Tier/Power Characters Radio Band/Tier/Power F D 700/800 and 900 VHF MN003109A01_aa 2-42 Standard Configurations Completing the Installation Table 2-2. Serial Number with Radio Band/Tier/Power UHF 700/800 and VHF Multi-Band UHF1 and UHF2 700/800 and UHF APX 8500 APX 7000 APX 7500 Mid Power APX 7500 High Power APX 6000 APX 6500 Mid Power 500 500 E R T E S 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2.8 Completing the Installation tionon Complete the installation by connecting the speaker to the accessory cable; verify the ignition sense wire is attached according to planned ignition sense; verify the control head is attached to either the TIB or the CAN extension cable; and then attach the power cable to the back of the transceiver. PX Lowest Tier Mobi APX 6500 High Power APX Low Tier Portable APX Low Tier Mobile MP/APX 4500 MP/APX 2500 MP APX Lowest Tier Mobile MP/APX 1500 MP APX Lowest Tier Mobile MP/A APX Low Tier PoDDPX 6500 High PX 6500 HighD D D D APX Low Tier MDDAPX Low Tier Porta DDDD D rAPX Low Tier Mobile MP r ra raft ra e speaker to the accesso the speaker to the accesso verify the contr on sense;

on sense; verify the contro ach the power cable to th ch the power cable to MN003109A01_aa Chapter 3 Universal Relay Controller Installation The Universal Relay Controller (URC) is an extension of and an orderable accessory for O7 or O9 control head. URC is used to control high power switching peripherals, e.g. lightbar. URC works on all lightbars which can be controlled by power application. URC is connected to the transceiver's MMP port. The URC design consists of a microcontroller and uses 10 relays to control the switching device. A separate ground for isolation exists between the relay and MCU sections, which is provided by the use of iCoupler from Analog Devices. Each relay is connected to an output with 15 A fuse. The maximum load allowed on each output is 12 A. Two cables, each with the maximum of 60 A, can be used to connect to the input connector at the bus bar. Each cable is connected with a 60 A circuit breaker. One-wire EEPROM is employed to enable MMP to recognize the URC accessory ID. CPS can be used to program the relay patterns. When installing URC, make sure to plan the installation carefully and leave additional room in the front and rear of the box for cabling and accessory connections; and also to the sides of the radio so that you may access and install the trunnion screws. The recommended mounting location for URC is in the car trunk, either next to the transceiver or within the area not further than 4.5 m away from the transceiver. Ensure that sufficient cooling is provided. Do not cover URC with baggage, blankets, etc. abling and abling an stall the trunn stall the trunn unting location for URC unting location for her than 4.5 m away from her than 4.5 m aw D to to RC with baggage, blanket RC with baggage, raft raft C a u t i o n fttingg Do not backfeed power into URC. RC.RC.

!

3.1 Universal Relay Controller Mounting The mounting location must be accessible and visible. Select a location that permits routing the cable as directly as possible. NOTE: For optimum URC performance, orient the mounting trunnion as shown in Figure 3-1. SeSe Figure 3-1. Universal Relay Controller Orientation An adjustable trunnion, which allows a number of mounting positions, is supplied for mounting the URC. The installation must not interfere with the operation of the vehicle or its accessories. 3-2 Universal Relay Controller Installation Universal Relay Controller Mounting Install the URC as follows:

1. Use the URC trunnion as a template to mark the mounting holes;

drill 5/32" holes. If mounting on a plastic surface, use a metal backing plate. 2. Attach the trunnion bracket using all four 10 16" x 5/8" self-tapping screws provided. 3. Temporarily install the URC (adjust for proper viewing angle) and fasten it to the trunnion with two wing screws. Test the installation to ensure that the unit is securely locked in place. D D DD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDD DDD D D DDD D DD DDDDDD D D D D D D DD DD D D D D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D DDDDDDDD DDDDDD D DD D DDDD D D DDDDDD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D DDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDD DD DDDDDDDDD DD D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDD DDDDD D DD DDD DD D D D D D D D D D DD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDD rafaf raf rrraaaafa rar rrara rra ra ra ra rra ra rra rra rra rra ra raa r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r rr r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r rr r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r raft ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra rarrrar ra ra ra ra raft farrraraaaf aaaararaffafafaaaaaaaraafa rrrrrrafafafafafaffffffffffaft ra r afafafaf a aaaaftft aafafaf aftfftfftft afafafafaf af aaaafafafaf aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaafafa aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aftftft aftftftft afafafafftftftft a aa a a aa a aaa tttt TRUNNION Drill four 5/32 holes in mounting surface Adjust the universal relay controller to desired angle and secure with wing screws Use four mounting screws on all installations Mounting surface IMPORTANT:

Use a metal backing plate (not supplied) if mounting trunnion on plastic or unstable surface Figure 3-2. Universal Relay Controller Installation Exploded View MN003109A01_aa Universal Relay Controller Installation O7/O9 Universal Relay Controller Cable Assembly 3-3 3.2 O7/O9 Universal Relay Controller Cable Assembly 3.2.1 Power Cable 1. Remove the cap nut of power cable gland assembly, and insert the power cable through the cap nut and neoprene seal in the cable gland body. Use power cable with either AWG 6 or AWG 8 only (recommended OD range of cable is 5.5 mm to 9 mm) that is able to withstand 80 A and 50 A respectively, to ensure water sealing of the controller. User can decide to install one or two power cables based on the requirements. The power cables (A+) are not supplied. 2. The loose end of the power cable with cable strip length 7.94 mm (5/16) is then placed on the power lug and secured down by a set screw. The cap nut is then reassembled with tightening torque 18 lb-in. 3. The other end of the power cable should be connected to circuit breaker (Motorola part number 40012006001) end which indicates "AUX" and then, to power supply on the other end which indicates "BAT", instead of connecting to power supply directly. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to install the second power cable, if required. 5. If only one power cable is installed, it is recommended to cover the other side of the power cable gland with power cable gland seal with tightening torque 18 lb-in. er cable gla er cable gla is inis instast 3.2.2 Ground Cable D 1. Remove the cap nut of ground cable gland assembly, insert the ground cable through the cap nut of ground cable gland nut of ground cable nut and then reassemble the cap nut. Use ground cable with AWG 14 only (recommended OD range of cable is 2 mm to 4 mm) that is able to withstand 5 A. The ground cables (A+) are not supplied. emble the cap nut. U emble the cap nut. Use gro 2 mm to 4 mm) that is able 4 mm) tha NOTE: The ground is used to switch the relays, and not act as a ground to the actual device being controlled. raft mbled with titt with cable st rip length 7 rminal bloc n the te n the terminal block mbled with tight h the relays, and not act a e relays, and not act a 2. The loose end of the ground cable with cable strip length 7.94 mm (5/16) is then connected to a two-pin terminal block. Both pins on the terminal block are inter-connected and either pin can be used. The cap nut is then reassembled with tightening torque 7 lb-in. ith cable strip length 7.9 Power Cable Gland Figure 3-3. Power and Ground Cable Glands Ground Cable Gland MN003109A01_aa 3-4 Universal Relay Controller Installation O7/O9 Universal Relay Controller Cable Assembly Cable Gland Body Neoprene Seal Cap Nut Counter Nut Gasket, Cable Gland 3.2.3 Wires Figure 3-4. Cable Gland Assembly with Gasket control w control w 0.06 to 0.148) 0.06 to 0.148 ose wire (prior to strippi ose wire (prior to st chassis. Ensure the lightba hassis. Ensure the D 1. Assemble the wires into the lightbar gasket retainer and lightbar gasket. The URC can support lightbars through control wires with outer diameter ranging from 1.52 mm to 3.77 mm (0.06 to 0.148), with wire gages ranging from AWG 12 20. ligh ligh 2. Each individual loose wire (prior to stripping off the wire jacket) needs to be inserted one at a time through the chassis. Ensure the lightbar wire is straight before inserting the wire into the chassis. Each wire is sealed individually by the radial gasket seal. When a thick wire (i.e. AWG 14 wire or wire OD > 2.90 mm) is inserted through the chassis, there is potential torn at the rubber gasket. Remove the rubber gasket residual and continue to the next step. ve the rubber gasket residu D > 2.90 mm) is inserted th D > 2.90 mm) is ins s sealed individually by th s sealed individually e 3. Thin wires 2.5 mm and below should be dressed into the retention feature using a black stick

(see Figure 3-5); thick wires above 2.5 mm should be routed above the retention feature. Strip off the wire until 7.94 mm (5/16) after the wire is inserted into the URC, and install the wire into respective lightbar terminal block. block. block. e rubber gaske should be dresse should be dressed into the d ove 2.5 mm should be route 2.5 mm should be route wire is inser 6) after the 6) after the wire is inserte raft with seal, gasket andt with seal, gasket an 4. Cover the lightbar gasket retainer's hole with seal, gasket and ground cable gland, if no wire is inserted. WIRE RETENTION FEATURE LIGHTBAR WIRE WITH DIAMETER 2.5 mm AND BELOW LIGHTBAR WIRE WITH DIAMETER ABOVE 2.5 mm Figure 3-5. Wires Installation MN003109A01_aa Universal Relay Controller Installation O7/O9 Universal Relay Controller Cable Assembly 3-5 Black Stick Figure 3-6. Wire Installation with Black Stick 5. The lightbar gasket should be replaced at each reassembly of the wire. NOTE: Use of other cable gages except as recommended in this manual may result in water y oy o han 12 A han 12 s kit (PMKN41 s kit (PMKN4 oper co per intrusion. Any reassembly of wire needs a new lightbar gasket replaced. If the current loading for one wire is higher than 12 A, the wires should be splitted before being assembled to the URC system. Wires kit (PMKN4109_) is provided to ease installation of the URC. Incorrect use of the wires kit, e.g. improper connection at external loose end wires, may impact the robustness of the URC. the URC. the U Remove the wires and gasket residual inside the URC after the wire installation, before closing the top housing of the URC. ng of the URC. D and gasket residual inside and gasket residual kit, e.g. impr kit, e. 3.2.4 O7/O9 to URC Cable The O7/O9 to URC cable (Motorola part number 3064153H02) can be assembled either before or after reassembling the top housing. Assemble the RJ45 port of the cable into the RJ45 connector on the URC and turn the locking collar instead of cable, 90 degrees to the right to ensure it is locked properly. After that, test whether the cable is locked properly or not by trying to pull out the cable. t number 3064153H02) ca number 3064153H02) c mble the RJ45 port of the c mble the RJ45 port of the f cable, f cable, 90 degrees to he UR raft ked properly or nt 90 degrees ked properly or n Figure 3-7. O7/O9 to URC Cable Installation MN003109A01_aa 3-6 Universal Relay Controller Installation Notes D raft MN003109A01_aa Chapter 4 Options and Accessories Installation 4.1 Dash-Mount Accessory Installation For dash-mounted configurations, the accessories must be installed through the accessory connector assembly that is located on the rear of the radio, adjacent to the power connector. Motorola-approved accessories are supplied with male terminals crimped to a 20-gauge wire specifically designed to fit the plug of the accessory connector assembly. Insert the male terminal into the accessory connector assembly in the appropriate location and connect the accessory connector assembly in the rear accessory port. Do not use other generic terminals in the plug. Generic terminals can cause electrical intermittencies and may cause damage to the plug. 4.1.1 Dash-Mount Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch Installation hardwa hardw Mount the footswitch using the hardware that comes with the kit. Open the accessory cable connector housing; remove the jumper wire. Connect the emergency switch wires to pins 14 and 15

(see Figure 4-1). Close the connector housing; route the finished cable from the switch location to the control head location. on.on. NOTE: The emergency footswitch should be attached with A+ unattached. D the jumper w the jumper w e connector hous e connector ho A+ should be attached after successfully securing the screws in the connector. footswitch should be attac footswitch should b hed after successfully hed after successfu ra secraftfttACC afaft ENCY SWITCHft ACCESSORIES CONNECTOR C NOTE 1 PIN 14 PIN 15 20 7 R WIRE INSIDE NOTE 1: REMOVE BLACK JUMPER WIRE INSIDE ACCESSORY CONNECTOR HOUSING. INSERT WIRES FROM EMERGENCY SWITCH OUSIN SPST NORMALLY CLOSED OSED CH EMERGENCY SWITCH 26 13 J2 IN DASH MOUNT J100 IN REMOTE MOUNT EMER GND 21 14 8 1 Figure 4-1. Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram

!

C a u t i o n The radio is sold with correct accessory cables and jumpers in order to have emergency de-activated by default, regardless of the setting in CPS. However, if cables are not used, or if jumpers are removed without replacing with an emergency accessory button/switch at one of the accessory ports, the radio will power-up upon the application of A+. The display may not show an indication that the radio is on, and this can result in an incorrect operation of the radio as well as excessive current drain of the vehicles battery when the engine is off. 4-2 Options and Accessories Installation Remote-Mount Accessory Installation 4.1.2 Dash-Mount Horn and Lights (External Alarms) Relays NOTE: For installations that use the horn/lights option, select a suitable location for mounting

(normally under the dash) and, referring to Figure 4-2, perform the following procedure:

1. Horn Relay Connect the relay contacts across the horn ring switch, typically found in the steering column. Open the accessory cable connector and connect the two control wires

(male pins) into locations 18 and 24 of the connector. 2. Lights Relay Connect the relay across the head lamp ON/OFF switch, typically found in the steering column. Open the accessory cable connector and connect the two control wires

(male pins) into locations 19 and 24 of the accessory connector. CONNECT ACROSS HORN RING SWITCH SPST N.O. RELAY 12V COIL VIP OUT 1 SWB+

CONNECT ACROSS HEAD LAMP SWITCH PST SPST N.O. N.O. RE RELAY VIP OUT 2 DDDDDDDDDDD PIN 18 PIN 24 PIN 19 Figure 4-2. Horn/Light Wiring Diagram ure 4-2. Horn/Light Wiring re 4-2. Horn/Light ACCESSORIES CONNECTOR 12V COIL rafaf raft rafttftftfft raaa13 aft afaft aft afaft aaf VIP OUT 2

(LIGHTS) VIP OUT 1

(HORN) SWB+

26 26 13 20 7 21 14 8 1 Figure 4-3. Radio MAP Connector 4.2 Remote-Mount Accessory Installation Perform the following installation procedure:

1. Select an appropriate place to mount the option or accessory hardware. 2. Route the accessory-to-control head cables under floor coverings or behind panels so that the vehicle occupants do not snag or break the wires. 3. Attach wires from the accessory to the appropriate wire on the VIP cable (see Table 4-1 and Table 4-2). MN003109A01_aa Options and Accessories Installation Remote-Mount Accessory Installation 4-3

!

C a u t i o n The radio is sold with correct accessory cables and jumpers in order to have emergency de-activated by default, regardless of the setting in CPS. However, if cables are not used, or if jumpers are removed without replacing with an emergency accessory button/switch at one of the accessory ports, the radio will power-up upon the application of A+. The display may not show an indication that the radio is on, and this can result in an incorrect operation of the radio as well as excessive current drain of the vehicles battery when the engine is off. 4.2.1 Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch Installation Mount the switch using the hardware that comes with the kit. Connect the button/switch wires to a ground pin and the emergency pin, removing the default jumper wire in the rear accessory cable. The button/switch will short the pins when in-active. When the button/switch is pressed, its contact opens, the emergency path is un-ungrounded and pulled-high inside the radio transceiver, and detected by the processor. If an emergency accessory is used at either (or both) J2 connector and J626 connector, all jumper wires, shorting emergency to ground, must be removed so button/switch press can be detected. 4.2.2 Horn (External Alarm) Relay Installation D m) Relay Insta m) Relay Ins n a suitable location (nor n a suitable locatio witch, typically found in the s itch, typically foun Mount the horn relay in a suitable location (normally under the dash). Connect the relay contacts across the horn ring switch, typically found in the steering column. Connect the two control wires to a SW B+ pin and a VIP OUT pin on the VIP connector. T pin on the VIP connector T pin on the VIP con 4.2.3 Lights (External Alarm) Relay Installation lay Installatio Relay Installation n (normally u ocation (normally under the Connect the two control w Connect the tw o control w Mount the light relay in a suitable location (normally under the dash). Connect the relay contacts across the head lamp ON/OFF switch. Connect the two control wires to a SW B+ pin and a VIP OUT pin on the VIP connector. 4.2.4 Gunlock Installation raft The O7 or O9 control head can program up to three gunlocks through the programmable buttons. You can set the time for the momentary trigger using the time-out trigger button. Connect the relay contacts across the gunlock switch to install the gunlock. Connect the two control wires to a SW B+

pin and a VIP OUT pin on the VIP connector. It is recommended to install a failsafe/redundant bypass switch for the gunlock. It is suggested to use a separate timer switch or a manual push-on button switch to activate the gunlock. Connect the switch from the supply to the gunlock directly, as shown in Figure 4-4. Place the manual button at a suitable and reachable location, yet not easily seen. gunlo the g the ti k ee gunlocks MN003109A01_aa 4-4 Options and Accessories Installation Remote-Mount Accessory Installation A+ into Transceiver Car Battery GND Redundancy Wiring Momentary or time-out bypass manual switch Gunlock GND Relay and Diode for Activation of Gunlock D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDD VIP OUT raf ra aftwitch Redundancy Diagram d to wiring and Figure 4-4. Gunlock Switch Redundancy Diagram witch Redundancy Diagra VIP OUT pin from either J2 (Transceiver) or J400 (control head) NOTE: Refer to section 4.3.1 for information related to wiring and activation of VIPOUTs The Y-cable KT000247A01 is primarily designed to allow for simultaneous operation of the Motorola Branded SB9600 siren and still retain duplicate access to all the MAP (J2) connector pins located on the APX 8500 remote TIB. Use of emergency accessories, speakers, programming cables, VIPS, etc are possible via the P3 connector of Y-cable KT000247A01. The 26pin connector P2 does not contain every signal from the legacy DB25 port, called J600 on the APX 7500. Therefore, some legacy functionality (i.e. A+) is reduced with the APX 8500 remote mount configuration compared to the APX 7500 remote mount configuration. to wiring w for s for MN003109A01_aa Options and Accessories Installation Remote-Mount Accessory Installation 4-5 4.2.5 Horn-Ring Transfer Configure the Horn Relay for either Negative Contact or Positive Contact as shown in section 6.3 of the siren/PA manual (6881093C18). Program the designated VIP-OUT line for Horn-Ring Transfer and program the designated VIP-IN line for Horn-Ring. Figure 4-5 shows wiring diagrams for connecting the Horn-Ring via a transfer relay for both negative and positive ground systems. Refer to the siren/PA manual (6881093C18) for more information. To Control Head VIP Output Programmed for Horn-Ring Transfer To SW B+ at VIP Connector To Control Head VIP Input Programmed for Horn-Ring Under Hood Horn Relay Horn Horn Ring

+ 12V Horn Ring Break Here

+ 12V N.C. COM. N.O. Break Here To Horn N.C. COM. N.O. To DIG. GND at VIP Connector Negative-Contact Horn-Ring Any SPDT Relay with 12V Coil and Suitable Contact Ratings for Vehicle Installation n ay with ontact To Control Head VIP Output Programmed for Horn-Ring Transfer To SW B+ at VIP Connector To Control Head VIP Input Programmed for Horn-Ring D D D r ry-Open raft aftorn-Ring Connectio ntact PushbuttaaaafafafafafPushbutton Con Figure 4-5. Siren/PA Horn-Ring Connections Normally-Open Momentary Mome Contact Pushbutton n-Ring Connecti Pushbutton Connections ece 44 Positive-Contact Horn-Ring To VIP Input Programmed for Horn-Ring To DIG. GND at VIP Connector NOTE: Locate Pushbutton in a Location Convenient to the Driver 4.2.6 Record Audio Out Jack of Transmit and Receive Audio Receive The use of Power Cable kit HKN6187_ (see Figure 2-34) provides access to both the transmitted audio speech, as well as the received audio speech. This can be recorded with a standard tape recorder using a 2.5 mm connector. 4.2.7 Earphone Jack The use of Power Cable kit HKN6187_ (see Figure 2-34) provides the ability to use a standard earphone/headset instead of the external speaker. Once a cable is plugged into this 2.5 mm jack, the external speaker attached at the control head will turn mute. MN003109A01_aa 4-6 Options and Accessories Installation Vehicle Interface Port Overview 4.2.8 USB Data Cables It is recommended that the USB 1.5 meter data cable HKN6163_ is used for both dash mount configurations (at J2 connector) and for remote mount configurations (at J100 connector). This is because the HKN6163_ has the emergency jumper present, which is necessary for correct dash mount configurations. For interfacing at the MMP port, use Cable HKN6184_ which is a USB device cable. The USB 4 meter (15 feet) data cable HKN6172_ is recommended for remote mount configurations only (at J2). If the customer intends to use the HKN6172_ for dash mount configurations (at J2), the cables 26-pin connector must be opened and an emergency jumper-wire placed across pins 14 and 15. Refer to Figure 4-1. 4.2.9 RS232 Cables 4.3 2 The following are RS232 cables. Although not compatible with CPS radio reading or programming, they can be used for interfacing with RS232 accessories or RS232 computer programs. HKN6160_ is a 6 feet dash RS232 cable from J2 connector. HKN6161_ is a 20 feet dash RS232 cable from J2 connector. ort Overview Vehicle Interface Port Overview ort Overvie rt (VIP) allows the control rt (VIP) allows the The Vehicle Interface Port (VIP) allows the control head to operate outside circuits and to receive inputs from outside the control head. There are three VIP outputs which are used for relay control. trol head. There are thr trol head. There are There are also three VIP inputs which accept inputs from switches (remote mount only). D ts which accept inputs from ee ra s which accept inpuraft aaaaraara afttttttftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftft Function Radio Pin VIP Cable

(HKN6196_) Wire Color Number J400-1 RED SWB +

J400-2 GREEN GND J400-3 - NO PIN J400-4 - "VIP" detect: GPIO=HIGH J400-5 BLUE VIP_OUT_1 J400-6 YELLOW VIP_OUT_2 J400-7 BLACK VIP_OUT_3 J400-8 WHITE VIP_IN_1 (VIP_IN GPIO) J400-9 ORANGE VIP_IN_2 (VIP_IN GPIO) J400-10 VIOLET VIP_IN_3 Figure 4-6. Remote Control Head Pinouts Figure 4-7. HKN6196_ VIP Connector Detail MN003109A01_aa Options and Accessories Installation Vehicle Interface Port Overview 4-7 4.3.1 VIP Output Connections The VIP output pins are on the back of the control head (J100 and J400), or the rear accessory port

(J2), as shown in Figure 2-10. Use these connections to wire control relays. One end of the relay should connect to switched B+ voltage, while the other side connects to a software controlled ON/

OFF switch inside the control head. The relay can be normally on or normally off depending on the configuration of the VIP outputs. There are three VIP output connections, as follows:

Table 4-1. VIP Output Connections J400 J2 J100 VIP OUT #

SW B+ Pin Number On/Off Switched Pin Number SW B+ Pin Number On/Off Switched Pin Number 1 2 3 Red 1 Red 1 Red 1 5 (Blue) 6 (Yellow) 7 (Black) kk)) 24 24 NA 18 19 NA SW B+ Pin Number 24 24 NA On/Off Switched Pin Number 18 19 NA ssed he control head D D D outputs can be f outputs can be ernal horn/lights al ernal horn/lights alarm puts, see t puts, contr 2 can be acce 2 can be acc ssed from e The function of these VIP outputs can be field programmed in the control head. Typical applications for VIP outputs are external horn/lights alarm and horn ring transfer relay control. For further information on VIP outputs, see the control head programming manual. VIP OUT 1 and VIP OUT 2 can be accessed from either J100 or J400 connectors. This is to allow a previously wired VIP OUT at J2 to move easily to J100. However, when any cable is inserted into J2 to move easily to 2 to move easily J400, J100 VIP OUTs are disabled. bled.d. When installing relays to the VIP OUT lines, a diode is necessary to prevent damage to the transistor or MOSFET, due to back EMF when the field collapses on the relay coil. Some vendor relays already come with this diode built-in, and other relays require the customer to install it. Figure 4-8 shows the proper placement of the diode across the relay coil. The transistor or MOSFET is located inside the radio or the D.E.K. box. raft t otheother relays require the cu r relays require the c oss the relay coil. Th cross the relay coil. The t es, a diode is he field collapses on the the field co llapses on the UT lines, a diode is necessa J100 G D S SW B+

VIPout Protection Diode Relay N.C. N.O. Note:

To 'activate' a VIPOUT, you have to ground the VIPOUT, such that the current now flows thru the relay coil to GND through a MOSFET inside the radio or control head, which causes the relay wiper to toggle. The MOSFET of a VIPOUT should never be used to directly drive an accessory. The MOSFET should be used to control an external relay. Figure 4-8. Relay Coil NOTE: See Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering to order relays for your VIP OUT applications. Example relay hardware: TLN4533_ (relay without internal diode), HLN6969_ (relay with internal back EMF protection diode), and HKN4258_ (relay wiring cable). MN003109A01_aa 4-8 Options and Accessories Installation Vehicle Interface Port Overview 4.3.2 VIP Input Connections The VIP input pins are only available on the back of the control head (remote mount). These connections control inputs from switches. One side of the switch connects to ground while the other side connects to a buffered input on the control head. The switch can be normally closed (NC) or normally open (NO) depending on the configuration of the VIP inputs. There are three VIP input connections, as follows:

Table 4-2. VIP Input Connections J400 J2 VIP IN #

1 2 3 Ground Pin Number 2 (green) 2 (green) 2 (green) On/Off Switched Pin Number Ground Pin Number On/Off Switched Pin Number 8 (white) 9 (orange) 10 (violet) NA NA NA NA NA NA NOTE: Remote Mount requires the VIP cable to be attached to J400. s the VIP ca s the VIP ca MCH installations require the VIP inputs to be connected to the head assigned ID #1. See s require the VI P inputs P in s requ Section 2.2.2.4 for further information. r further informati or further information. APX mobile radios equipped with the following features are capable of transmitting automatically, even if the radio is turned off:

radio is turned off:

dio is turned off:

ipped with the following fe with the foll D DD r raft t ector pins 14 and 15 co ector pins 14 and 15 conn connection by REM connection by REMO a normally c a normally clos ssibly caus Automatic Vehicle Location cle Location ocation Other Special Data Products a Products Products bly c All APX mobile have accessory connector pins 14 and 15 connected together to allow the radio to power down. Opening this connection by REMOVING the accessory connector, or otherwise failing to maintain a normally closed path, could, if left unchecked, drain the vehicle battery, and possibly cause transmissions to occur.

!

C a u t i o n MN003109A01_aa Options and Accessories Installation Accessory Connector Assembly Details (P2) 4-9 4.4 Accessory Connector Assembly Details (P2) The APX mobile accessory connector assembly is mounted on the right rear of the radio, opposite the antenna and adjacent to the power connector. It is fastened to the radio via jackscrews and held together by the two cover screws. It is a multi-functional connector that allows for many different types of adaptations. All approved accessory wires are securely strain-relieved through the exiting slots at the back of the accessory connector assembly. The terminations that are supplied with all accessories are designed to be fully engaged and locked into the plug connector (6680163F01). They can also be detached for service with the assistance of a terminal removal tool. The accessory connector assembly can be serviced multiple times for future installation upgrades. The accessory connector assembly, supplied with every APX mobile dash-mounted radio, is equipped with a 26-pin plug assembly, two covers, two jackscrews, two cover screws, one emergency jumper, one ignition sense cable assembly, and one speaker pigtail. The jumper is provided to complete the circuit for emergency mode. If this circuit becomes open, the radio will be set to emergency mode. 39800834F05 is the crimping pin part number for use with any wires used inside the accessory cable connector. 4.4.1 Disassembly and Assembly mblymbly 4.4.1.1 Disassembly D negative terminal negative terminal from the is secured such that it will not power the vehicles electrical system. 1. Disconnect the negative terminal from the vehicles battery. Make sure that the battery cable at it will not power the veh at it will not power 2. Unscrew both jackscrews completely. ews completely. mpletely. 3. Pull the accessory connector assembly out from the radio. 4. Loosen both cover screws, but do not remove them completely. ut do not remove them com o not remove them com 5. Pull the jackscrews away from the plug and hold them back. e plug and hold them ba he plug and hold them back 6. Pry apart the accessory connector assembly covers. sembly covers. ssembly covers. 7. Attach any new wire to its proper location by pushing in the male terminal. When you hear a by pushing in th on by pushing in th wire is enga raft pop, the wire is engaged. To verify that the wire is engaged, tug gently on the wire and be sure it does not come out. Do not overload the wire: severe damage will result to the plug. ctor assembly out from the tor assembly out fr e is e e wire:wir MN003109A01_aa 4-10 Options and Accessories Installation Accessory Connector Assembly Details (P2) 4.4.1.2 Assembly 1. Place the plug in one cover. Be sure that the flange of the plug is in the slot of the cover. See Figure 4-9. 2. Push the jackscrew through the plug to hold it in. 3. Position each wire across the strain-relief features in the cover. Avoid damaging loads on the plug by allowing some slack in each wire in the accessory connector assemblys wire chamber. 4. Place the second cover onto the plug. Be sure that the flange is protruding through both covers. D D D D D D D D D D DD DDD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D DDDDDD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D DD D DD D DD DD D D D D D D D D D DD D D DD D D DD D D D D D DD D DD DDDDDDDDDD D D D D D D D D D D D D DDDD D D D D D DDD DDD D DD DDDDDDDDDD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D DD D DDDDDDDDD D D D D DDD DD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D DDDDDDDDD D D D D D D D D D D D D DD DD D D D D DD DD D D D D D D DD D D D D D D D D D D D DD DD D D D D DD DD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D DD D D D D D D DD DD D D D D D D D D D D D DDDDDDD DD D D D DD D D DDD D D D D DD D DD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D DD D D D D D D D D D D D DD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D DDD D D D r r r rrarraraarrra rrarararrra rra rra rra rrrara rra rrarr rra rrar rrar rrarara rrarr rrara rrararaarr r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r rr r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r rrr r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r rr r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r rrrr r r r r rr r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r rr r r rrr r r r r r r r r rr r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r rr r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r rr r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r rr r r r r r r r r r r rr r r r r r r r r r r r r rr r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r rr r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r ra raft rar rarararara ra ra ra ra ra rarrarara r r t Figure 4-9. Exploded View of Accessory Connector Assembly (HLN6863_) 5. Squeeze the covers together bending the wires in the strain-relief features. You may need a pair of pliers to seat the assembly covers. 6. Once the covers are fully seated, fasten them with the cover screws. Tighten the screws firmly but do not over-tighten them. Be sure none of the wires are pinched. 7. Reattach the accessory connector assembly to the back of the radio and fasten it by finger-tightening the jackscrews to prevent any loosening. NOTE: See APX Mobile Basic Service Manual for more detailed descriptions of these pins and other connectors located in the APX mobile radio. MN003109A01_aa

 

 

Options and Accessories Installation Motorola Branded SB9600 Siren Connection to APX 8500 4-11 4.5 Motorola Branded SB9600 Siren Connection to APX 8500

#1 #8 #14 #21 130 340

#7 #13 #20 #26 P3

#1

#14

#13

#25 P2

#21 #11 #8 #1

#26 #20 #13 #7 P1 CABLE 2 CABLE 1 Figure 4-10. J600 Accessory Connector Y-Cable KT000247A01 D 10. J600 AccessoDD r-10. J600 Accessory Con raft raaarararaaaafafaft aftftfttt afafafafafafafafafaffffffSPIRAL 22 AWG ORANGE 22 AWG ORANGE 22 AWG YELLOW 22 AWG YELLOW 22 AWG BROWN 22 AWG BROWN 22 AWG BROWN 22 AWG WHITE 22 A 22 AWG WHITE SPIRAL PIRAL SPIRAL SPIRAL SPIRAL SPIRAL SPIRAL SPIRAL SPIRAL SPIRAL AWG O CONNECTION CONNEC P1 P1 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 22 AWG BLACK 22 AWG PINK 22 AWG PURPLE 22 AWG GRAY 22 AWG TAN 22 AWG DRAIN 22 AWG BLUE 22 AWG RED 22 AWG GREEN 18 AWG RED 18 AWG YELLOW 22 AWG LIGHT BLUE 22 AWG LIGHT GREEN 18 AWG ORANGE 18 AWG BROWN 22 AWG BROWN/WHITE 22 AWG BLACK/WHITE 18 AWG BLACK 22 AWG BLACK 22 AWG PINK 22 AWG PURPLE 22 AWG GRAY 22 AWG TAN 22 AWG DRAIN 22 AWG BLUE 22 AWG RED 22 AWG GREEN 18 AWG RED 18 AWG YELLOW 22 AWG LIGHT BLUE 22 AWG LIGHT GREEN 18 AWG ORANGE 18 AWG BROWN 22 AWG BROWN/WHITE 22 AWG BLACK/WHITE 18 AWG BLACK P2 10/11 5 14 2 3 CUT CUT 19 23 8/17 4 CUT CUT 18/21 13 1 CUT 15 CUT 25 6/9 CUT 12 20/22 16 24 P3 1 CUT CUT 4 5 6 7 CUT CUT 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Figure 4-11. Pinout for cable KT000247A01 MN003109A01_aa 4-12 Options and Accessories Installation Motorola Branded SB9600 Siren Connection to APX 8500 Siren Cable Figure 4-12. Interfacing the Y-cable to the Motorola Branded SB9600 Siren and External Accessories o the Moto o the Mot D nector of Y-cabl f Y-cable KT00024 se of se of emergency accessor emergency acc e K 01 is primarily desig 01 is primarily designed t duplicate acce duplicat d still retain d still The Y-cable KT000247A01 is primarily designed to allow for simultaneous operation of the Motorola Branded SB9600 siren and still retain duplicate access to all the MAP (J2) connector pins located on the APX 8500 remote TIB. Use of emergency accessories, speakers, programming cables, VIPS, etc are possible via the P3 connector of Y-cable KT000247A01. The 25pin connector P2 does not contain every signal from the legacy DB25 port, called J600 on the APX 7500. Therefore, some legacy functionality (i.e. A+) is reduced with the APX 8500 remote mount configuration compared to the APX 7500 remote mount configuration. on. NOTE: Only USB 1.5 meter data cable HKN6163_ is approved for use in series with the Y-cable raft KT000247A01 at connector P3. USB 4 meter data cable HKN6172_ is not approved for use in series with the Y-cable at connector P3. pproved for u N6163_ is pproved for use N6163_ is a meter data cable HKN6 meter data cable HK DB25 port, called J600 ed with the AP d with the A X 8500 remo cy DB25 port, calle X 850 d MN003109A01_aa Options and Accessories Installation Compatibility of Emergency when Attaching a Motorola Branded SB9600 Siren4-

4.6 Compatibility of Emergency when Attaching a Motorola Branded SB9600 Siren When using emergency footswitch or pushbutton with siren/PA configuration, REMOVE pin 8

(emergency) from the siren connector of the HKN4363_ siren cable as follows:

Siren Cable Figure 4-13. Field adjustment for Emergency Operation with Siren Accessory the sire the sire 1. Remove the knob from the siren/PA cable connector. 2. Remove all four screws from the connector in the siren/PA cable. ews from the c ews from the 3. Open the connector cap and locate pin 8. ctor cap and locate pin ctor cap and locat 4. Using the contact removal tool (6684690C02), remove pin 8 from the connector. ct removal tool (6684690C ct removal tool (6 5. Put the connector cap in place and proceed to reinstall the four screws and the knob. D cap in place and proceed to ra ap in place and proraft raft aft aftfafafaffftftftftftfttftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftfttttttffffffafafafafafafafaftttftftftftftftft aft aft aftft aft aftft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft afafaffafaffft afftftftftft afafaaafafafaaaaaaaaaaaftffa1 7 3 A B 13 15 19 19 166 16 24 24 2 12 23 25 26 17 10 14 20 21 22 27 28 18 11 11 4 4 2 2 1 5 6 8 9 Pin 8 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 Figure 4-14. Location for Pin 8 MN003109A01_aa 4-14Options and Accessories Installation Compatibility of Emergency when Attaching a Motorola Branded SB9600 Si-

Notes D raft MN003109A01_aa Chapter 5 Motorcycle Radio Installation 5.1 Motorcycle Radio Description The motorcycle model includes all the same components in the standard radio. The following paragraphs describe the unique items provided with the motorcycle models. A small label is included with the motorcycle radio, which can be placed on the radio to identify it as a motorcycle radio. The label should be placed on a flat and protected area to avoid damage during handling. See Figure 5-1. 5.1.1 Transceiver Enclosure Figure 5-1. Identification of a Motorcycle Radio by Using a Label D D D D D D D D D D D D D DD D D DD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DD DD D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D DD D DDD DD D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDD DDDD D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D D D DD D D D D D D D D D D D DD DDD DD DDDD D D D DDDDDDDD D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D DDDD D D DD D D D D D D D D D D D D D DD DDDD D D DDD D DDDDDD D DDDDD DD D DDDDDD D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDD D DD DD DD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D DD D D D D D D D D D D DDDDDDDDDD D D D D D DD D D D D DDDDD D DDDD D D D DDDD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDD D D D DDDDDDD DD D D D D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDD D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D DD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D D DD DDD D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D DDDDDDDDDDD D D D D D D DDDDDDDDDDD D D D DDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D DDDDDDDDDDDD D D D D D D D D D D D DD D D DD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DD D D DD DDD D DD D DD D D D D D D D D D D D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D D D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D DDDD D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDD D DDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D D D DDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDD D DDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDD DDDDDDDDDD DD DDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDD D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDD DDDDDDDDD D D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDD D D D DDD DDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDD DD DDD D D D DDDD D D D DDDDDDD DD DDDDDDDDDDDD DD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDD D DDDD D DDDDD D D DDDDDD D DDDDD D DDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D DD D DD D DDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDD D D DD D D DDDDDDDD D D D D D D DD D D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D D D D DDDDDDD DDD DDDDDDD DDDDDD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D DD D D DD DDDDDDD D D DDDD D D DD DD D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D DD D D D D D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D D D D D D D D D DD D D D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDD D D DDD DDDD D D DDDDD D DDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD r raaa rrra r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r rr r r r rr r r rr r rr r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r rr r rrr r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r rrrr rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r rr r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r rr rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr r r r r r r r rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr rrrr r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r rrr r r r r r r r r r r r rr r r r r r r r r r r r r rrrrrr r r rrrr r r r r r r rr r r r r r r r rrr r r rrr rrrrrrr r r r rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r rarar raft aaar raa rrraarrraraaaarrrrrrrraaarrrrarrrrrraaar rrrrrrr r rr rrrrrrrrrrrrrrr rrrrr rr rrr rr rrr r rrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr a aaaa a Motorcycle Radio a Motorcycle m housing tion of tio hou resistant t sista enclosure that c enclosure tha g latch that requires g latch that require The transceiver is mounted in the weather-resistant enclosure that consists of a bottom housing and a hinged top cover. The top cover has a locking latch that requires a key to open. The enclosure is mounted above the rear motorcycle wheel, oriented so that the lock is forward and the hinged cover opens toward the rear of the motorcycle. The bottom housing has a grommeted hole for cable entry and weep holes to permit water drainage. The enclosure is mounted on the motorcycle with a universal mounting plate and shock and vibration isolators. A large, braided ground-strap (installed between the mounting plate bolts and the motorcycle frame) grounds the transceiver. ted ed so that the that 5.1.2 Control/Display Unit All radio functions, except push-to-talk (PTT), are activated from the control head, which also is weather-resistant. The control head and the external speaker are mounted for easy access near the center of the handlebars. The control head is positioned for unobstructed viewing, and it may be tilted on the horizontal axis for ease of viewing. The microphone cable port on the front of the control head is plugged and is not used. 5.1.3 Control Head Cable The control-head cable connects the control head to the transceiver. The cable is routed along the motorcycles frame and has weather-resistant connections at both ends. Excess cable is coiled under the transceiver inside the weather-resistant enclosure. Each end of the cable is strain-relieved with jackscrews at the control head and the transceiver. The cable is shielded to reduce the effects of radio frequency interference and ignition sense noise. 5-2 5.1.4 Microphone Motorcycle Radio Installation Motorcycle Radio Description A weather-resistant, palm microphone and coiled cord plug into a pigtail connector on the control cable. The microphone attaches to a hang-up bracket located within easy reach of the motorcycle rider. The coiled cord is long enough to be operated by someone standing next to the motorcycle, yet short enough to not interfere with the motorcycles steering or operation. 5.1.5 External Speaker A 3.2-ohm, 10-watt-rated-audio-power, external speaker is mounted on the front of the motorcycle. The speaker cable is routed along the motorcycle frame to the transceivers rear accessory connector. A sealed, weather-resistant, speaker-muting (toggle) switch is mounted on top of the speaker. The external speaker connects to the rear accessory connector of the transceiver. 5.1.6 Headset Capability The motorcycle radio is compatible with various headset accessories that provide hands-free operation of the radio. Motorola does not manufacture headset equipment, but provides the interconnection for headset equipment with the motorcycle radio. Aftermarket headset equipment is available through Motorola (see Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering). mement wnt w e e Appendix A Appendix A s D dio, refer to the CD D dio, refer to the CPS help

!

d with any motorcycle helm d with any motorcy To avoid loud audio, refer to the CPS help menu for audio settings if the Motorola mobile radio is used with any motorcycle helmet headset. ra C a u t i o n raftnsceivers weather-resista ra The antenna(s) are mounted on top of the transceivers weather-resistant enclosure. ceivers weather-res The enclosures metal lining acts as the antennas ground plane. s ground plane. ground plane. Ignition Sense (ACC) Wire The ignition sense wire connects to the motorcycles fuse box and is routed along the motorcycle frame to the transceivers rear accessory connector. The radio is wired so that transmission is inhibited if the motorcycles ignition sense switch is off. If the PTT switch is pressed with the ignition sense off, a low-frequency tone sounds. The receiver is controlled by the control head on/off switch. 5.1.7 Antenna 5.1.8 MN003109A01_aa Motorcycle Radio Installation Installation Overview 5-3 Installation Overview 5.2 5.2.1 General All APX mobile radios are tested and inspected before shipment. It is, however, suggested that the transmitter frequency, deviation, and power output be checked at the time of installation. It is the license holders responsibility to ensure that the operating parameters of his station comply with applicable laws governing radio communications equipment. For tests and alignment procedures, refer to the appropriate service manual (refer to Related Publications. Generally, the installation of the motorcycle radio takes place in the following parts:

Mounting the universal mounting plate and related hardware at the rear of the motorcycle;

Mounting the control head, speaker, microphone, and related hardware forward on the motorcycle;

Routing the power cable, control-head cable, speaker cable, and ignition sense cable to the weather-resistant enclosure;

Mounting the weather-resistant enclosure and radio chassis, and connecting the cables;

Mounting the antenna(s) to the weather-resistant enclosure. o to the whe supplied suppl mounting plate may not s mounting plate ma and microphone are mo and microphone are veral possible mounti by Mby M to the rear frame of to the rear frame ate vary from motorcycle t te vary from motor D A universal mounting plate, supplied by Motorola, is first mounted to either a motorcycle carrier at the rear of the motorcycle or to the rear frame of the motorcycle itself. The mounting procedures for the universal mounting plate vary from motorcycle to motorcycle. Therefore, the procedures given in this manual for installing the mounting plate may not specifically apply, but are provided for guidance. The control head, speaker, and microphone are mounted forward on the motorcycle, on or near the steering column. There are several possible mounting configurations which use a combination of Motorola and customer-built brackets. These configurations are outlined in this manual. Because of the large number of motorcycle makes and models in existence, the customer-built brackets are and models in existenc in existen necessary to tailor the mounting of the Motorola equipment to the particular motorcycle being used. Motorola equipment to the Motorola equipment to th Suggestions for customer-built brackets are given in this manual. are given in this manual. are given in this manual. The power cable, control-head cable, speaker cable, and ignition sense cable are routed to the ble, and ignition weather-resistant enclosure position. The enclosure and the radio chassis are then mounted. Special ure and the rad sure and the radi care is required when connecting cables to the radio equipment within the enclosure. io equipme raft ckets. These configur kets. These configu ation r car c ble, and ignition s possible moun ng co kes and models equip un MN003109A01_aa 5-4 5.2.2 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installation Overview Important Motorcycle Installation Hints Consider the following when mounting the radio components:

Excess lengths of control-head, power, ignition sense, and speaker cables must be routed in the enclosure as shown in Figure 5-19. All components must be mounted securely in order to withstand the constant and sometimes severe vibration experienced on a motorcycle. No cantilever action, which could cause severe vibration, should be generated in the mounting hardware. The control head and microphone must be placed for ease of accessibility by the motorcycle operator. Forward components (control head, microphone, and speaker) should not interfere with visual or physical access to controls and instruments. Forward components should not interfere with the handling of the motorcycle. Cabling between the control head and the radio chassis should be run to minimize interference with operator movements. The weather-resistant enclosure should be placed to avoid any interference with the motorcycle osure sho osure sho adequate metal ground plane. lane. ane operator. must be present throug must be present th frame for proper electrical and RF grounding. ctrical and RF grounding. ctrical and RF grou D Electrical continuity must be present through the enclosure shock mounts to the motorcycle The antenna(s) are designed for mounting on the top of the weather-resistant enclosure and an signed for mounting signed for mounting on the raft st be electrical continuity fr e electrical continuity fr event corro Only the supplied microphone mounting clip should be used to ensure secure mounting of the microphone. This clip has a very strong spring to ensure positive retention of the microphone over rough terrain. Also, there must be electrical continuity from this clip to the motorcycle frame for DC grounding. mounting clip shou to ensure p to e y strong spring y strong spri e mounting clip should be Direct access to the microphone should be provided from both sides of the motorcycle. provided from both Sufficient slack in the microphone coiled cord should be allowed so as not to impede steering. d should be allowe should be allow Mounting hardware must be stainless steel to prevent corrosion. If an extra length of cable is used to extend the microphone, ensure that the added capacitance be e provided from both sid ent c ophoph does not interfere with the operation of the radio. A suitable covering should be applied to the DB-9 receptacle when the water resistant microphone (HMN1079) is not connected. MN003109A01_aa Motorcycle Radio Installation Installation Overview 5-5 5.2.3 Parts Identification The following installation procedures refer to Figure 5-2 through Figure 5-20. Detailed descriptions of the mounting hardware used in each procedure are provided in parts lists located in the exploded views located in the APX Mobile Basic Service Manual (see related documentation). Those parts supplied by Motorola are contained in one of the following kits:

Motorcycle Weather-Resistant Microphone Motorcycle Weather-Resistant Speaker with Mute Switch Motorcycle Hardware Kit SECURENET or Motorcycle Hardware Kit Motorcycle Power Cable Kit Motorcycle Mounting Kit Weather-Resistant Enclosure Antenna 5.2.4 Order of Installation Before starting the installation, familiarize yourself with the mounting hardware (see Figure 5-2 through Figure 5-20). Perform the installation procedures in the order that follows. m the insta m the insta amili amil D Install the universal mounting plate on the motorcycle. al mounting plate o al mounting plat Install the control head and speaker. rol head and speaker. rol head and speak Install the microphone hang-up clip. hone hang-up clip. hone hang-up clip. Install antenna base and cable onto enclosure. and cable onto enclosure and cable onto enc Install the cables. Install the weather-resistant enclosure on the universal mounting plate. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Route the cables inside the weather-resistant enclosure. ather-resistant enclosure. her-resistant enclosure. Install the transceiver in the weather-resistant enclosure. 8. er-resistant enclosure. r-resistant enclosure. 9. Install the antenna(s) on the enclosure. raft enclososure on the universa ure on the u MN003109A01_aa 5-6 5.3 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Universal Mounting Plate Installing the Universal Mounting Plate The universal mounting plate, supplied with the motorcycle radio, must be mounted on the motorcycle first. It provides the base on which the weather-resistant enclosure is to be mounted. The method used for mounting the plate depends on the make and model of the motorcycle and whether the plate is mounted to a carrier or to the motorcycle chassis. After the plate has been securely mounted to the motorcycle, mounting the weather-resistant enclosure onto the plate is straightforward. Figure 5-2 illustrates the universal mounting plate mounted to a motorcycle carrier. Since there are so many makes and models of motorcycles and motorcycle carriers, it is impossible to give specific step-by-step instructions for mounting the universal mounting plate. However, noting the following considerations will aid in the installation procedure. A minimum of holes are predrilled into this plate as supplied. Mounting holes must be drilled as required for the particular motorcycle on which the plate is being mounted. The universal mounting plate should be mounted on the motorcycle in such a manner that the later mounting of the weather-resistant enclosure will not interfere with the motorcycle seat back, with any other obstacles, or with the motorcycle operator. The enclosure may be temporarily bolted to the universal mounting plate and the unit positioned on the motorcycle to versal versal ensure the above criteria are met. are met. are met. D To ensure a good grounding path from the universal mounting plate to the motorcycle carrier or frame, stainless steel lock washers must be used with the mounting hardware in two areas to score through the paint on the universal mounting plate and on the carrier or frame, thereby, providing good electrical contact with the underside of the motorcycle carrier or motorcycle frame. nding path from the nding path from el lock washers must be el lock washers mu aint on the universal mount int on the univers al contact with the undersid al contact with the u raf Figure 5-2. Universal Mounting Plate Installation (Part of Radio Enclosure Kit) Follow the procedures below to mount the universal mounting plate to the motorcycle

(see Figure 5-2). 1. Determine the mounting position for the mounting plate. 2. Determine whether stainless steel spacers are required for clearance in mounting the plate. 3. Drill four 9/32-inch holes in the mounting plate and the corresponding motorcycle carrier or chassis for mounting the plate. 4. Attach the universal mounting plate to the motorcycle using four machine screws, eight lock washers, and four nuts. Tighten screws securely. The lock washers must cut through the paint on the plate and motorcycle carrier or frame to ensure a good ground path. MN003109A01_aa Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Speaker and Control Head 5-7 5.4 Installing the Speaker and Control Head NOTE: To disable the internal speaker of the O2 Control Head, please refer to Section 2.5.1: Internal Speaker Disassembly . The control head mounting location and configuration is determined largely by the make and model of motorcycle. Two different mounting configurations are described below. One involves mounting the speaker and control head together as a unit using the combination speaker/control-head bracket

(shown in Figure 5-4) supplied by Motorola. Alternately, the control head may be mounted by itself using a smaller control-head bracket supplied by Motorola. In this case, the speaker is mounted elsewhere. This section outlines installation procedures for each configuration mentioned above. The customer (or installer) is in the best position to determine the most appropriate mounting configuration for the control head and speaker based on the particular motorcycle on which the equipment is to be mounted.

!

C a u t i o n When determining its location, position the control head so that it is clearly visible and within easy reach of the motorcycle operator. D D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD raf raft raft raaaaf rararaaraarararaararaarararaararaarararaaafafafaaaafffafaffaaaaf raftft raaaf raaf raraafafafafafaf raraararararararaftftftftftftftftftftftftttftttftftttttftfttttttttttftfttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttftt afafaaararaaaaraafafaaaraafafafafafaf rararaaaraafft rara a ttttttttttftftftfftftftftftfftfttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttftttttttftttttfttttfttftttftfttftttftttftfttttftftttftfttttttftftftftftftftttftftftftftftftftftffftftftttttttttttttttttttttttftttttttfttttftttttfttftttfttfttfaft aft aftfttfttttfttfttttftfttftttftftftftftfft afafafafafafafafafafafafftfttftftftftttttttttttttftftttttttftfttttttttftftftftttttttfttttttfttttttft afft aft aft aft aft aft aft aftftftttttt aftftftttttt aftftftttttt aftttttftftttttftftftttt aftftftttt afttttfttttft aftfttttftfttttftftftttftttftftftftttftft aftft aftft aaft aft aft aft aft aft aaaaaaaaaf afafftft aaft tttttfttttttftftttttt Figure 5-3. Motorcycle Control Head Cabling (3075217A01) abab MN003109A01_aa 5-8 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Speaker and Control Head 5.4.1 Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together Figure 5-4 illustrates the combination speaker/control head bracket. This combination bracket is used only when the control head and speaker are to be mounted as a unit. Also illustrated in Figure 5-4 is a handlebar-mounting bracket which may be required if the combination speaker/

control-head bracket cannot be easily mounted to the motorcycle. In this case the handlebar-mounting bracket is mounted to the motorcycle, and the combination bracket is then mounted to the handlebar-mounting bracket. Figure 5-4. Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together MN003109A01_aa Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Speaker and Control Head 5-9 Provision has been made on the combination speaker/control-head bracket for mounting the microphone hang-up clip. If that mounting is desired, the hang-up clip must be attached to the bracket before installing the control head and speaker. See Section 5.6: Installing the Microphone Hang-Up Clip for the hang-up clip procedure. Install the speaker and control head as described below. 1. Determine the location where the speaker/control head is to be mounted. Consider how the speaker/control-head bracket may be mounted, and whether or not a handlebar-mounting bracket is needed. Take care to select a location that is not only mechanically convenient, but is located for ease of operation. NOTE: The angle at which the handlebar-mounting bracket or the speaker/control-head bracket is mounted to the motorcycle determines the firing angle of the speaker. If the handlebar-mounting bracket is needed, install it first. 2. 3. Mount the speaker/control-head bracket, either directly to the motorcycle, or, if used, to the handlebar-mounting bracket, using four stainless-steel machine screws, lock washers, and nuts. 4. Mount the 9-pin D-connector end of the motorcycle control-head cable to the speaker/control torto head bracket, using two machine screws, flat washers, and nuts. (Cable routing directions appear later in this section.) ection.) ection o machin o machi 5. Mount the speaker on the speaker/control-head bracket, using two machine screws and lock D er on the spea er on e these e the ker/co ke to screws to 20 in-l washers. Torque these screws to 20 in-lbs.

-head cable to the contro l

-head cable to the nection must be made be ection must be ma ns apppear later in this secti fo 6. Attach the control-head cable to the control head and tighten the locking screws on the connector. This connection must be made before you mount the control head in the bracket.

(Cable routing directions appear later in this section.) the bracket, using he bracket, using two mac 7. Mount the control head to the bracket, using two machine screws, lock washers, and flat ear later in th washers. raft angle by lo ngle by loosening its mou osening its mo hen, retighten screws to 2 en, retighten screws t tw 8. Adjust the control head viewing angle by loosening its mounting screws and rotating the control head to the desired angle. Then, retighten screws to 20 in-lbs torque. This concludes the speaker/control-head installation. Together Some motorcycles provide a console for mounting radio equipment. This console is attached to the top of the fuel tank. With the use of a mounting bracket, screws, nuts, and lock washers, the combination speaker/control-head bracket can be mounted to this console. Figure 5-5 illustrates this type of mounting. The console attachment screws must be removed, and the console must be lifted slightly from the fuel tank to gain access in order to attach mounting hardware, and to route cables later. In this installation, the microphone (mic), mic hang-up bracket, and mic extension bracket will interfere with handlebar travel. Installation using this method is the same as in Section 5.4.1: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together . 5.4.2 Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted aker an ker MN003109A01_aa 5-10 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Speaker and Control Head Figure 5-5. Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together f MN003109A01_aa Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Speaker and Control Head 5-11 5.4.3 Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately It may be necessary to use the smaller control head bracket (part number 07-80127N02) and mount the speaker and microphone hang-up clip in another location on the motorcycle. Before installing the control head using the bracket described above, the control-head end of the control-head cable should be temporarily fastened to the control head, and the control head fastened to its bracket. Motorola-supplied spacers and the mic-cable bracket are required to mount the control head to the handlebar. This mic-cable bracket has holes to mount the microphone-cable connector. Follow these procedures when mounting the smaller control-head bracket:

1. Determine the location at which the control head is to be mounted. Take care to choose a location that is not only mechanically convenient, but is located for ease of operation. 2. Securely mount the Motorola-supplied spacers, mic-cable bracket, and small control-head bracket to the handlebars. 3. Mount the 9-pin D-connector end of the motorcycle control-head cable to the mic-cable bracket, using two machine screws, flat washers, and nuts. (Cable routing directions appear later in this section.) 4. Attach the control-head end of the cable to the control head and tighten the locking screws on end end ofof the connector. 5. Mount the control head to the small control-head bracket, at the proper viewing angle, using two wing screws. Tighten firmly. This concludes the control-head installation. co head to the small c head to the sma s. Tighten firmly. T ws. Tighten firmly. This MN003109A01_aa 5-12 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Speaker and Control Head Figure 5-6. Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately 5.4.4 Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately The control head may be mounted to the fuel tank console using the smaller control-head bracket and spacers/hardware. In this configuration, the microphone cable connector may be attached directly to the console, eliminating the need for a custom bracket. MN003109A01_aa Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Speaker and Control Head 5-13 Figure 5-7. Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately Installation is the same as detailed in Section 5.4.2: Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together and Section 5.4.3: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately . MN003109A01_aa 5-14 5.5 5.6 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Speaker Installing the Speaker NOTE: To disable the internal speaker of the O2 Control Head, please refer to Section 2.5.1: Internal Speaker Disassembly . Use the following procedure when the speaker is mounted separate from the control head. The speaker bracket supplied with the speaker may be used alone if a suitable location can be found, or if necessary, a customer-supplied bracket may be fabricated for mounting the speaker. 1. Determine the location in which the speaker is to be mounted and whether there is a requirement for a customer-supplied bracket. 2. Fabricate a bracket if required. Use the Motorola-supplied speaker bracket as a template for drilling mounting holes. Also drill holes in the fabricated bracket for mounting to the motorcycle. 3. Mount the fabricated bracket to the motorcycle chassis. 4. Mount the Motorola-supplied bracket to the fabricated bracket using two machine screws, flat washers, lock washers, and nuts. ea 5. Mount the speaker to the speaker bracket using two wing screws. Directions for speaker cro cable routing appear later in this section. Speaker mounting is now complete. in this s in this ophone Hang ophone Ha ther on the supplied mi ther on the supplie ket. Both methods are show et. Both methods a D Installing the Microphone Hang-Up Clip Install the hang-up clip either on the supplied microphone extension bracket or on the side of the speaker/control head bracket. Both methods are shown in Figure 5-4. Determine the mounting location and install as described in the following paragraphs. NOTE: Wherever the hang-up clip is mounted, it must be DC grounded for proper operation. After p is mounted, it must be D mounting the clip, be sure there is electrical continuity between the clip and the motorcycle chassis. mounted, it mus ere is electrical ere is electric ed in the following paragra ed in the following p raft continuity b con bracket u acke 1. Attach the bracket to the speaker/control-head bracket using two machine screws, four lock Using this method, you can mount the clip so that it faces the operator. it faces the opera t faces the opera washers, and two nuts as shown in Figure 5-4. 5.6.1 Extension Bracket Mounting 2. Torque nuts to 20 in-lbs torque. 3. Fasten the hang-up clip to the extension bracket using two machine screws, lock washers, and nuts as shown in Figure 5-4. 4. Torque nuts to 20 in-lbs torque. 5.6.2 Speaker/Control Head Bracket Side Mounting Attach the hang-up clip to the left side of the speaker/control-head bracket using two machine screws, lock washers, and nuts as shown in Figure 5-4. Torque nuts to 20 in-lbs. torque. MN003109A01_aa Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing Antenna Base, Cables and Multiplexer 5-15 5.6.3 Other Hang-Up Clip Mounting To mount the microphone hang-up clip in another location, a customer-supplied bracket may be used. Suggested locations include the handlebars, fuel-tank console, or any location which provides easy access to the microphone without blocking controls and indicators and without interfering with motorcycle handling. See Figure 5-5, Figure 5-6, and Figure 5-7 for alternative microphone hang-up clip mounting methods. 1. Fabricate a bracket, then secure it to the motorcycle. 2. Use two machine screws, lock washers, and nuts to secure the hang-up clip to the customer-supplied bracket. Ensure that the microphone clip is DC grounded to the motorcycle chassis (a grounding lug and strap are provided in the hang-up clip kit for this purpose) this is essential for proper radio operation. 5.7 Installing Antenna Base, Cables and Multiplexer NOTE: Antenna hole placement and cable routing in 700/800, VHF and UHF antenna manuals are not applicable for the APX Series. embly m embly m The GPS antenna assembly must be done after the removal of the metal liner but before X Series liner. reinstalling the APX Series liner. LMR all-band Port X Series liner.D D D DD D D D D D D D D D raaftftftftft raftftftft rrra r r r r raft ra raft raararaaafaffftfffftftft ra ra aaaaaaaaarafaf raft raft rarrraraft raaf rafaraaaaararaaaarrarrarrrararrarrarrrarrarrrarararrararararararararararaftftftfttftft raraaaf rarararararararaaaaaaaaafffffaftfaft rrrararaaraaaaarraaarraaaaarararaararrrarararrrraaarrararrraaaararaaaraaraaraarararararararaararararaaaararaaaaararaaararaaararaaraaraaraarararaaraaarrarraaraararaaaraararaaaraaraarrararraaaaraaraaaaaaaaaaaaaarararararararrararararararrararaaraaararaaaraaaraaaraaraaararaaaaaaaaararaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaftftftftftft rar rar rararararar aft aftfffaft aft aft aftftffffaft aft aftftftft aaftftfftftftftftftftfftffftffftfffffffaft aft aft aft aftftfttfttfttfttftftftftftfffffffffffffffafttttttttftftft afafaftfft aft aft aftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftfttftttftftftfttftfttftttfttfttftftftftt afaaft aft afaaaaftftftt ffffffftftftftftftftftftftftftftfttftftftfttttttftftftftfftfaftffaftfaftfaffftfffftftftftfffffffftffffftftftftftftftftftftf aft aftffaft aft aft affaft aft aft aftftft aaftfffaft aftfaftf aa f f Wi-Fi GPS Figure 5-8. Antenna Band Identification 1. Open the top cover of the weather-resistant enclosure. 2. Uninstall the metal liner that is shipped attached to the weather-resistant enclosure. This liner has one depressed area at the top of the enclosure liner just toward the rear of the enclosure. This metal liner is not used with APX Series products. 3. Place the metal liner with two round, depressed areas toward the enclosure hinge and 1 inch hole near the front of the housing, inside the top cover, and align the six slots in the metal liner with the screw holes in the top housing. 4. The metal liner of the enclosures top cover acts as a ground plane for the antenna. 5. Locate the two round, depressed areas about 3 inches in diameter in the metal liner near the enclosure hinge. Referring to Figure 5-9, these areas are either VHF or UHF depending on the antenna port locations. For the GPS antenna, use the 1 inch hole near the front of the housing near the lock. MN003109A01_aa 5-16 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing Antenna Base, Cables and Multiplexer Top Cover for APX Radios GPS/Wi-Fi 700/800 Antenna UHF Antenna VHF Antenna D D D D D D D D DDDDDDDDDD DD r r r r r r r r Figure 5-9. Antenna Port Locations

. Antenna Port Locations tenna Port Locations raft a template to mark t guidelines for the va guidelines for the v as a template to mark the 6. These holes in the metal liner is used as a template to mark the position of the hole(s) to be drilled at the top cover. Follow the below guidelines for the various options. 7. Remove the metal liner from the top cover. 8. For LMR all-band antenna, use the Motorola RPX-4378A Hole-Cutting Saw or equivalent, X-437 X-43 and carefully drill a 3/4-inch hole at the marked location from the inside of the cover until the saw bottoms out. For the GPS/WiFi carefully drill a 1 1/16-inch hole at the marked location from the inside of the cover until the saw bottoms out. The saw should clean a neat circle to assure good contact between the antenna and the housing. IMPORTANT:

For proper seating of the antennas, deburr and scrape any foreign matter from both sides of the hole, being careful not to mar the finish of the shell. 9. Clean the mounting surface around the hole to remove dirt and wax. 10. Refer to the Motorcycle GPS Instruction Manual for further installation instruction for the GPS. GPS must be mounted before the APX metal liner is installed. 11. Reinstall the APX metal liner with the cable clamps provided in the weather-resistant housing. 12. Attach the 700/800, VHF or UHF antenna base per Antenna Installation Manual. IMPORTANT:

Antenna Placement and Cable Routing in the Antenna Installation Manual is not applicable for the APX series. MN003109A01_aa Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing Antenna Base, Cables and Multiplexer 5-17 13. Route the coaxial cable for the 700/800, VHF or UHF antenna(s) through the cable clamps per Figure 5-11 for VHF hole, Figure 5-12 for 700/800 hole and Figure 5-13 for UHF hole.

!

C a u t i o n Be sure to observe the correct routing of the antenna cable. Failure to do so can damage the cable. 14. After routing cable, allow enough of the cable to reach the radios antenna connector and cut off any excess length of the cable. 15. Install the connector per Antenna Installation Manual. Cable Clamps need to be included and cable clamps routing to be through NOTE: Do not cut D D DDDD DDD DDDDDD DD D DDDDDDDDDDD D D DD D rafafafaft r r r raft raft ra rarara raraf raaf rrararaafafaff rrarararafafafafffff raftft rarara ra the antenna cable aftftftftftftftftftttft aft aft aaft aft aftft aftftftft aftft aftft f ft Cable routes underneath radio mounting plate and connects to multiplexer mounted underneath radio on the radio mounting plate GPS/Wi-Fi cables connect to radio directly Figure 5-10. Routing the GPS/Wi-Fi Cable MN003109A01_aa 5-18 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing Antenna Base, Cables and Multiplexer Cable Clamps need to be included and routing to be through cable clamps NOTE: Do not cut the antenna cable NOTE: Do not cut the antenna cable Cable routes underneath radio mounting plate and connects to multiplexer mounted underneath radio on the radio mounting plate D D D D D DDDDDDD D D DDDDDDD D D DD rraft r r r rrr r r raRouting the VHF Antenna C ra rara ra rr aft aafaaafafftftftftft aftft aftft aftft aftft aft afaft aaft aft aft aft afaft aftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftftft aft aftft aft aftftftftft Figure 5-11. Routing the VHF Antenna Cable Routing the VHF An Cable Clamps need to be included and routing to be through cable clamps Figure 5-12. Routing the 700/800 Antenna Cable Cable routes underneath radio mounting plate and connects to multiplexer mounted underneath radio on the radio mounting plate MN003109A01_aa Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing Antenna Base, Cables and Multiplexer 5-19 Cable Clamps need to be included and routing to be through cable clamps NOTE: Do not cut the antenna cable Cable routes underneath radio mounting plate and connects to multiplexer mounted underneath radio on the radio mounting plate D D D D DDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDD D D D r r r r r ra rara ra raft Figure 5-13. Routing the UHF Antenna Cable Routing the UHF Antenn Routing the UHF Figure 5-14. Multiplexer and Trunnion Mounting MN003109A01_aa 5-20 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing Antenna Base, Cables and Multiplexer NOTE: Do not cut the antenna cable D Figure 5-15. Cable Routing e 5-15. Cable Routing raft raft 5. Cable Rou Figure 5-16. Cable from Radio to Multiplexer NOTE: Radio has to be mounted with the TIB facing the front of the enclosure MN003109A01_aa Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Antenna 5-21 5.8 5.9 Installing the Antenna IMPORTANT:

Antenna Placement and Cable Routing as described inside the Antenna Installation Manual is not applicable for the APX radio series. Refer to information listed below. Connect the appropriate antenna connectors to the antenna receptacles on the radio. Tighten the coupling until fully engaged. Cable Routing Five cables must be installed to interconnect the components of the radio system as shown in Figure 5-17. The antenna cable is routed away from the other cables inside the enclosures hinged cover (see Section 5.7). The four remaining cables, routed along the motorcycle frame, are described in the following paragraphs. NOTE: Antenna Hole Placement and Cable Routing information in the Antenna Installation Manual is not applicable to the APX series. Removal of the fuel tank and seat from the motorcycle will facilitate routing the cables along the frame. Motorcycles with consoles attached to fuel tanks require routing cables between console and fuel tank. In this case the tank is not removed. es with co es with con nk. In this andan CONTROL HEAD CABLE MICROPHONE TROL CABLE BLE SPEAKER ER SPEA SPEAKER/

CONTROL HEAD nk. In this casecasD D r raft RYt CONTROL HEA CONTROL HEAD POWER CABLE BATTERY ACCESSORY CABLE CABLE CABLE ANTENNA CABLE FUSE BLOCK IGNITION CABLE SPEAKER CABLE CHASSIS GROUND FUSED POWER CABLE Figure 5-17. Cable Routing 1. Speaker Cable runs from the speaker to the accessory-cable connector inside the weather-resistant enclosure. MN003109A01_aa 5-22 Motorcycle Radio Installation Cable Routing 2. Control Cable runs from the rear of the control head to the front of the transceiver inside the enclosure. Ignition Sense (Red) Wire Portion of Accessory Cable runs from the ignition sense fuse terminal of the fuse box to the rear area inside the enclosure. The lug for attaching the ignition sense wire is contained on the accessory cable. 3. 4. Power Cable The red, unterminated end runs from the positive terminal of the battery to the power connector that plugs in the rear of the transceiver. Lugs for attaching the red and black leads are contained in the motorcycle power-cable kit. The black, unterminated end runs from a suitable motorcycle chassis ground to the power connector. DO NOT connect the black lead directly to the negative battery post. You may route the cables in any order. As you route each cable, temporarily fasten it at both ends. When all cables have been run, permanently fasten the cables with appropriate cable tie wraps. Observe the following during routing and hook-up:

1. Route the cables so that none interfere with motorcycle operation. 2. Fasten the cables with supplied nylon tie wraps. The wraps should be firmly installed at frequent intervals along the cable length in such a manner that motorcycle vibration will not cause metal fatigue and subsequent breakage of the cable wires. ubsequ ubsequ res anand Multiplexer Installatio D 3. Take care to position cables away from parts of the motorcycle that get hot. n cables away from n cables away fro Bundle excess cable length inside the weather-resistant enclosure as discussed later in Section gth inside the weather-

gth inside the weat 5.11: Transceiver, Cabling and Multiplexer Installation . d Multiplexer Ins The fifth cable is the microphone with coiled cord. Plug the 9-pin D-connector end of the coiled cord ne with coiled cord. e with coiled cord. Plug th into its mating connector, which was attached near the control head discussed in an earlier paragraph. Tighten the coiled-cord-retention screws. Insert the S-hook strain relief (terminated to the coiled cord) into the hole in the mounting bracket. Slide the microphone into the microphone hang-up bracket. raft attached near th etention screws. In tention screws. Insert the s g bracket. Slide the microp racket. Slide the microp as attached near the cont MN003109A01_aa Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Weather-Resistant Enclosure 5-23 5.10 Installing the Weather-Resistant Enclosure 7 7 2 3 4 8 5 6 Item No. Description Item No. TO MOTORCYCLE CHASSIS GROUND Description 1 1 2 3 4 Universal Mounting Plate 5 Flat Rubber Washer Machine Screw 7-1/2-inch Ground Strap Shouldered Rubber Washer Lockwasher Flat Washer 8 7 6 Ground Strap Figure 5-18. Weather-Resistant Enclosure Installation D DDDD r r 8. Weather-Resistant Enc Weather-Resis g plate by removin four ng plate by removing sure is mounted raft ount unt components exactly a mponents exactly shock-mount and the tra shock-mount and the trans tween the right rear etween the right rear mo re 5-185-18 and in d in FiguFig is mounted to the univ to the univ e proper s 1. Remove the radio-mounting plate by removing four screws, lock washers, and flat washers. 2. The weather-resistant enclosure is mounted to the universal mounting plate using shock mounts. Assemble the shock-mount components exactly as shown in Figure 5-18. Be sure to install ground straps between the shock-mount and the transceiver trunnion mount, and install one 7-1/2-inch ground strap between the right rear mount and the enclosure lids antenna ground plane 0 (shown in Figure 5-18 and in Figure 5-20). 3. The order of assembly is important to ensure proper shock mount operation. All components are supplied with the mounting kit. The five 7- 1/2-inch straps are used on the rear and front shock mounts four from shock mount to trunnion, and one from the shock mount to the lids antenna ground plane. prope 1/2-1/2-in NOTE: Grounding through the power-supply cable is NOT sufficient. Whether the radio transceiver is mounted to a carrier or the chassis itself, the transceiver MUST be properly grounded to the motorcycle chassis. The ground strap supplied with the installation kit may have to be used to ensure a good RF ground path from the radio transceiver to the motorcycle chassis. Install the 3-foot ground strap on one of the front shock mounts. Route it through the cable-

routing hole and connect the other end to the motorcycle frame (see Figure 5-18). 4. DO NOT connect the ground strap directly to the negative battery post.

!

!

W A R N I N G MN003109A01_aa 5-24 Motorcycle Radio Installation Transceiver, Cabling and Multiplexer Installation 5. The diagram of the shock mount is shown loosely assembled. After the hex screws are tightened, the rubber washers are compressed to fasten the weather- resistant enclosure securely to the universal mounting plate. 6. Figure 5-20 is an exploded view of the enclosure; it shows details that will help to understand how the enclosure is mounted. After the enclosure is completely mounted, check for proper ground connectioncontinuity between the antenna ground plane and the motorcycle frame. 5.11 Transceiver, Cabling and Multiplexer Installation After the weather-resistant enclosure has been installed, the radio chassis (transceiver) is installed in the enclosure and then appropriate cables are connected. However, before the transceiver can be installed, the cabling must be properly positioned in the enclosure. 5.11.1 Installing Cabling in the Enclosure Position the cabling in the weather-resistant enclosure as follows:

1. Run the speaker, power, control-head, and ignition sense cables into the enclosure. 2. Lay the excess cable length between the radio mounting bosses in an S configuration as shown in Figure 5-19. Do not coil any excess cable. Use the supplied tie wraps to bundle cable as shown. not coil not coil bebe NOTE: If the extra cable length is not sufficient to match the illustrated cable routing, then match the sufficient fici ength is not ength illustration as closely as possible. sely as possible. sely as possible. 3. Connect the speaker cable to the accessory cable connector. cable to cable to the accessory cab the accesso ncy connector hipped with a shorting ipped with a shortin plug eadset is not used. NOTE: The accessory-cable emergency connector is shipped with a shorting plug installed. The ergency connector is shipp headset connector is also shipped with a shorting plug installed. The plugs must remain in if an emergency switch and/or headset is not used. If an emergency switch and/or headset is set is not used If an emn em used, remove the shorting plug(s) and discard. and discard. and discard. Install the mounting plate in position on top of the cables installed above. Take care not to damage or pinch the cables when securing the mounting plate in position. op of the cables inst ng the mounting plat the mounting pla n top of the cables installe 4. NOTE: At this point, the control-head cable plug should be located at the forward end of the uld be locat enclosure, and the power-cable, speaker-cable, and accessory-cable plugs should be located at the rear of the enclosure. be lo and a and MN003109A01_aa Motorcycle Radio Installation Transceiver, Cabling and Multiplexer Installation 5-25 ACCESSORY CABLE HEADSET CONNECTOR ACCESSORY CABLE EMERGENCY AND EXTERNAL ALARM CONNETOR TRANSCEIVER POWER CABLE ACCESSORY CABLE HEADSET SPORTING PLUG EMERGENCY CABLE SHORTING PLUG IGNITION SENSE

(ACC) CONTROL CABLE

(CAN) CONTROL HEAD GROUND (BLACK) D D D D D D D DDDDD DDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D D r r r r r r ra raft19. Installing Cables ra ra

(RED)D)a f CONTROL HEAD CONTROL H CON POWER FUSE POWER FUS POW Figure 5-19. Installing Cables 19. Installing Cables CONTROL HEAD ROL HEAD POWER (RED) OL 5.11.2 Installing the Transceiver Install the transceiver in the weather-resistant enclosure as follows (see Figure 5-20). NOTE: For new or existing installations, use only the APX mobile trunnion (kit number: HLN7002_). Install the mounting trunnion and loose ends of the four ground straps to the radio-mounting plate, using four screws, flat washers, and external-tooth lock washers (see Figure 5-20). The ground straps must be sandwiched between the flat washers and lock washers. The lock washer must be against the trunnion. The flat washer must be under the screw head. cclosure as follo losure as e APX APX 1. 2. Attach the transceiver to the mounting trunnion and secure with the two screws provided. 3. Connect the control cable to the front of the transceiver. Ensure the control-cable connector screws are tightened. 4. Attach the accessory connector to the transceiver. Plug in the power connector. 5. Install the grommet around the cables and push the grommet into the cable-routing hole of the weather-resistant enclosure. MN003109A01_aa 5-26 Motorcycle Radio Installation Transceiver, Cabling and Multiplexer Installation 15 3 2 18 16 D D D DD DDD D D D D D DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD r rrar r r r r r raf raft raraafffff aft aft aft aft aftft aft aft aft afaft aft aftftftftftftftftftftftfttffaft afaft aft 10 13 12 14 11 6 17 4 1 2 8 9 6 7 Figure 5-20. Installing the Transceiver MN003109A01_aa Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Emergency Switch Option 5-27 Item No. Description Item No. Description Table 5-1. Transceiver Installation Parts List 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Lock washer Flat washer (8 used) Screw Screw Grommet Screw Lock catch Radio mounting plate Bottom housing 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Ground shield plane Top cover Gasket Hinge Enclosure mounts Transceiver Screw Trunnion External tooth lock washer (8 used) 5.12 Installing the Emergency Switch Option Use the two-conductor, green/black cable which has as one end terminated with two contacts (part number 3080221P02) and which is supplied with this W688 Motorcycle Emergency Push Button. Disconnect the emergency switch shorting plug from the accessory cable. Replace the shorting wire of the shorting plug with the terminated end of the green/black emergency cable. Reconnect the plug to the accessory cable. mminate inate 5.13 Installing the External Alarm Relay Option D xternal Alarm Re xternal Alarm offered with only one optio offered with only on The motorcycle radio is offered with only one optional relay connection. If both horn and lights are required, wire a second relay coil parallel to the first relay. Use the two-conductor green/black cable which has one end terminated with two contacts (part number 3080221P02) and which is supplied with this W116 Motorcycle Alarm Relay Option. Insert the contacts into positions 3 and 4 of the emergency shorting plug of the accessory cable. Refer to Figure 5-26. ay coil parallel to the ay coil parallel to the first r two contact d with two contacts (part nu ry cable. Refe 5.14 Installing the Headset Accessory essory essory ble ha ble has been made av Fig m Relay Option. Inse Relay Option. Insert the c cessory cable. Refer to raft o install, dis s been made onsulted for com nsulted for com A six-position connector on the accessory cable has been made available for connecting a headset accessory. Headset manufacturers should be consulted for compatibility with the motorcycle radio prior to purchase and installation of the headset. To install, disconnect the headset shorting plug. Remove the headset shorting wire from the headset shorting plug. Terminate the contacts provided to the applicable wires of the headset cable. Insert the terminated wires into the headset shorting plug per the contact positions illustrated in the typical headset schematic found in this manual. Reconnect the terminated headset shorting plug to the accessory cable. When upgrading from an APX mobile radio, the existing headset cable HLN6890 requires these two pins to be swapped (see Figure 5-21). The other motorcycle headset cable with this pin change already performed is called cable 3080010R04. stall shortin hor MN003109A01_aa 5-28 Motorcycle Radio Installation 20 13 26 7 Remove from Pin 1

(VI P OU T 1 ) Insert into Pin 22

(Monitor) J2, BACK OF RADIO 21 14 8 1 Rework for Handlebar HUB operation when upgrading existing cable HLN6890. SPK +

GND AUX_PTT 1 3 5

(Female-Pins) 2 4 6 SPK -

VIP OUT 1 AUX_MIC Figure 5-21. Motorcycle Wiring Harness Rework D raft MN003109A01_aa Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the O5 Control Head Sunshield 5-29 5.15 Installing the O5 Control Head Sunshield Install the sunshield (part number NNTN7279_) to the O5 control head as follows. 1. Assemble the sunshield to the remote mount trunnion as shown in Figure 5-22. The same process can be used for the motorcycle trunnion. 2. Position the sunshield as shown in Figure 5-23 and remove the Velcro adhesive backing. d as shown in d as shown in Figure 5-23 Figu DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD Figure 5-22. Remote Mount Trunnion with Sunshield e 5-22. Remote Mount Tru e 5-22. Remote Mo raft aaraftftftttft araaftftft raraft raft raraaftttt rararararara afttttttfttttttttftftftftftftftftft aftAd tttttttttt Velcro Adhesive Backing Velcro A Figure 5-23. Position the Sunshield MN003109A01_aa 5-30 Motorcycle Radio Installation 3. Slide the control head onto the trunnion while aligning the edge of the control head with the edge of the sunshield as shown in Figure 5-24. Make sure the Velcro properly adheres to the control head. 4. Position control head as desired and install screws as shown in Figure 5-25. 5-24. Slide the Co 5-24. Slide the C ead as desired and insta Figure 5-24. Slide the Control Head onto Trunnion D ead as desired andDDDD D DDDD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D rr raf r r r r r r raft ra raft raft rarararrarararararaaaraaaarafaafafaft raaffftftftffft raftftftftftftt raraaf rarafafft ra ra ra ra ra r afafaafafafafafaaftfftftftftftftfftft affftfftftfffftfttf aftfff aaftftftftftftftftftftftftftft afafftftftftftftftftftftftft afftftftftttftftftftftftftftftftftft ftftfftftftftftftfffffftffftftftftftftft ff Figure 5-25. Position Control Head as Desired MN003109A01_aa Motorcycle Radio Installation Horn/Lights Wiring 5.16 Horn/Lights Wiring 5-31 5.17 Emergency Switch Wiring WiringWiring Figure 5-26. Horn/Lights Wiring Diagram D raft Figure 5-27. Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram WiWi

!

!

W A R N I N G Motorcycle products must have pins 1 and 2 connected together to allow the radio to power down. Opening this connection by REMOVING the emergency shorting plug, or pressing the emergency switch, will turn on the radio. Failure to maintain a normally-closed path could drain the vehicle battery if left unchecked. EMERGENCY-equipped radios are capable of TRANSMITTING without warning. MN003109A01_aa 5-32 Motorcycle Radio Installation Emergency Switch Wiring D raft MN003109A01_aa Chapter 6 Finishing the Installation Cable Connection 6.1 6.1.1 O2 Control Head Perform the following if it has not been previously done:

1. Remove the control head from its mounting trunnion. Plug the radios CAN cable into the proper location on the back of the control head (see Figure 2-21 and Figure 2-23 in Chapter 2). The connectors click when snapped into place. The control head model can have the microphone plugged into the lower left corner of the control head front panel. 2. Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector coming out of the power cable. 3. Plug the VIP connector into the correct location on the back of the control head. 4. Connect the CAN cable to the proper location on the transceiver. e to the p e to the p to t to NOTE: Connector-protective covers are provided with the radio. They should be used for added tive covers are pr tive covers are D e fuseholder and the 3- or ol head and microph ol head and microphone PT older and t environmental robustness. robustness. robus Be sure the control head and microphone PTT switches are OFF. Install the 15-amp fuse in the radio power cable fuseholder and the 3- or 4-amp fuse(s) in the ignition sense cable fuseholder(s). Turn the radio ON at the control head and verify proper operation of all controls and indicators. Radio operation in some installations require turning on the ignition sense. Perform a complete operational check of the radio. adio.dio. Dress the control and power cables out of the way to prevent damage (pull any excess cable into the trunk area) securing with clamps and tie wraps where necessary. raft head and verify proper opp ol head and verify proper o tions require turning on the tions require turning on th the way t the way to p d tie wr tie w 6.1.2 O3 Control Head Perform the following if it has not been previously done:

1. Unplug the CAN coiled cable connector on the Transceiver Interface. Plug in the connector again. A click sound should be heard. Ensure location of CAN connector is correct

(i.e. J800L or J800R) on the transceiver interface. Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector of J2. 6.1.3 O5 Control Head Perform the following if it has not been previously done:

1. Remove the control head from its mounting trunnion. Plug the radio's CAN cable into the proper location on the back of the control head (see Figure 2-21 and Figure 2-23 in Chapter 2). The connectors click when snapped into place. The control head model can have the microphone plugged into the lower left corner of the control head front panel. 2. Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector coming out of the power cable. 6-2 Finishing the Installation Cable Connection 3. Plug the VIP connector into the correct location on the back of the control head. 4. Connect the CAN cable to the proper location on the transceiver. 6.1.4 O7 Control Head Perform the following if it has not been previously done:

1. Remove the control head from its mounting trunnion. Plug the radio's CAN cable into the proper location on the back of the control head (see Figure 2-21 and Figure 2-23 in Chapter 2). The connectors click when snapped into place. The control head model can have the microphone plugged into the lower left corner of the control head front panel. 2. Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector coming out of the power cable. 3. Plug the VIP connector into the correct location on the back of the control head. 4. Connect the CAN cable to the proper location on the transceiver. 6.1.5 O9 Control Head Perform the following if it has not been previously done:

been been 1. Remove the control head from its mounting trunnion. Plug the radio's CAN cable into the proper location on the back of the control head (see Figure 2-22 and Figure 2-23 in Chapter 2). The connectors click when snapped into place. The control head model can have the microphone plugged into the MMP connection on the control head back panel. D ad from its mo ad from its m e back of the contr e back of the co onnectors click when s onnectors click w one plugged into the MMP ne plugged into t 2. Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector coming out of the power m the speaker lead to the m the speaker lead to cable. 3. Plug the VIP connector into the correct location on the back of the control head. 4. Connect the CAN cable to the proper location on the transceiver. the correct lo he correct location on the cation raft roper location on the trans er location on the trans MN003109A01_aa Finishing the Installation Dust Cover Installation 6-3 6.2 Dust Cover Installation To help protect and ensure debris does not effect or damage your unused connectors, please use the provided dust covers. Refer to Figure 6-1 to determine which cover is for which connector. Table 6-1 Dust Cover Kit Number Kit Number Description KT000245A01 Dash Mount KT000246A01 Remote Mount A: 1515047C01 B: 1515048C01 C: 7575262A01 D:SL000319A01 E: 1515327H02 B A A E C D D D D D DDD D D D D D D D D D DDDD DDDDDDD D D D DDD D D D D DDDDDDDDD D D D D D D DD D D DD D D D D D D D D DD DDDDDD D DD D D D D D D D D D D D D D DD DD D D D D D D D D D D DDD DD D DD D D D D D D D D D D D DD D D D D D D DD D D D D D D D DDDDDD D D DDD DD DDD D D DDDDDDDDDDD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D DD D D D D D D D D DDDDDDDDD D D D D D D D D DDDDDDDDD DDD DDDDDDD DD DD D DD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D DDD D D D D DD DD DDD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D rrafafafafaaaaafaaaaaaaafafaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaafaaafafafaaafafaaaaaaftftftftBftftft rrarara rrararara rrar rra rrra rrarra rra rra r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r raft ra ra ra rarararrrrararrarararararrrrrr ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra ra rarrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr ra ra ra r D D C B A Control Head Control Head (Rear) D D C APX 8500 Rear (with no TIB) APX 8500 Rear (with TIB) Figure 6-1. Dust Cover Installation Locations NOTE: Parts B and E require inserting then turning approximately 1/3 turn using a coin as a tool until it contacts the stop. Part C shall be installed onto DB25 accessory cable assembly when the corresponding cable assembly connection is not in use. MN003109A01_aa 6-4 Finishing the Installation Dust Cover Installation D raft MN003109A01_aa Chapter 7 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting In this section are Motorola recommended vehicle installation practices that can address or prevent many issues, including:

7.1 Radio circuit damage due to over voltage condition Radio/Accessories "lock up"

Radio/Accessories change state/lock-up when radio PTT is depressed Radio powers up in the FL 01/90 state (general communication error code) Radio intermittently resets Radio loses secure key Transmit audio distortion on motorcycle radio when engine is running Keypad buttons become inoperative for motorcycle radios when engine is running Alternator whine present when transmitting with engine running Radio/Accessories turn themselves on/off of Ignition of Ignition and Rad D turn themselves turn themselv an Check Wiring of Ignition and Radio Ignition Sensing ent when ent when nono NOTE: Motorola Solutions recommends protecting or isolating the radios ignition sense input from If it is required to turn the radio on and off via the ignition sense switch, in addition to the control heads on/off switch, connect the ignition sense lead to the accessory terminal from the ignition switch (usually in the vehicles fuse panel under accessory or radio). rn the radio on and urn the radio on and off via t the ignitio connect the ignition sense cles fuse panel un hicles fuse panel under ac ends protecting or isol raft s protecting or atingating 0VDC. Such spikes can 40VDC. Such spikes can b lity trucks, buses and etc.) lity trucks, buses and et ble oscilloscope is ble oscilloscope is req r measure measure in shor in shor n, M of a s f a voltage spikes in excess of +/- 40VDC. Such spikes can be hundreds of volts in amplitude and are common in larger vehicles (utility trucks, buses and etc.), especially when the source is common to a solenoid coil. A triggerable oscilloscope is required to determine the existence of such spikes as most voltmeters cannot measure in short duration (< 1 msec). If the condition of the intended ignition sense source is unknown, Motorola Solutions recommends isolating the source from the radio with a relay or the use of a suppression diode wired between the source and ground. Any high current suppression diode (i.e. MR2535) with a breakdown voltage of between 18 and 40 volts will suffice. A suitable diode kit is available from Motorola Solutions parts, kit number HLN6325_. own, Moto If it is required to have the radio power up only via the control heads on/off switch, then connect the ignition sense lead directly to the positive terminal of the battery. This will mean the ignition sense will always be ignored and a re-wiring will be necessary in the future if the operator chooses any ignition sense CPS setting. 7-2 7.2 7.3 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting Check Physical Installation of Radio Ground and Radio Accessory Wiring Check Physical Installation of Radio Ground and Radio Accessory Wiring Take care to scrape away paint on the chassis at the place where the ground connection is to be made, and try to keep the ground lead as short as possible. NOTE: Some vehicles have dedicated ground points. If available, use the ground points for the radio ground connection. Verify that the A+ lead (red) is connected directly to the positive terminal of the battery and the ground lead (black) is connected to the vehicles chassis using as short of a length of wire as is practical. For vehicles that have other types of electronic equipment installed (lights, flashers, computers siren/PA and etc.), use a separate ground for the mobile radio equipment. Make sure that the mobile radio antenna is the minimum required distance (three feet) from the mobile radio equipment to prevent radio frequency interference (RFI) from interfering with the radio and/or accessories. NOTE: If multiple radios/antennas are installed, ensure that the minimum antenna separation ar requirements are met. Improve the Electrical Quality of the Power and Ignition Lines receive performance. Do not coil up any excess length of the A+ (red) lead. Doing this may cause a large transient voltage to be produced when there is a high current drain (e.g. during transmit). This could cause the radio to reset when the push-to-talk (PTT) is depressed. D cess length of th cess length of uced when there is a uced when there i o reset when the push-to-

o reset when the p For motorcycle mounted radios, make sure that the antenna ground connection is solid. An intermittent ground connection can cause the transmission to be distorted when the motorcycles engine is running. nning.g. tra Do not coil up any excessive length of antenna cable, if possible. It may affect the radios nted radios, make sure tha nted radios, make nection can cause the nection can cause length of antenna length of antenna cable, if raft he Power he Powe h poinpo c If an extra length of cable is used to extend the microphone, make sure the added o extend the microphone, m extend the microphone, capacitance does not interfere with the operation of the radio. e operation of the radio. operation of the radio Use a relay to isolate the vehicles ignition switch point (ACC) from the radios ignition sense point. Control this relay from the vehicles ignition switch point (ACC). Supply a cleaner voltage from the positive terminal of the battery into the relay, which will now be attached to the radios ignition sense point. Now the ACC line toggles the relay, instead of directly toggling the radios ignition sense line. Install a Power Line Filter between the A+ lead and the positive terminal of the battery. This is intended to filter the battery power applied to the transmitter power amplifiers. Pay extra caution to this because the series filter will introduce a negative spike when the radio transmits that may cause problems with radio operation. For vehicles that use electromechanical relays to control external devices (lights, motors, switch boxes and etc.), these relay circuits should be isolated as best as possible from the mobile radio equipment. Also, diode suppression should be used across the relay contacts to minimize the noise produced by the collapsing magnetic field. If the ignition sense switch is to be used, make sure that there is not a large voltage drop between the A+ point (usually the positive terminal of the battery) and the ignition sense point. In general, the voltage difference between these two points, should not be greater than 1.5 volts when all accessories/air-conditioner, etc. are turned on. Refer to the Basic Service Manual for specifications for minimum and maximum voltage levels. Typical battery voltage levels are 13.6V +/- 20%. MN003109A01_aa Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting Minimize the Effect of Poorly Grounded Antennas 7-3 7.4 Minimize the Effect of Poorly Grounded Antennas For vehicles with high power radios that use glass mount antennas, care must be taken to keep the radio and antenna cable as far as possible from the radiating element of the antenna. If a sufficient distance is not maintained, the glass mount antennas lack of a proper ground plane may cause the radios transmit signal to interfere with itself and cause a reset. To minimize this effect, it may be necessary to install ferrite beads on the antenna cable to protect the radio from this interference. 7.5 Jump-Start the Vehicle

!

C a u t i o n Do not jump-start vehicle with radio power or ignition sense cables connected. Damage to the radio and/or accessories may result. Jump-starting a motorcycle can crank 300+ volts through the vehicles charging system and these transients can damage electrical equipment. The state of your radio prior to needing a jump-start may be unknown, and the radio may attempt to return to its last state (radio ON), when doing a jump-start. Therefore, Motorola recommends the following steps be taken before jump-starting any vehicle containing a radio. r to needing a r to needing a dio ON), when doin dio ON), when d g en before jump-starting a en before jump-star D al equi al equ 1. Locate the ignition sense line (thin yellow wire or thin red wire, depending on dash mount or remote mount installation) and the main power leads (thick red wire) near the battery positive terminal. n sense line (thin yellow w n sense line (thin ye ation) and the main power ation) and the main he event these lines are no e event these lines raft y to physically o physically disconnect t disconnect t use whatever tools necessary to physically disconnect the ignition sense and power lines from the battery terminal. Make sure that the disconnected lines are not in the way of moving motorcycle parts or are not in the way o re not in the way interfering with the motorcycle operation in any way. n any way. n any way es ous o 2. Open up the fuse holders and remove the fuses out of the kits. 3. Re-tighten the fuse holders but without the fuses to insure that ignition sense and power lines NOTE: These lines are fused. In the event these lines are not fused (add the appropriate fuse in line) do not interfere with moving motorcycle parts. 4. Proceed with the jump-start routine as described by your vehicle owners manual. 5. Once the jump-start process is complete, re-install the fuses into their holders. 7.6 Eliminate Noise/Howling from PA Speaker 1. Refer to Section 2.1.1 for recommended methods of installation available for the mobile two-way radio, with accessories placed on or inside the vehicle. 2. Refer to Section 2.1.2 for the wiring diagrams for the recommended configurations. 3. Refer to the Siren/PA User Manual for further details on lowering the wattage. MN003109A01_aa 7-4 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting Notes D raft MN003109A01_aa Appendix A Replacement Parts Ordering A.1 Basic Ordering Information When ordering replacement parts or equipment information, the complete identification number should be included. This applies to all components, kits, and chassis. If the component part number is not known, the order should include the number of the chassis or kit of which it is a part, and sufficient description of the desired component to identify it. The ASTRO APX Mobile Radio Basic Service Manual includes complete parts lists and part numbers. Refer to Table of Content for applicable manual numbers. A.2 Motorola Online Service and Support For general support, users can access http://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/support.html http://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/contact-us.html http://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/products/two-way-radios/project-25-radios/mobile-

s.cs.c tions.com/

tions

.com/

solutions.com/en_ solutions.com/e radios/apx8500.html tml tml Website: https://bus Website: https://bu inesson Motorola Online Website: https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com/

D r To register for online access:

Domestic customers: please call 800-814-0601 (U.S. and Canada). International customers: please go to https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com/ and click on Sign Up Now. A-2 Replacement Parts Ordering Accessories Aftermarket Division (AAD) ECAT D ectronic cata ectron raft r you have As a registered user, you have access to the electronic catalogue for purchasing accessories and radios. cess to the el ss to t A.3 Accessories Aftermarket Division (AAD) ion (AAD) on (AAD The Accessories Aftermarket Division is able to provide Motorola Solutions Branded accessories for all your radio needs. Contact Motorola Solutions after you have a KIT number, identified from the Motorola Online website and/or the ECAT catalog. You can contact them at: 800-422-4210. ovide Motorola S vide Motorola S u ha can co an c MN003109A01_aa Index Index A accessories connector assembly ....................................... 4-1, 4-9 assembly ......................................................... 4-10 disassembly ....................................................... 4-9 exploded view .................................................. 4-10 connector pins ....................................................... 4-8 headset ........................................................ 5-2, 5-27 installing dash mount ........................................................ 4-1 horn relay ........................................................... 4-3 light relay ........................................................... 4-3 remote mount .................................................... 4-9 antenna ..................................................................... 5-5 cable, see Cables, antenna installing .....................................................2-32, 5-21 motorcycle ............................................................. 5-2 mounting ............................................................. 2-32 site ....................................................................... 2-32

................. 2-3

................. 2-

........ ...... ...... ..... ..... ..... D B base stations ........................................................... 1-11

..................... 1-11

..................... 1-11 black lead ..............................................2-30, 5-22, 5-27 2-30, 5-22, 5-27

-30, 5-22, 5-27 D dash mount accessories installations ....................................... 4-1 configuration ......................................................... 1-6 installation examples ............................................. 2-2 radio dimensions ..............................1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 1-4 trunnion ............................................................... 2-19 E emergency footswitch ............................................... 4-1 emergency pushbutton ............................................. 4-1 emergency switch installing .............................................................. 5-27 wiring ................................................................... 5-31 external alarm installing .............................................................. 5-27 see also Horn relay or Light relay F footswitch, emergency .............................................. 4-1 H H horn relay .........................................4-2, 4-3, 5-27, 5-31 horn re raft I II ignition ignition ignition installation installation installati cable ..................................................................... 4-9 cable ................. cable ................ wire ..................................................................... 5-22 wire ....................... wire ..................... wire, for motorcycle ............................................... 5-2 e, for motorcycl wire, for motorcycle examples ............................................................... 2-2 examples .... examples ......... important hints ...................................................... 5-4 portant hints order of .................................................................. 5-5 tant h r of .... of . C cables ................................................5-3, 5-4, 5-5, 5-24 5-2424 accessory .....................................4-1, 4-2, 5-22, 5-27 77 antenna ............................................................... 2-18 battery ................................................................... 4-9 connection ...................................................... 6-1, 7-1 diagrams ...........................................2-22, 5-21, 5-25 emergency .......................................................... 5-27 excess ................................................................. 5-24 ignition ................................................................... 4-9 microphone ..................................................5-2, 5-12 motorcycle control head ...............5-1, 5-9, 5-11, 5-22 motorcycle control head, installing ...................... 5-21 motorcycle transceiver ........................................ 5-24 power .........................................................2-30, 5-22 remote mount ...................................................... 2-21 routing ................................................................. 5-22 speaker ...............................................5-2, 5-14, 5-21 configurations dash mount ........................................................... 1-6 motorcycle ........................................................... 1-11 multi control ......................................................... 1-11 remote mount ........................................................ 1-8 control head ..............................................2-26, 4-6, 4-8 cabling ................................................................. 2-21 diagrams ....................................................2-22, 2-23 multi ..................................................................... 1-11 remote mount ........................................................ 1-8 control stations ........................................................ 1-11 J J2 ....................................................................... 4-7, 4-8 L leads black .................................................. 2-30, 5-22, 5-27 light relay .........................................4-2, 4-3, 5-27, 5-31 locking kit, installing ................................................ 2-29 M microphone ........................................................ 5-2, 5-4 hang-up clip, installing ........................................ 5-14 hang-up clip, standard ................. 2-38, 5-5, 5-9, 5-11 mounting ............................................................... 5-4 motorcycle antenna ................................................................. 5-2 configuration ........................................................1-11 control head cable ................................................. 5-1 S speaker ..................................................................... 5-5 cable, see Cables, speaker external ................................................................. 5-2 fuel tank console installation ............... 5-9, 5-10, 5-12 handlebar installation .......................... 5-8, 5-11, 5-12 installing ................................................ 5-7, 5-9, 5-14 mounting ............................................................. 2-35 T trunnion ................................................................... 2-22 bracket for speaker ............................................. 2-35 dash mount ......................................................... 2-19 diagrams ............................................................. 2-22 locking kit ............................................................ 2-29 motorcycle installation ......................................... 5-25 mounting bracket ................................................ 2-19 remote mount ............................................... 1-8, 2-21 transmission hump mounting .............................. 2-20 Index-2 display unit ............................................................ 5-1 external speaker .................................................... 5-2 headset ................................................................. 5-2 ignition wire ........................................................... 5-2 installation ............................................................. 5-3 antenna ............................................................ 5-21 cables .............................................................. 5-21 cabling ............................................................. 5-24 control head ....................................................... 5-7 emergency switch ...................................5-27, 5-31 external alarm .................................................. 5-27 fuel tank console ..............................5-9, 5-10, 5-12 handlebar .................................................. 5-8, 5-11 headset ............................................................ 5-27 horn/lights wiring .............................................. 5-31 microphone hang-up clip ................................. 5-14 speaker ..................................................... 5-7, 5-14 transceiver ..............................................5-24, 5-26 universal mounting plate .................................... 5-6 weather-resistant enclosure ............................. 5-23 microphone ........................................................... 5-2 transceiver ............................................................. 5-1 mounting configurations .......................................... 2-18 dash ............................................................. 1-6, 2-19

......... 1-6, 2-

......... 1-6, 2-

motorcycle ........................................................... 1-11

..................... 1-1

..................... 1-11 multi control ......................................................... 1-11

........................ 1-11

........................ 1-1 remote .......................................................... 1-8, 2-21

.................... 1-8, 2-2

.................... 1-8, 2-21 mounting plate, universal ............................5-1, 5-3, 5-5

...... .........5-1, 5-3, 5-5

.....5-1, 5-3, 5 installing ................................................................ 5-6

....................... 5-6

....................... 5-6

....... ..... .... ........... mounting, antenna restrictions ........................................................... 2-32

............. 2-32

.... 2-3 roof top ................................................................ 2-32

......... 2-32

....... trunk lid ................................................................ 2-32

..... 2-32

..... 2-32 multi control configuration ........................................................ 1-11

-1111 D U universal mounting plate ............................. 5-1, 5-3, 5-5 installing ................................................................ 5-6 V VV VIP VIPVIP raft connector ....................................................... 4-2, 6-2 connector .... onne input connections .................................................. 4-8 input connections input connection output connections ................................................ 4-7 output connections output connection O ordering replacement parts .......................................A-1 W WW wiring diagrams ........................................................ 2-3 g diagrams agra P parts, ordering replacement ......................................A-1 pin SW B+ .....................................................4-3, 4-7, 4-8 VIP in ..................................................................... 4-8 VIP out ............................................................ 4-3, 4-7 pushbutton, emergency ............................................ 4-1 R relays horn ..............................................4-2, 4-3, 5-27, 5-31 light ...............................................4-2, 4-3, 5-27, 5-31 remote mount accessory installations .......................................... 4-9 cabling ................................................................. 2-21 configuration .......................................................... 1-8 control cable installation ...................................... 2-26 installation examples ............................................. 2-2 trunnion ............................................................... 2-21 replacement parts, ordering ......................................A-1 MN003109A01 Glossary Glossary This glossary contains an alphabetical listing of terms and their definitions that are applicable to the ASTRO radio. Term band CPS Customer Programming Software default D.E.K digital FCC firmware frequency GLONASS GNSS Definition Frequencies allowed for a specific purpose. See Customer Programming Software. Software with a graphical user interface containing the feature set of an ASTRO radio. or ned set ned se D bols from a finite set; mo bols from a finite s ented using electronic ented using electr mmunications Commiss mmunications Co raft A pre-defined set of parameters. ct Entry Keyboard ct Entry Keyboa Direct Entry Keyboard. efers to data that is stor efers to data that Refers to data that is stored or transmitted as a sequence of discrete symbols from a finite set; most commonly this means binary data represented using electronic or electromagnetic signals. Federal Communications Commission. an embedded proces by an embedded proces Code executed by an embedded processor such as the Host or DSP in

. This type of code This type of code is typs ty a subscriber radio. This type of code is typically resident in non-volatile is more difficult to cha is more difficult to ch memory and as such is more difficult to change than code executed from RAM. e electrom Number of times a complete electromagnetic-wave cycle occurs in a fixed unit of time (usually one second). GLObalnaya NAvigatsionnaya Sputnikovaya Sistema: The Russian Global Navigation satellite system, consisting of at least 24 operational satellites which fly in medium Earth orbit at an altitude of approximately 19,130 km. Each satellite circles the Earth slightly faster than twice a day. GLONASS provides Time and Location to anywhere on Earth, where there is an unobstructed line of sight to four or more GPS satellites. A GLONASS receiver triangulates its position using these satellites. Global Navigation Satellite System: Standard generic term for satellite navigation systems that provide geo-spatial positioning with global coverage. This term includes GPS, GLONASS, Galileo, Beidou and other regional systems. GNSS is a term used worldwide The advantage to having access to multiple satellites is accuracy, redundancy and availability at all times. ectr secoeco Glossary-2 Term GPS kHz kilohertz MCU MHz Megahertz microcontroller unit PA paging PTT Publication Manual Revision Push-to-Talk radio frequency receiver registers RESET RF RX Definition lion cycles per s lion cycles pe ritten as C. A mic nts, as well as communi nts, as well as com written as C. A micropro D Global Positioning System: U.S.A.s Satellite based radio navigation system developed by the U.S. Department of Defense and operated by the U.S. Air Force, which consists of at least 24 operational satellites which fly in medium Earth orbit at an altitude of approximately 20,180 km. Each satellite circles the Earth twice a day. GPS provides Time and Location to anywhere on Earth, where there is an unobstructed line of sight to four or more GPS satellites. A GPS receiver triangulates its position using these satellites. See kilohertz. One thousand cycles per second. Used especially as a radio-frequency unit. See microcontroller unit. ertz.ertz. See Megahertz. One million cycles per second. Used especially as a radio-frequency unit. Also written as C. A microprocessor that contains RAM and ROM components, as well as communications and programming components rals. and peripherals. Power amplifier. One-way communication that alerts the receiver to retrieve a message. See Push-to-Talk. raft A publication that provides supplemental information for its parent publication before it is revised and reissued. The switch or button that causes the radio to transmit when pressed. When the PTT switch or button is released, the unit returns to standby or receive operation. The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum between audio sound and infrared light (approximately 10 kHz to 10 GHz). Electronic device that amplifies RF signals. A receiver separates the audio signal from the RF carrier, amplifies it, and converts it back to the original sound waves. Short-term data-storage circuits within the microcontroller unit or programmable logic IC. Reset line: an input to the microcontroller that restarts execution. See radio frequency. Receive. ation that alerts the rece ation that alerts the rec emen nd reis d re pplemental MN003109A01_aa Glossary-3 Definition the the An electrically transmitted electromagnetic wave. Computer programs, procedures, rules, documentation, and data pertaining to the operation of a system. A timer that limits the length of a transmission. See time-out timer. Transmitter-receiver. A device that both transmits and receives analog or digital signals. Also abbreviated as XCVR. Electronic equipment that generates and amplifies an RF carrier signal, modulates the signal, and then radiates it into space. A method of determining the relative positions of points in space by measuring the distances, and sometimes angles, between those points and other reference points whose positions are known. Triangulation involves the use of trigonometry. It is commonly used in the navigation of vehicles, aircraft and boats, and is the method used in the Global Positioning System, in which the reference points are satellites. Transmit. mit.mit. Ultra-High Frequency. Frequency. An external bus standard that supports data transfer rates of 12 Mbps. andard that supports See Universal Serial Bus. ial Bus. al Bus. Very-High Frequency. Geographic Coordinates of a specific location. It can also be an Intermediate point on a route or line of travel. Wireless Data Transmission protocol 802.11. See transceiver. raft r referen r referen es the use of t es the use of ehicles, aircraft ehicles, aircraft and ositioning System, in wh ositioning System D s standard that suppor pecif or line r lin a specific l eque Term signal software time-out timer TOT transceiver transmitter Triangulation TX UHF Universal Serial Bus USB VHF Waypoint Wi-Fi XCVR MN003109A01_aa Glossary-4 D raft MN003109A01_aa D raft

Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 East Algonquin Road Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 U.S.A. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2016 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Oct 2016

*MN003109A01*

MN003109A01_AA

 

 

Draft Draft Contents Computer Software Copyrights....14 Declaration of Conformity......................... 8 Documentation Copyrights...........15 Important Safety Information........10 Disclaimer.......................................16 Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada)........................11 Software Version........................................... 11 Consignes de scurit importantes.................................12 Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC et Industrie Canada).......................13 Version logicielle............................................13 Getting Started...............................17 How to Use This Guide..................................17 Notations Used in This Manual......................17 Additional Performance Enhancement.......... 17 ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data.................18 Dynamic System Resilience (DSR).... 18 CrossTalk Prevention..........................18 Encrypted Integrated Data (EID).........18 SecureNet...........................................18 P25 Digital Vehicular Repeater System (DVRS)............................. 18 Conventional Talkgroup and Radio Scan Enhancements......................18 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You.............................................19 English C o n t e n t s 1 Draft Preparing Your Radio for Use.......20 Turning On the Radio.................................... 20 Adjusting the Volume.....................................21 Validating Compatibility During Power Up.....21 Identifying Radio Controls............ 22 Radio Parts and Controls.............................. 22 Control Head and Microphone............22 Programmable Features................................23 Assignable Radio Functions............... 23 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions....................................... 26 Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions.....26 Menu Select Buttons...........................27 Advance Programmable Buttons........ 27 Home Button.......................................28 4-Way Navigation Button.................... 28 Data Feature Button........................... 28 Volume Knob...................................... 29 Using the Mode Knob......................... 29 Keypad.......................................................... 29 Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode..............................................29 Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode..............................................30 Keypad Characters Numeric Mode..............................................32 Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode..............................................33 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button............................34 Identifying Status Indicators.........35 Status Icons...................................................35 Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators.....38 TMS Status Icons................................38 TMS Menu Options.............................39 LED Indicator.................................................40 Intelligent Lighting Indicators ........................ 41 Alert Tones.................................................... 43 General Radio Operation...............46 Selecting a Zone............................................46 Selecting a Radio Channel............................ 46 Selecting a Channel via Channel Search Button....................................................... 47 Mode Select Feature..................................... 47 s t n e t n o C 2 English Draft Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Softkey...........................................48 Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Button............................................ 48 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call... 49 Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call................................49 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call (Trunking Only)...........50 Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call (Trunking Only).....50 Methods to Make a Radio Call.......................51 Making a Talkgroup Call..................... 51 Making a Private Call (Trunking Only).............................................. 52 Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only).............................................. 53 Switching Between Repeater or Direct Operation Button...................................... 54 Monitor Feature............................................. 54 Monitoring a Channel..........................54 Monitoring Conventional Mode........... 55 Advanced Features........................56 Advanced Call Features................................ 56 Calling a Phone Not in the List............56 Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only)........................ 56 Talkgroup Call Feature

(Conventional Operation Only)...... 57 Sending a Status Call......................... 58 Responding to the Dynamic C o n t e n t s Regrouping Feature (Trunking Only).............................................. 59 Dynamic Zone Programming (DZP)....60 Multiple Control Head Features.....................62 Setting the ID of the Initial Control Head.............................................. 62 All Active Mode................................... 63 Activating and Deactivating Intercom in All Active Mode........... 63 One Active Mode................................ 64 Contacts........................................................ 65 Making a Private Call from Contacts...66 Adding a New Contact Entry...............67 Deleting a Contact Entry.....................67 Adding a Contact to a Call List............68 Methods of Contact Editing in a Call List.......................................... 68 Scan Lists...................................................... 70 Viewing a Scan List.............................70 Editing the Scan List........................... 70 3 English Draft Changing the Scan List Status............71 Viewing and Changing the Priority Status.............................................72 Scan.............................................................. 72 Turning Scan On or Off.......................72 Turning Scan On While Disregarding the Squelch Code

(Conventional Channels Only).......73 Transmitting While the Scan is On......73 Deleting a Nuisance Channel............. 73 Restoring a Nuisance Channel........... 74 Changing Priorities Status While Scan is On..................................... 74 Restoring Priorities in a Scan List.......74 Using the Hang Up Box (HUB)........... 75 Call Alert Paging............................................75 Receiving a Call Alert Page................ 75 Sending a Call Alert Page...................76 Enabling and Disabling In-Call User Alert.......................................77 Quick Call II (ASTRO P25 Digital Trunking and Conventional)..................... 78 Initiating a Quick Call II Transmission................................. 78 Emergency Operation....................................78 Sending an Emergency Alarm............ 79 Sending an Emergency Call

(Trunking Only).............................. 79 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call............................. 80 Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm.... 80 Special Considerations for Emergencies..................................81 Automatic Registration Service (ARS)...........81 Selecting or Changing the ARS Mode..............................................82 User Login Feature............................. 83 Text Messaging Service (TMS)..................... 85 Accessing the Messaging Features....85 Composing and Sending a New Text Message................................ 86 Sending a Quick Text Message..........87 Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message................. 88 Secure Operations.........................................95 Enabling Secure Transmission........... 95 Accessing the Secure Feature............96 Managing Encryption.......................... 96 Global Positioning System / Global Navigation Satellite System....................101 GPS Operation................................. 101 GPS Performance Enhancement......102 s t n e t n o C 4 English Draft The Outdoor Location Feature

(Using GPS).................................102 Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature........................................ 103 Turning Off GPS............................... 103 Saving a Waypoint............................104 Viewing a Saved Waypoint............... 105 Editing the Alias of a Waypoint......... 105 Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint......................................106 Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint....107 Deleting All Saved Waypoints...........108 Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint.. 108 Location Feature in Emergency Mode............................................109 Peer-Location on the Display

(ASTRO Conventional only)........ 109 Geofence (ASTRO 25 Trunking System).... 110 Entering the Geofence Area............. 111 Mission Critical Geofence................. 112 Entering Mission Critical Geofence...112 Exiting Mission Critical Geofence..... 112 Trunking System Controls........................... 113 Operating in Failsoft System.............113 Out-of-Range Radio..........................113 SmartZone........................................ 113 Site Trunking Feature....................... 114 Locking and Unlocking a Site............114 Site Display and Search Button........ 114 Trunked Announcement....................115 Ignition Switch Options................................ 116 Blank.................................................116 Tx Inhibit........................................... 116 PTT Tx Inhibit....................................116 Required........................................... 116 Soft Power Off.................................. 117 Ignition Only Power Up..................... 117 Using Emergency Power Up.............117 Auto Power Off Timer....................... 118 Voice Announcement.................................. 118 Site Selectable Alerts (ASTRO 25)..............119 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site...............................................120 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site Via Manual Entry.................. 121 Sending SSA Notification to All Sites.............................................121 Sending SSA Notification to All Available Sites............................. 122 Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site....................................123 Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site Via Manual Entry....... 123 C o n t e n t s 5 English Draft Stopping SSA Notification of All Sites.............................................124 Stopping SSA Notification of All Available Sites............................. 125 Channel Change on Off Hook on All Channels................................................ 125 Low Voltage Threshold Warning..................126 Wi-Fi............................................................ 127 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off.....................127 Checking the Wi-Fi Configuration and Status of the Radio............... 128 Utilities......................................................... 129 Viewing Recent Calls........................129 Selecting the Power Level................ 129 Selecting a Radio Profile...................130 Controlling the Display Backlight...... 131 Turning the Keypad Tones On or Off................................................ 131 Turning Voice Mute On or Off...........132 Using the Time-Out Timer.................132 Using Conventional Squelch Operation Features......................132 Using the PL Defeat Feature............ 133 Digital PTT ID Support......................134 Smart PTT Feature (Conventional Only)............................................ 134 Transmit Inhibit................................. 135 General Radio Information................136 External Alarms (Horn and Lights)....139 Helpful Tips.................................. 142 Radio Care.................................................. 142 Cleaning the External Surface of the Radio..................................... 142 Cleaning the External Plastic Surface........................................ 142 Accessories..................................144 Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range..................... 145 Special Channel Assignments.....................145 Emergency Channel......................... 145 Non-Commercial Call Channel......... 145 Operating Frequency Requirements............145 Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies............148 Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources............................148 s t n e t n o C 6 English Draft Glossary........................................149 Limited Warranty..........................155 MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS........................................... 155 I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:......................... 155 II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:....................... 156 III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:............................157 IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:.157 V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:..................................................157 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:........................................ 158 VII. GOVERNING LAW:.............................. 159 VIII. For Australia Only................................ 159 SERVICE.....................................................160 C o n t e n t s 7 English Draft Declaration of Conformity This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below. Declaration of Conformity Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc. Address: 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that the product:

Model Name: APX Mobile conforms to the following regulations:

FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a) y t i f m r o n o C f o n o i t a r a c e D l 8 English Draft Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1 This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help. D e c a r a l t i o n o f C o n f o r m i t y 9 English Draft Important Safety Information RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios ATTENTION!

This radio is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. For a list of Motorola Solutions-approved antennas and other accessories, visit the following website:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/APX Any modification to this device, not expressly authorized by Motorola Solutions, may void the users authority to operate this device. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. This radio transmitter has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with Motorola Solutions-approved antenna with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Note:

Setting up the radio as an RF Modem takes complete control of the radio. In this mode, the radio no longer responds to button and PTT presses nor will it unmute to voice activity. This mode is designed to receive and pass specifically formatted over the air data to a tethered computer with RF modem enabled applications. This mode can only be exit by reprogramming the radio with Customer Programming Software (CPS) to not operate in RF modem mode and cycling power. n o i t a m r o n f I y t e f a S t n a t r o p m I 10 English Draft Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Industry Canada's license-exempt RSS's per the following conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by Motorola, could void the authority of the user to operate this equipment. Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the software version R15.00.00 or later. See Accessing the Radio Information on page 137 to determine the software version of your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the features supported. N o t i c e t o U s e r s

(

F C C a n d I n d u s t r y C a n a d a

) 11 English Draft les autres utilisateurs, le type et le gain de l'antenne doivent tre choisis de faon ce que la puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente (P.I.R.E.) ne soit pas plus forte qu'il ne le faut pour tablir la communication. Cet metteur radio a t approuv par Industrie Canada pour utilisation avec une antenne approuve par Motorola offrant le gain maximal autoris et l'impdance requise pour le type d'antenne indiqu. Il est strictement interdit d'utiliser avec cet appareil tout type d'antenne ne figurant pas dans cette liste et prsentant un gain suprieur au maximum indiqu pour le type. Consignes de scurit importantes Radios bidirectionnelles mobiles : exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit ATTENTION!

Cette radio ne doit tre utilise qu' des fins professionnelles. Avant d'utiliser la radio, lisez le guide Radios bidirectionnelles mobiles : exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit, qui contient d'importantes instructions de fonctionnement pour une utilisation scuritaire et des informations sur l'exposition aux frquences radiolectriques, dans le but dassurer votre conformit aux normes et rglements en vigueur. Visitez le site Web suivant pour obtenir la liste des antennes et des autres accessoires approuvs par Motorola :

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/APX Selon la rglementation d'Industrie Canada, cet metteur radio ne peut tre utilis qu'avec une antenne dont le type et le gain maximal (ou minimal) sont approuvs par Industrie Canada pour cet metteur. Afin de limiter les interfrences radio pour s e t n a t r o p m i t i r u c s e d s e n g s n o C i 12 Franais

(Canada) Draft Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC et Industrie Canada) Cet appareil est conforme la partie 15 des rgles de la FCC et d'Industrie Canada permis exempts RSS de par la conditions suivantes:

Ce dispositif ne doit pas causer d'interfrences nuisibles. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences qui peuvent perturber le fonctionnement. Les changements ou les modifications apportes ce dispositif, non expressment approuves par Motorola, peuvent annuler le droit de l'utilisateur utiliser cet quipement. Version logicielle Toutes les fonctions dcrites dans les sections suivantes sont prises en charge par la version R15.00.00 ou les versions ultrieures du logiciel de la radio. Pour obtenir davantage de renseignements propos des fonctions prises en charge, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. A v s i a u x u t i l i s a t e u r s

(

F C C e t I n d u s t r i e C a n a d a

) 13 Franais

(Canada) Draft Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-

exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. s t h g i r y p o C e r a w t f o S r e t u p m o C 14 English Draft Documentation Copyrights No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola. D o c u m e n t a t i o n C o p y r i g h t s 15 English Draft Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability, function, or design. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights, nor the rights of others. i r e m a c s D i l 16 English Draft Getting Started How to Use This Guide This User Guide covers the basic operation of the APX Mobiles. However, your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Notations Used in This Manual Throughout the text in this publication, you will notice the use of Warning, Caution, and Note. These notations are used to emphasize that safety hazards exist, and the care that must be taken or observed. Warning:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which may result in injury or death if not carefully observed. Caution:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which may result in G e t t i n g S a r t t e d damage to the equipment if not carefully observed. Note:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which is essential to emphasize. The following special notations identify certain items. Example Description Home button or PHONE Buttons and keys are shown in bold print or as an icon. Menu entries are shown similar to the way they appear on the display of the radio. This means Press the right side of the 4-Way Navigation Button. Additional Performance Enhancement The following performance enhancements are some of the latest creations designed to enhance the security, quality and efficiency of the radios. 17 English Draft ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data Encrypted Integrated Data (EID) ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data is optimized to handle different message sizes and variable update rates from different applications of the radio. Add Enhanced Data to the Integrated Data system with a software installation to improve data channel efficiency and enable denser network traffic. Dynamic System Resilience (DSR) DSR ensures the radio system is seamlessly switched to a backup master site dynamically in case of system failure. DSR also provides additional indication e.g. failure detection, fault recovery, and redundancy within the system to address to the user in need. Mechanisms related to the Integrated Voice and Data (IV&D) or data centric are all supported by DSR. CrossTalk Prevention This feature prevents crosstalk scenarios from happening, especially when a wideband antenna is used. This feature allows the adjustment of the internal SSI clock rate of the radio. This subsequently reduces the possibility of radio frequency interfering spurs and prevents the issues of crosstalk. EID provides security encryption and authentication of IV&D data bearer service communication between the radio and the Customer Enterprise Network. SecureNet SecureNet allows user to perform secured communications on an Analog or Motorola Data Communication (MDC) channel. The MDC Over-the-

Air Rekeying (OTAR) feature will allow users to perform OTAR activities on an MDC channel. P25 Digital Vehicular Repeater System (DVRS) Motorola Solutions offers an MSI Certified APX compatible, 3rd Party, P25 Digital Vehicular Repeater System (DVRS) that provides low cost portable radio coverage in areas where only mobile radio coverage is available and portable radio coverage is either intermittent or non-existent. Conventional Talkgroup and Radio Scan Enhancements A few enhancements have been made to the Conventional Talkgroup at the system. These enhancements improve the Scan feature operation significantly when multiple agencies are using a d e t r a t S g n i t t e G 18 English Draft G e t t i n g S a r t t e d single conventional radio frequency channel. These enhancements allow users to use Selective Squelch to operate on only the subset of talkgroups that are relevant to the users rather than all talkgroups on the channel. These Scan improvements have been made to eliminate the audio holes that were present and to turn on the busy LED when activity is present on the channel. Mixed Vote Scan and Standard Conventional Scan configurations are supported. Priority Operation is also supported. Up to 30 different talkgroups can be supported using conventional channels. A maximum of four talkgroups can be supported when Vote Scan channels are being used. Smart PTT is supported with this enhancement as Smart PTT prevents users from transmitting while other users are on the channel. Note:

User Selectable Talkgroups are not compatible with this Conventional Talkgroup Enhancement. What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You Check with your dealer or system administrator, if the radio is to be operated in extremely cold temperatures

(less than -30 C or more than +60 C), for the correct radio settings to ensure proper operation. You can consult your dealer or system administrator about the following:

Is your radio programmed with any preset conventional channels?

Which buttons have been programmed to access other features?

What optional accessories may suit your needs?

Note:

Specifications may vary for different radio models. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 19 English Draft Preparing Your Radio for Use This section provides simple instructions to prepare your radio for use. Turning On the Radio 1 Press the Power On/Off Button briefly to power on the radio. e s U r o f i o d a R After a short time, the red, yellow and green LEDs light up. The display then shows Zone and channel text, and menu items display on the screen. The backlight turns on to the last selected dim level. r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 20 English Note:

Pressing the Power On/Off Button before the LED lights up will be ignored. If FAIL ##/## appears in the display, the radio will not function until the condition has been corrected. If ERROR ##/## appears, some non-critical data has been changed. If either of these displays appear, if the display goes blank, or if the unit appears to be locked up, see Helpful Tips on page 142 for more information. If CH MISMATCH appears, means that either the Control Head has been connected to an incompatible transceiver, or vice versa. If your radio does not power up, contact your dealer. 2 To turn off the radio, press the Power On/Off Button after the LEDs light up. Note:

The duration that user must press and hold the Power On/Off Button to turn off the ADraft radio is programmable by a qualified radio technician. Adjusting the Volume 1 To increase the volume, rotate the Volume Knob clockwise. 2 To decrease the volume, rotate this knob counterclockwise. Validating Compatibility During Power Up The radio validates and updates the software and hardware of your control head(s) during power up. During validation, the display shows MAINTENANCE MODE REMOTE DEVICE; promptly followed by other maintenance statuses. Press the Power On/Off Button to reset when the display shows UPDATE DONE PLEASE RESET upon completion, or when the display shows UPDATE FAILED PLEASE RESET when it fails to update. If the software updates are complete, the radio runs the usual power up operation. If the updates are incomplete, the radio runs the Maintenance Mode and the display shows MAINTENANCE MODE REMOTE DEVICE; promptly followed by other maintenance statuses again. Note:

If SW INCOMPLETE appears, use Flashport Recovery Tool to update the control heads before you power on the radio again. P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o i f o r U s e 21 English ADraft Identifying Radio Controls Radio Parts and Controls Control Head and Microphone l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 22 English Note:

The microphone is not part of a radio. It is an optional accessory. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Accessory Port (Microphone) Menu Select Button[1]

Menu Entries LED Indicators Navigation Button Accy 2-Dot Button[1]

Accy 1-Dot Button[1]

16810121314151611972345171820212219Draft 8 Accy No-Dot Button (Purple)[1]

Push-to-Talk (PTT) Button 9 10 Orange Button[1]

11 Mode Knob 12 13 Indicators Power On/Off Button 14 Home Button 15 Dim Button Volume Knob 16 17 Data Feature Button[1]

18 Home Button (Microphone) 19 Keypad Buttons 20 Okay/Select Button (

) 21 Cancel Button (X) 22 Navigation Button (Microphone) Programmable Features Any reference in this manual to controls that are preprogrammed means that a qualified radio technician must use the radio programming software to assign a feature to a control. Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions or preset channels/

groups depending on the duration of a button press:

Press Pressing and releasing rapidly. Long press Pressing and holding for the preprogrammed duration (between 0.25 seconds and 3.75 seconds). Hold down Keeping the button pressed. Assignable Radio Functions Call Alert Allows the radio to function like a pager, or to verify if a radio is active on the system. I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 1 These radio controls/buttons are programmable. 23 English Draft Call Response Allows you to answer a private call or phone call. Internet Protocol Address Channel Contacts Dynamic ID

(Conventional Only) Dynamic Priority

(Conventional Only) Emergency Information Intercom Selects a channel. Selects the Contacts menu. Allows you to edit the ASTRO Individual ID and/or MDC Primary ID of the radio. Allows any channel in a Scan List (except for the Priority-One channel) to temporarily replace the Priority-Two channel. Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency alarm or call. Displays the information of the radio. Enables users of multiple control heads to talk to each other via the control heads in a multi-control head setup. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 24 English Location Display the Internet Protocol

(IP) address, device name and status of the radio. Determines the current location

(latitude, longitude, time and date), and also the distance and bearing to another location. Or, turns the GPS functionality on or off for all locations. Message Enters the current message list. Monitor

(Conventional Only) Multiple Private Line

(Conventional Only) Nuisance Delete Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until function is disabled. Selects the Multiple Private Line lists. Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for priority channels or the designated transmit channel from the scan list. Draft Launches a specific feature with one single button-press. You can setup as many as four separately programmed buttons for four different features. Allows you to make and receive calls similar to standard phone calls. Allows a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. Allows easy access to a set of preprogrammed visual and audio settings of the radio. Allows easy access to the list of calls recently received or made. Notifies the dispatcher you want a new encryption key. Allows user to manually send a repeater access codeword. Phone Private Call

(Trunking Only) Radio Profiles Recent Calls Rekey Request Repeater Access Button (RAB)

(Conventional Only) Reprogram Request

(Trunking Only) Request-To-Talk

(Conventional Only) Notifies the dispatcher you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Notifies the dispatcher you want to send a voice call. Scan Toggles scan on or off. Scan List Programming Secure/Clear Selective Call

(Conventional Only) Siren Site Display/

Search (Trunking Only) Selects the scan list for editing

(by long press on the Scan button). Toggles secure transmission on or off. Calls an assigned radio. Turns different Siren Tones on or off. Displays the current site ID and RSSI value; performs site search for Automatic Multiple Site Select (AMSS) or SmartZone operation. I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 25 English Draft Locks onto a specific site. Assignable Settings or Utility Functions Site Lock/Unlock

(Trunking Only) Status (Astro 25 Trunking Only) Sends data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Talkaround/Direct

(Conventional Only) Toggles between using a repeater and communicating directly with another radio. Talkgroup

(Conventional Only) Allows a call from an individual radio to a group of radios. Text Messaging Service (TMS) Selects the text messaging menu. TMS Quick Text Selects a predefined message. User Zone Down Zone Select Zone Up Automatically registers with the server. Toggles downward through the zones in the radio. Allows selection from a list of zones. Toggles upward through the zones in the radio. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 26 English Dim Front/Rear Horns/Lights Keypad Lock Low Power Voice Announcement Changes the display brightness. Switches one of two control heads to be active at one time. Toggles horns and lights feature on or off. Toggles the keypad lock on or off. Toggles transmit power level between high and low. Audibly indicates the current feature mode, Zone or Channel the user has just assigned. Voice Mute Toggles voice mute on or off. Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions You can access various radio functions through one of the following methods. Draft Advance Programmable Buttons This feature is to help you to shorten the process of applying certain common features. A short or long press of the relevant programmable buttons. Use the Menu Select Button (

). Menu Select Buttons Note:

Check with your dealer or system administrator for the list of features activated in your radio. to access the menu Use the Menu Select button entry of your radio feature. Your radio may be preprogrammed differently from the following example, but the steps for selecting a channel may appear as shown below:

Press the Menu Select button (

CHAN.

) directly below I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l A Orange Button[2]

B Menu Select Buttons[2]

27 English ACBADEDraft C Accy No-Dot Button (Purple)[2]

D Accy 1-Dot Button[2]

Accy 2-Dot Button[2]

E

(Quick Access) One Touch Button Enters a menu with a short press on the preprogrammed One Touch button. Features assigned to these buttons are Call, Call Alert, Phone, Repeater Access, MDC RTT Button Access, Status and Message. Home Button button returns you to the Home Pressing the

(default) screen. In most cases, this is the current mode. For selected radio features, the also used to save user-edited radio settings or information before returning you to the Home screen. button is Note:

Some features do not require you to press to go to the Home screen. Refer to the individual feature sections in this manual for further details on saving user-edited radio settings or information. button also can revert to home channel from The any other zone and mode in the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 4-Way Navigation Button Use the 4-Way Navigation Button to scroll up, down, left or right with one of the following methods. Press and release one of the button to scroll from one entry to the next one. Press and hold one of the button to have the radio toggles through the list automatically (release the button to stop). Data Feature Button Use Data Feature button to access data-related features, such as the Text Messaging Service (TMS) feature screen. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 28 2 These programmable buttons support the One Touch Button feature. English Draft The keypad functions in a manner similar to a standard telephone keypad when entering numeric digits. When the keypad is used to edit a list, each key can generate different characters of the alphabet. The following tables show the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character. Volume Knob Use this Volume Knob to adjust the volume of the speakers by turning it clockwise or counterclockwise. Using the Mode Knob Use this Mode Knob to scroll through the channels by turning it clockwise or counterclockwise. Keypad You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad on the keypad microphone to access your radios features. Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode Key Number of Times Key is Pressed I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 4

?

5

!

6 7 8

; @ _ 9

-

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

*

#

&

$

/

+

=

\

(

) 1 1 A D 2

. B E G H 3

, C F I 29 English Draft Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 1 J 2 K M N 3 L O P T U W X Q R S V Y Z l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode and lowercase mode. Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 1 2

. 3

, 4

?

5

!

6 7 8

; @ _ 9

-

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

*

#

&

$

/

+

=

\

(

) 30 English Draft Key Number of Times Key is Pressed I d e n 1 a d g j 2 b e h k m n p t w q u x 3 c f i l o r v y 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 s z i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode and lowercase mode. Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. 31 English Draft Keypad Characters Numeric Mode Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 2

. 3

, 4

?

5

!

6

;

7 8

@ _ 9

-

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

*

#

&

$

/

+

=

\

(

) 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 32 English Draft Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 A D B E C F 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l Not applicable Not applicable 33 English Draft Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call. See Methods to Make a Radio Call on page 51 for more information. The PTT button serves two basic purposes:

on the side of the microphone While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 34 English ADraft Identifying Status Indicators Status Icons The liquid crystal display (LCD) of your radio shows the radio status, text entries, and menu entries. The following are the icons that appear on the display of the radio. Receiving Radio is receiving a call or data. Transmitting Radio is transmitting a call or data. Received Signal Strength Indicator

(RSSI) The number of bars displayed repre-

sents the received signal strength for the current site, for trunking only. The more stripes in the icon, the stronger the sig-

nal. Direct I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s On Radio is currently configured for di-

rect radio-to-radio communication (dur-

ing conventional operation only). Off Radio is connected with other ra-

dios through a repeater. Monitor (Carrier Squelch) Selected channel is being monitored

(during conventional operation only). In-Call User Alert On The feature is enabled. Voice mut-

ing of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel is activa-

ted. Off The feature is disabled. Voice mut-

ing of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel is deacti-

vated. or Power Level L Radio is set at Low power. 35 English Draft H Radio is set at High power. Scan Radio is scanning a scan list. Priority Channel Scan Blinking dot Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-One. Steady dot Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-Two. Vote Scan Enabled The vote scan feature is enabled. Secure Operation On Secure operation. Off Clear operation. Blinking Receiving an encrypted voice call. AES Secure Operation On AES secure operation. Off Clear operation. Blinking Receiving an encrypted voice call. GPS Signal On Feature is enabled and signal is available. Off Feature is disabled. Blinking Feature is enabled, but no signal is available. User Login Indicator (IP Packet Data) On User is currently associated with the radio. Off User is currently not associated with the radio. Blinking Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 36 English Draft Inverted User successfully login to the secured IP Packet Data. Indicates that the text entry is currently in uppercase mode. Data Activity Data activity is present. Hexadecimal Indicates that the text entry is currently in hexadecimal mode. Numeric Indicates that the text entry is currently in numeric mode. Start Case Indicates that the first character of the text entry is capitalized. Mixed Case Indicates that the text entry is currently in normal text mode. Uppercase Lowercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in lowercase mode. Lowercase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in lowercase and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. Mixedcase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in mixed case and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. Uppercase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in uppercase and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s 37 English Draft The radio Wi-Fi network is connected. The number of bars displayed repre-

sents the signal strength of the Wi-Fi signal. Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators This feature allows you to send and receive text messages. Status icons and menu options shown here help you to work more efficiently with TMS feature. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) on page 85 for more information. TMS Status Icons The following icons appear on the radios display when you send and receive text messages. Inbox Full The Inbox is full. Message Sent The text message is sent successfully. Message Unsent The text message cannot be sent. Unread Message User receives a new message. The selected text message in the Inbox has not been read. Read Message The selected text message in the Inbox has been read. Normal Message User is composing a message with normal priority and without a request for a reply. Message Index Indicates the index of the current message the user is viewing. Example: If the user is looking at the third message out of a total of 6 messages in s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 38 English Draft I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s the Inbox folder, the icon is displayed as the icon on the left column. Priority Status The Priority feature is toggled on be-

fore the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flag-

ged with Priority. Request Reply The Request Reply feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flag-

ged with Request Reply. Priority Status and Request Reply User is composing a message with a priority status and a request for a reply. Messages in the Inbox folder are flag-

ged with Priority and Request Reply. TMS Menu Options Menu Option INBX COMP DRFT BACK SAVE SENT NEW LIST IMPT RQRP Description/Function Brings you to your incoming messages screen. Brings you to the compose screen. Brings you to the saved message screen. Brings you back to the previous screen. Saves the messages you have edited to the Draft folder. Brings you to the sent messages screen. Creates a new message. Brings you to the predefined messages screen. Toggles the Priority Status icon on or off for an outgoing message. Toggles Request Reply icon on or off for an outgoing message. 39 English Draft Menu Option Description/Function CURR ALL DEL EDIT EXIT NO OPTN RPLY SEL SEND YES Deletes the current selected message. Selects to delete all the messages in the current folder. Deletes a message or text. Edits a draft message or key in a target address. Exits to the Home screen. Cancel the delete all messages options. Brings you to the Options main screen. Replies to a message. Selects a predefined message or ad-

dress. Sends the message. Deletes all the messages in the current folder. LED Indicator The LED indicator shows the operational status of your radio. A Red LED B Yellow LED C Green LED Solid red Radio is transmitting. Rapidly blinking red Solid yellow

(Conventional Only) Radio has failed the self test upon powering up or encountered a fatal error. Channel is busy. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 40 English ABCDraft Rapidly blinking green Radio is on a Priority-One channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Blinking yellow Solid green Blinking green Radio is receiving a secured transmission. Radio is powering up, or is on a non-priority channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Radio is receiving an individual or telephone call, or is on a Priority-Two channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Intelligent Lighting Indicators I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s This feature temporarily changes the display backlight color and the alert text background color of the radio to help signal that a radio event has occurred. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Backlight and Bar Color Notification When Orange Emergency Alerts The radio initiates an emergency alarm or call. The radio receives an emergency alarm or call. 41 English Draft Backlight and Bar Color Notification When Red Critical Alerts The radio battery is low. The radio is out of range. The radio enters Failsoft mode. The radio is unable to establish a full connection with the system. The radio is unable to authenticate or register with the system. The radio lost GPS signal or GPS function fails. Green Call Alerts The radio receives a private call. The radio receives a phone call. The radio receives a call alert. The radio receives a selective call. The radio enters Geofence. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 42 English Draft Alert Tones I d e n Your radio uses alert tones to inform you of the condition of your radio. The following table lists these tones and when they occur. You Hear Tone Name Heard Short, Low-

Pitched Tone Radio Self Test Fail When radio fails its power-up self test. Reject When an unauthorized request is made. Long, Low-

Pitched Tone Time-Out Timer Warning Four seconds before time out. No ACK Received When radio fails to receive an acknowledgment. Individual Call Warning Tone When radio is in an individual call for greater than 6 seconds without any activity. Time-Out Timer Timed Out After time out. Talk Prohibit/PTT Inhibit

(When PTT button is pressed) transmissions are not allowed. Lack of Voice PTT Time out When the radio ends your call after it detected there are lack of voice for 5 seconds after the PTT is pressed and hold. Your ra-

dio ends the call to enable your radio to receive calls from other radio users. Out of Range

(When PTT button is pressed) the radio is out of range of the system. i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s Invalid Mode When radio is on an unpreprogrammed channel. 43 English Draft You Hear Tone Name Heard A Group of Low-Pitched Tones Short, Medium-

Pitched Tone Busy When system is busy. Valid Key-Press When a correct key is pressed. Radio Self Test Pass When radio passes its power-up self test. Clear Voice At beginning of a non-coded communication. Priority Channel Received When activity on a priority channel is received. Emergency Alarm /Call En-

try When entering the emergency state. Long, Medium-

Pitched Tone A Group of Me-

dium-Pitched Tones Central Echo Volume Set When central controller has received a request from a radio. When volume is changed on a quiet channel. Emergency Exit When exiting the emergency state. Failsoft When the trunking system fails. Automatic Call Back When voice channel is available from previous request. Keyfail When encryption key has been lost. Console Acknowledge When status, emergency alarm, or reprogram request ACK is re-

ceived. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 44 English Draft You Hear Tone Name Heard I d e n Received Individual Call When Call Alert or Private Call is received. Call Alert Sent Site Trunking When Call Alert is received by the target radio. When a SmartZone trunking system fails. Low-Battery Chirp When battery is below preset threshold value. GPS Fails When the GPS signal is lost or when GPS fails. Short, High-

Pitched Tone

(Chirp) Two High-

Pitched Tones Ringing Fast Ringing When system is searching for target of Private Call. Enhanced Call Sent When waiting for target of Private Call to answer the call. Phone Call Received When a land-to-mobile phone call is received. Gurgle Dynamic Regrouping

(When PTT button is pressed) a dynamic ID has been received. i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s Unique, Low-

Pitched Chirp Unique, High-

Pitched Chirp Talk Permit

(When PTT button is pressed) is verifying with the system for ac-

cepting its transmissions. New Message When a new message is received. Priority Status When a priority message is received. 45 English Draft General Radio Operation Selecting a Zone d) Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Selecting a Radio Channel Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. A zone is a group of channels. The following methods are options on how to select a radio zone. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Select a zone via the Mode Knob:

a) Rotate the Mode Knob until the display shows the desired zone. Select a zone via the radio menu ZONE:

a) b) or to ZONE and press the Menu Select button directly below ZONE. or to the required zone, or use the keypad to enter the zone number. c) Press or the PTT button to confirm the selected zone number. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 46 English A channel is a group of radio characteristics, such as transmit/ receive frequency pairs. The following methods are options on how to select a radio channel. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Select a channel via the Mode knob:

a) Rotate the Mode knob until the display shows the desired channel. b) Press the PTT button to begin transmitting on the displayed channel. Select a channel via the radio menu CHAN:

or to CHAN. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below CHAN. or to the required channel. c) d) Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to confirm the selected channel. Draft e) Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. To exit this procedure, press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL. Selecting a Channel via Channel Search Button This feature allows you to do a quick search for a specific channel in your radio by keying in the alias of the channel. If the name matches, your radio prompts the first found matched channel name. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Channel Search button. or to CHSR and press the Menu Select button directly below CHSR. A blinking cursor appears on the Channel Search screen. 2 Use the keypad to type or edit your channel name. 3 To initiate searching, press the Menu Select button directly below CHSR once the entry is done. The display shows SEARCHING. Once found, the display shows the matched channel name and the radio changed its transmission to the selected channel. If the radio is triggered to search for an empty entry, the display shows INVALID ENTRY. Repeat step 2 to search again. If the entry does not match, the display shows CHANNEL NAME NOT FOUND. Repeat step 2 to search or the Menu Select button directly again; or press below EXIT to exit. Mode Select Feature Mode Select allows a long press to save the current zone and channel of your radio to a programmable button, keypad button, or a softkey; then once programmed, the short-press of that button or softkey changes the transmission to the saved zone and channel. There are two methods to save the selected zone and channel:

G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 47 English Draft Softkeys Programmable buttons and keypad buttons (digit 0 to 9) Short press of the programmed softkey changes your current transmission to the zone and channel programmed in this softkey. Note:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Softkey Five softkeys are available for you to save the frequently used zone and channel. 1 Toggle your zone and channel to the required zone and channel. n o i t 2 or to MS1, MS2 ... or MS5. a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 3 Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below one of the softkey (MS1 MS5). You hear a short, medium-pitched tone when the zone and channel is saved. Note:

To change the programmed zone and channel, repeat this procedure. Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Button You can save the frequent used zone and channel to the programmable buttons and keypad digit 0 to 9 buttons. 1 Toggle your zone and channel to the required zone and channel. 2 Press and hold the button you desire to program. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone when the zone and channel is saved. Note:

Repeat this procedure to change the zone and channel of the programmed button. Short press of the programmed button changes your current transmission to the zone and channel programmed in this button. 48 English Draft Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once you have selected the required channel and/or zone, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. A Red LED B Yellow LED C Green LED The LED lights up solid red while the radio is transmitting. In conventional mode, the LED lights up solid yellow when the radio is receiving a transmission. In trunking mode, there is no LED indication when the radio receives a transmission. If the radio is receiving a secure transmission, the LED blinks yellow. Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. When you receive a talkgroup call (while on the Home screen) the radio triggers for your attention with one of the following scenarios depending on the system your radio is configured:

For ASTRO Conventional system, the LED lights up solid yellow. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID, and the caller alias or ID. For Trunking system, the display shows the caller alias or ID. 1 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid red. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. See also Making a Talkgroup Call on page 51 for details on making a Talkgroup Call. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 49 English ABCDraft Receiving and Responding to a Private Call (Trunking Only) 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. The one-to-one call between the two radios are not heard by the others in the current talkgroup. The calling radio automatically verifies that the receiving radio is active on the system and can display the caller ID. Note:

With the inactivity timer enabled (optional), when there is no response from the receiving radio, the calling radio exits the call with Menu Inactive Exit tone after the timer expires. When you receive a Private Call, you hear two alert tones and the LED blinks green. The display shows CALL RECEIVED and the caller alias or ID. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below RESP within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. If the caller alias is in the call list, the display shows the caller alias during the call. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G If the caller name is not in the call list, the display shows the caller ID. 50 English 3 Press screen. to hang up and return to the Home Note:

If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below RESP, your conversation will be heard by all members of the talk group. If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the RESP, you will not respond privately to the call just received. Instead, you initiate a Private Call. See also Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 52 for details on making a Private Call. Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call

(Trunking Only) This feature allows you to receive calls similar to standard phone calls from a landline phone. Note:

With the inactivity timer enabled (optional), if there is no response to the call after the timer Draft expires, your radio exits the call with Menu Inactive Exit tone. When you receive a Telephone Call, you hear a telephone-type ringing and the LED blinks green. The backlight of the screen turns green.The display shows PHONE CALL and the call received icon blinks. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below RESP. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 3 Press or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to hang up and return to the Home screen. See also Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) on page 53 for details on making a Telephone Call. Methods to Make a Radio Call You can select a zone, channel, subscriber ID, or talkgroup by using:

The preprogrammed Zone menu. The Mode Knob. A preprogrammed One Touch button. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n The Contacts list (see Contacts on page 65). Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Making a Talkgroup Call To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

or to TGRP and press the Menu Select button directly below TGRP. The display shows the last-selected talkgroup. Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. Use the Mode Knob to select the channel with the desired talkgroup. 2 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The radio shows different indicators based on the system the radio is configured. 51 English Draft For ASTRO Conventional system, the LED lights up solid red. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID. For Trunking system, the LED lights up solid red. 4 Speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. This feature allows you to send an individual Call Alert or page if there is no answer from the target radio. See Sending a Call Alert Page on page 76 for more information. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Private Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID (number) and initiate the Private Call. Proceed to step 5. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 52 English To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to CALL, and press the Menu Select button directly below CALL. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LIST to go to the first number of the call list. or to the required ID. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 4 Press the PTT button to initiate the Private Call. A telephone-type ringing sounds if the receiving unit is in service. The display shows CALLING...

<NUMBER> or CALLING... <ALIAS>. 5 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. Draft When you are connected, the display shows the ID of the target radio. If no acknowledgment is received, the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. If the target radio does not respond before the time out, the display shows NO ANSWER. 6 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press to return to the Home screen. Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to make calls similar to standard phone calls to a mobile or landline phone. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Phone Call button to dial the preprogrammed phone number. Proceed to step 5. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to PHON, and press the Menu Select button directly below PHON. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LIST to go to the first number of the call list. or to the required phone number. Use the keypad to enter the required phone number. 4 Press the PTT button to dial the phone number. 5 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 6 When your call is answered, press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 53 English Draft 7 Press to return to the Home screen. See Alert Tones on page 43 for more information if your call is NOT answered. Switching Between Repeater or Direct Operation Button The Repeater Operation increases the radio coverage area by connecting with other radios through a repeater. The transmit and receive frequencies are different. The Direct or talkaround operation allows you to bypass the repeater and connect directly to another radio. The transmit and receive frequencies are the same. Perform one of the following actions:

The display shows REPEATER MODE if the radio is currently in Repeater mode. The display shows DIRECT MODE and the Talkaround icon if the radio is currently in Direct mode (during conventional operation only). Monitor Feature Radio users who switch from analog to digital radios often assume that the lack of static on a digital channel is an indication that the radio is not working properly. This is not the case. Digital technology quiets the transmission by removing the noise from the signal and allows only the clear voice or data information to be heard. Use the Monitor feature to make sure a channel is clear before transmitting. Press the preprogrammed Repeater/Direct Monitoring a Channel switch to toggle between talkaround and repeater modes. or to DIR and press the Menu Select button directly below DIR. Monitoring a Channel in Conventional Modes:

a) Lift the microphone off hook. b) Listen for activity on that channel. c) Adjust the Volume Knob if necessary. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 54 English Draft d) If you hear no activity, press and hold the PTT button to start your conversation. 1 To activate monitoring, perform one of the following actions:

Monitoring a Channel in Trunked Modes:

a) Lift the microphone off hook. b) Press the PTT button. c) If you hear two, short, high-pitched tones, or if indicator lights you hear no tone and the steadily, then proceed with your message. d) Release the PTT button to receive (listen). If you are not in the range of the system, you may hear a continuous low-pitched tone and the display shows OUT OF RANGE. Monitoring Conventional Mode This feature must first be enabled by a qualified radio technician or system administrator. This feature allows you to monitor channel traffic on conventional channels by defeating the coded squelch. Thus, you can to listen to another user active on the channel. This way, you may be prevented from talking over someone elses conversation. At Home mode where the default zone and channel are being displayed, or to MON and press the Menu Select button directly below MON momentarily. Take the control head off hook. The display shows MONITOR ON. You hear all channel traffic. 2 Press the Menu Select button again to deactivate the monitoring. The display shows MONITOR OFF. MONITOR ON shown on the display indicates that the radio is monitoring. Pressing the Menu Select button again turns monitor off and you dont hear all channel traffic. If you try to transmit on a receive-only channel, you hear an invalid tone until you release the PTT button. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 55 English Draft Advanced Features Advanced Call Features Calling a Phone Not in the List 1 or to PHON. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below PHON. 3 Enter the desired phone number on the keypad. The display updates as the numbers are entered. 4 Press the button or the PTT button on the keypad microphone to make the call. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press or Menu Select button directly below PHON to exit. Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only) This feature allows you to receive a call from or to call a specific individual. It is intended to provide privacy t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 56 English and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations that are of no interest to you. Receiving a Selective Call When you receive a Selective Call, you hear two alert tones and the LED lights up solid yellow. The call received icons blink and the display alternates between CALL RECEIVED and the home display. The speaker unmutes. 1 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. Note:

If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below CALL, your conversation is heard by all members of the talk group. If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the CALL, you are not responding privately to the call just received. Instead, you initiate a Draft Selective Call. See Making a Selective Call on page 57. or to the required ID. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. Making a Selective Call 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Selective Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID. Proceed to step 4. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to CALL, and press the Menu Select button directly below CALL. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 4 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to start the Selective Call. The display shows the ID of the target radio. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press to return to the Home screen. If you do not press button to hang up, your radio will remain in Selective Call state with the other unit. You will miss all subfleet traffic and incoming phone calls. 3 To select the required ID, perform one of the Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only) A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LIST to go to the last number dialed. This feature allows you to define a group of conventional system users so that they can share the use of a conventional channel. 57 English Draft Note:

Encryption keys are associated to talkgroups. When talkgroups are associated, encryption keys are changed by changing the active talkgroup. See Secure Operations on page 95 for more information. Selecting a Talkgroup 1 or to TGRP and press the Menu Select button directly below TGRP. The display shows the last Talkgroup that was selected and stored. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to PSET for the preset preprogrammed Talkgroup. or to the required Talkgroup. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to save the currently selected Talkgroup and return to the Home screen. If the encryption key associated to the new Talkgroup is erased, you hear a momentary key fail tone and the display shows KEY FAIL. If the encryption key that is associated to the new Talkgroup is not allowed, you hear a momentary key fail tone and the display shows ILLEGAL KEY. 4 Press to return to the Home screen. Sending a Status Call This feature allows you to send data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Each status can have up to a 14-character name. A maximum of eight status conditions is possible. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Status button. or to STS and press the Menu Select button directly below STS. The display shows the last acknowledged status call, or the first status in the list. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 58 English Draft 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required status. Use the keypad to enter a number corresponding to the location in the status list. 3 Press the PTT button to send the status. When the dispatcher acknowledges, you hear four tones and the display shows ACK RECEIVED . The radio returns to normal dispatch operation. If no acknowledgment is received, you hear a low-

pitched tone and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. 4 Press to return to the Home screen. No traffic is heard on trunked channels while Status Calls is selected. If the radio detects no Status Call activity for six seconds, an alert tone sounds until you press or the PTT button. Responding to the Dynamic Regrouping Feature

(Trunking Only) This feature allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a particular channel where they can communicate with each other. This feature is typically used during special operations and is enabled by a qualified radio technician. You will not notice whether your radio has this feature enabled until a dynamic regrouping command is sent by the dispatcher. Note:

If you try to access a zone or channel that has been reserved by the dispatcher as a dynamically regrouped mode for other users, you hear an invalid tone. When your radio is dynamically regrouped, it automatically switches to the dynamically regrouped channel. You hear a Gurgle tone and the display shows the dynamically regrouped channels name. Press the PTT button to talk. Release PTT button to listen. When the dispatcher cancels dynamic regrouping, the radio automatically returns to the zone and channel that you were using before the radio was dynamically regrouped. Requesting a Reprogram (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to notify the dispatcher when you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 59 English Draft Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Reprogram Request button to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. or to RPGM then press the Menu Select button directly below RPGM to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. The display shows REPROGRAM RQST and PLEASE WAIT. If you hear five beeps, the dispatcher has acknowledged the reprogram request. The display shows ACK RECEIVED and the radio returns to the Home screen. If the dispatcher does not acknowledge the reprogram request within six seconds, you hear a low-pitched alert tone and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. Try again or press return to the Home screen. to cancel and Classification of Regrouped Radios The dispatcher can classify regrouped radios into either of two categories:

Select Enabled Select Disabled Select-enabled radios are free to change to any available channel, including the dynamic-regrouping channel, once the user has selected the dynamic-regrouping position. Select-disabled radios cannot change channels while dynamically regrouped. The dispatcher has forced the radio to remain on the dynamic-regrouping channel. The Scan or Private Call feature cannot be selected while your radio is Select Disabled. Dynamic Zone Programming (DZP) Note:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. This feature works on the condition at least one zone in the radio must be a non-dynamic zone. This feature provides one or more Dynamic Zones to store frequently used channels be it conventional or trunking. These dynamic channels are saved from pre-existing (non-dynamic) channels in the radio. This saves the time and effort from the regular navigation t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 60 English Draft A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s around the working zones and channels. User can also delete or update the list in the Dynamic Zone. Saving a Channel in the Dynamic Zone from List Selection Entering the Dynamic Zone to Select a Dynamic Channel The radio must be in Dynamic Zone in order to perform this operation. 1 2 or to Zone then press the Menu Select button directly below Zone. The display shows the Zone screen. or to <# Dynamic Zone Channels>

3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button below Sel to select. Press the Menu Select button below Exit to exit. If you have selected one of the Dynamic Zone Channels list, the display returns to Home screen with the selected <# Dynamic Zone Channels>

shown on the screen. If you have selected Exit without selecting any Dynamic Zone Channels list, the display returns to Home screen without any changes. 1 or to ZnPr. Press the Menu Select button directly below ZnPr to enter Program Zone screen. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows Search Options screen. 3 4 5 or to List Selection. Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows Select Zone screen. or to the required zone. Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows Select Chan screen. or to the required channel. Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows Channel updated. 61 English Draft 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to Home screen. Deleting a Channel in the Dynamic Zone The radio must be in Dynamic Zone in order to perform this operation. or to ZnPr then press the Menu Select button directly below ZnPr to enter Program Zone screen. The display shows the dynamic channels list. 1 2 Multiple Control Head Features This feature allows your transceiver to control a combination of up to four O5 control heads on APX Mobile (depending on the model). You can use the CAN cables to connect in any configuration that does not exceed 131 feet (40 meters) in combined length. Refer the Control Head Installation Manual

(6878215A01) for further information. The Multiple Control Head (MCH) feature consists of 2 modes that can be programmed via Customer Programming Software (CPS):

or to the saved dynamic channel then press the Menu Select button directly below Del. The display shows Channel deleted screen. All Active mode One Active mode 3 Press the Menu Select button below Exit to return to Home screen. The Home screen shows <Dynamic Zone Channels>. If the channel deleted is the Home channel, the Home screen shows <Zone Name>+Blank. Note:

If two or more control heads are connected to the system before enabling the MCH feature in the CPS, the radio displays EXTRA CH or CH ID # ERR. Both errors are FATAL. Setting the ID of the Initial Control Head This feature allows you to setup the control head in the Front Panel Programming (FPP) mode. During the setup, the control heads are defined as Control t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 62 English Draft Head Number 1, Control Head Number 2, Control Head Number 3 and Control Head Number 4. 1 Power off the radio by pressing the Power button. 2 Press and hold the left-most Menu Select button and the emergency button simultaneously. 3 While continuing to depress these two buttons, press the Power button to power on the radio and the control head. The radio and the control head powers on into FPP mode. The display shows the ID number of the control head. 4 Turn the Mode knob to change the ID number of the control head. 5 Press the Power button to power off the radio and exit FPP mode. 6 Repeat step1 to step 5 to set the ID number for the rest of the attached control heads. All Active Mode The All Active mode enables all connected control heads attached to the radio to operate concurrently with each other. When you activate a feature on one control head, the rest of the control heads have the same activated features and indicators on their respective display. Note:

The multiple control head feature allows only control heads of the same type to be connected. Upon power up, if a control head of a different type is connected to the radio, the display of all the attached control heads shows the FATAL error CH MISMATCH. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Activating and Deactivating Intercom in All Active Mode This feature only applies to control heads in the All Active mode. The intercom feature allows one control head user to talk to another control head user in a Multiple Control Head configuration. At any given time, when a control head being operated has priority for the intercom call, all other control heads are blocked until the active control head releases PTT button. This can be made on any attached control head. 63 English Draft Note:

In the One Active mode, if more than 2 control heads are present upon power up, the radio shows a FATAL error EXTRA CH on the display of all attached control heads. The active control head commands the system normally while the inactive control head is in remote mode with its display shows REMOTE. The Volume knob, DIM button, Front/Rear (F/R) softkey and Emergency button remain active on the inactive control head, while all other controls are disabled. Emergency footswitch and VIP inputs remain active on the inactive control head. The VIP input control head is configurable in the CPS and VIP should be attached to the control head selected in the CPS. Note:

Only 2 control heads are supported in the one active mode. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below INTC to activate the intercom feature of any of the control heads. 2 Press the PTT button to initiate an intercom transmission. All control heads that are attached will receive the same intercom call. The display of the control heads receiving the intercom call shows the alias/ID number of the transmitting control head. 3 Press or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to deactivate the intercom feature. The intercom feature also deactivates when user initiates a mode change. If the radio is on an emergency channel, pressing of the EMERGENCY button or the emergency footswitch button on any control head also deactivates the intercom feature. One Active Mode The One Active mode enables only one control head to be visibly active at a time in a 2 control head system. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 64 English Draft A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Contacts This feature provides address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias (name) or ID (number) that you use to initiate a call. Contact entries are alphabetically sorted according to entry alias. Each alias can have up to five IDs of different call types associated with it. Additionally, each entry, depending on context

(conventional, trunking, or phone), associates with one or more of the four types of calls: Phone Call, Selective Call, Private Call, or Call Alert. Each entry within Contacts contains the following information:

Call Alias (Name) Call ID (Number) Call Type (Icon) WACN ID (Astro 25 Trunking IDs only) System ID Note:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to add, edit, or delete the contact entries. 65 English A B C Transceiver Active Radio Non-Active Radio You can change the command between the 2 control heads by pressing the Menu Select button directly below F/R, or the Menu Select button preprogrammed user button on the keypad microphone. Z1ZONECHANPWRSQLREMOTEF/RABCDraft Your radio also supports a maximum of 50 call lists. Each list can store up to 100 IDs (numbers). Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS and proceed to step 6. Note:

Your radio is preprogrammed with a number of contacts per Call Lists. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Making a Private Call from Contacts Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. 1 2 or to CNTS and press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the required subscriber alias. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN and proceed to the next step. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 66 English 4 5 or to CALL and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. or to select the call type. 6 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 7 Press the PTT button to initiate the call. During the call, the display shows the subscriber alias. 8 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The LED lights up solid red when the PTT button is pressed. If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed period of time, the call ends. If the call reaches the maximum ring time, the call ends. Draft Adding a New Contact Entry 1 2 or to CNTS and press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to [NEW CONTACT] and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows NAME. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. 4 Use the keypad to enter the name and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the name. To cancel this operation, press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to return to the previous screen. 5 or to [ADD NUMBER] and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows TYPE 1 <DEFAULT TYPE>. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. 7 8 or to the required channel and press the Menu Select button directly below OK. or to NUMBER 1 and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. The display shows NUMBER 1 and a blinking cursor appears. 9 Use the keypad to enter the number and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the number. To cancel this operation, press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to return to the previous screen. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below DONE once you have finished. The display shows <ENTRY> STORED, confirming that the contact entry has been added. The radio returns to the main Contacts screen. Deleting a Contact Entry 1 or to CNTS and press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 67 English Draft The entries are alphabetically sorted. 2 3 or to the entry you want to delete and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. or to DEL and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows <ENTRY> CONFIRM DEL?. 4 Select the Menu Select button directly below YES to delete the entry, or NO to cancel and return to the main screen of Contacts. The display shows <ENTRY> DELETED and the radio returns to the main screen of Contacts. Adding a Contact to a Call List 1 2 or to CNTS and press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to add and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 3 or to ADD TO CALLLST or ADD TO PHONLST and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

or until the display shows [AVAILABLE] and press the Menu Select button directly below ADD to add as a new entry. or until the display shows <ENTRY> and its associated number and press the Menu Select button directly below RPLC to replace the existing entry. The display shows <ENTRY> ADDED, confirming the addition of the contact to the list. The radio returns to the main display of Contacts. Methods of Contact Editing in a Call List Editing an Entry Alias 1 or to CNTS and press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 68 English Draft 2 3 4 or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. or to EDIT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. or to the entry alias you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. A blinking cursor appears. 2 3 4 or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. or to EDIT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. or to the entry ID you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. A blinking cursor appears. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 5 Use the keypad to edit the name and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 5 Use the keypad to edit the number and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below DONE 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below DONE to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. Editing as Entry ID Editing a Call Type 1 or to CNTS and press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 1 or to CNTS and press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 69 English Draft 2 3 4 5 or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. or to EDIT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. or to TYPE and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. or to choose from the list of call types given and press the Menu Select button directly below OK. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below DONE to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. Scan Lists Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels/ groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the channel/group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel/

group. Your radio supports different types of Scan Lists:

Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List Conventional Scan List Talkgroup Scan List A maximum of 200 Scan Lists can be programmed in your radio. These lists must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Viewing a Scan List 1 2 or to SCNL and press the Menu Select button directly below SCNL. or to view the members on the list. 3 Press to exit the current display and return to the Home screen. Editing the Scan List This feature lets you change scan list members and priorities. 1 or to SCNL and press the Menu Select button directly below SCNL. The display shows the lists that can be changed. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 70 English Draft 2 or to the entry you want to edit. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. Press the Menu Select button directly below DEL to delete the currently displayed channel from the scan list. Press the Menu Select button directly below RCL to view the next member of the scan list. 4 Perform one of the following actions to select another channel that needs to be added or deleted then repeat step 3. Otherwise, proceed to the next step. or to the desired channel. Use the keypad to enter the desired channel name. Use the Mode Knob to select the channel. 5 Press to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. See Viewing and Changing the Priority Status on page 72 for more information on how to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. Changing the Scan List Status 1 Long press the preprogrammed Scan side button. 2 or to the member you want to edit. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Select button once to add the currently displayed channel to the scan list. Press the Select button one or more times to change the scan list status icon of the currently displayed channel. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

or to select more list members whose scan status you want to change. Use the Mode Knob to select another scan list member. 5 Press to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 71 English Draft Viewing and Changing the Priority Status Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL one or more times to change the priority status of the current displayed channel. Press the Select button one or more times to toggle between different status of the Scan List status icon of the current displayed channel. The radio shows one of following priority status icons and scenarios:

A Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as a non-priority channel. The LED lights up solid green. A Priority-Two Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-Two channel. The LED blinks green. A Priority-One Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-One channel. The LED rapidly blinks green. You hear all traffic on the Priority-

One channel, regardless of traffic on non-

priority channels. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 72 English No icon indicates that the current channel is deleted from the scan list. Scan This feature allows you to monitor traffic on different channels by scanning a preprogrammed list of channels. Turning Scan On or Off Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Scan button to initiate or stop scan. or to SCAN and press the Menu Select button directly below SCAN. If the scan is enabled, the display shows SCAN ON and the scan status icon. If the scan is disabled, the display shows SCAN OFF. The radio returns to the Home screen. Draft Turning Scan On While Disregarding the Squelch Code

(Conventional Channels Only) You can still receive fleetwide, system-wide, dynamic regrouping, incoming telephone interconnect and Private Conversation/Call Alert calls while scanning for activity. You may respond to these types of calls as you would normally on the selected channel. However, when scanning different channels while in talkgroup scan, incoming Private Conversation/Call Alert calls may be missed. or to MON and press the Menu Select button directly below MON. The brief MONITOR ON display indicates that the radio is disregarding the squelch code. Transmitting While the Scan is On Transmitting Using Radio Programmed for Talkback Scan PTT button, allowing the other party to respond. If the other party responds within the hang time, scanning does not resume until the full hang time expires after they have finished speaking, allowing the conversation to be completed. To transmit on the selected channel if another channel is active, first turn scan off by pressing the Menu Select button below SCAN momentarily. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Transmitting Using Radio Programmed for Non-

Talkback Scan Press the PTT button at any time to transmit on the selected channel or fixed channel. To make a Call Alert page, or Private Conversation call while scanning, press either the Menu Select button directly below PAGE or CALL. The call is entered on the selected channel and scanning is halted until the call is exited by pressing below either PAGE or CALL. or pressing the Menu Select button Press the PTT button to transmit on the channel indicated by the display. The radio does not begin scanning again for a predetermined hang time after you release the Deleting a Nuisance Channel If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise (termed a nuisance channel), you can 73 English Draft temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. This capability does not apply to priority channels or the designated transmit channel. When the radio is locked onto the channel to be deleted, or to NUIS and press the Menu Select button directly below NUIS. The radio continues scanning the remaining channels in the list. Restoring a Nuisance Channel To restore the deleted nuisance channel, perform one of the following actions:

Stop and restart a scan. Mode change to another channel and back to the original channel. Turn off the radio and then turn it on again. Nuisance mode delete can be disabled by the system administrator. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 74 English Changing Priorities Status While Scan is On While the radio is scanning, the dynamic priority change feature allows you to temporarily change any channel in a scan list (except for the Priority-One channel) to the Priority-Two channel. This change remains in effect until scan is turned off. Scan then reverts to the preprogrammed (original) setting. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below DYNP to change the priority of a non-priority channel in the scan list to Priority-Two. 2 Press momentarily to exit the scan list and resume scanning. Restoring Priorities in a Scan List To restore the original channel priorities in a scan list, perform one of the following actions:

Turn scan off, and then on. Change channels. Turn off the radio, and then turn it back on. Draft Using the Hang Up Box (HUB) To temporarily suspend Scan Mode operation, remove the control head from the Hang Up Box

(HUB). You are allowed to use the control head while scan is suspended. However, Priority Member scanning is not suspended. This feature applies to all Scan Lists and Scan Types. Scan is resumed once the control head is returned to the holding clip and the preprogrammed hang time has elapsed. Note:

Priority Scan List members are continuously scanned only when the Scan List, Designated Tx Member field is set to Talkback in the radio programming. Otherwise, all scan mode operation is suspended. Call Alert Paging This feature allows your radio to work like a pager. Even if other users are away from their radios, or if they are unable to hear their radios, you can send them an individual Call Alert page. You can also verify if a radio is active on the system. Depending on how your radio is programmed, when you make an Enhanced Private Call, the radio either automatically sends a call alert page if there is no answer after the maximum ring time, or when you press the PTT button. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Receiving a Call Alert Page When you receive a Call Alert page, you hear four repeating alert tones and the LED blinks green. If Call Alert Tone Auto Reset is enabled, you hear one alert tone and the LED blinks green. The call received icons blinks and the display shows PAGE RECEIVED. Press the PTT button to answer or press any button to clear the Call Alert page. See Making a Talkgroup Call on page 51 or Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 52 for more information on returning the call. 75 English Draft Sending a Call Alert Page The following methods are options on how to send a call alert page. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Note:

If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, your radio automatically exits the feature when your radio is left idle long enough for the time to expire. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Sending a call alert page via the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Call Alert Paging button:

a) Press the preprogrammed Quick Access

(One-Touch) Call Alert Paging button to send a page to the preprogrammed ID. The display shows PAGING...<NUMBER> or

<ALIAS>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear four high-pitched tones and the display t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 76 English shows ACK RECEIVED. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return to the main screen for Contacts. Sending a call alert page via the radio menu PAGE:

or to PAGE. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below PAGE. or to select the required ID. c) d) Press the PTT button to send the page. The display shows PAGING...<NUMBER> or

<ALIAS>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear four high-pitched tones and the display shows ACK RECEIVED. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. Press the Menu Select button Draft A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s directly below OK to return to the main screen of Contacts. Sending a call alert page via the radio menu CALL:

ACKNOWLEDGE. Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return to the main screen of Contacts. or to CALL. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below c) CALL. or to select the alias or ID, and press the PTT button to initiate the call. If the target radio does not respond after a preprogrammed period of time, the display shows SEND PAGE?. d) To send the call alert page, press the Menu Select button directly below YES. To exit the screen without sending the call alert page, press the Menu Select button directly below NO. The display shows PAGING...<ALIAS>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear four high-pitched tones and the display shows ACK RECEIVED. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows NO Enabling and Disabling In-Call User Alert Make sure you are in Home mode where the default zone and mode are being displayed. You can enable and disable voice transmission, if needed. 1 or to scroll to the VMUT and press the Menu Select button directly below VMUT. Voice mute is activated. 2 To turn the feature off, press the Menu Select button directly below VMUT or the VMut preprogrammed button again. Pressing the Menu Select button directly below VMUT or the VMut programmed button momentarily toggles between Voice mute on and Voice mute off. VOICE MUTE ON shown on the display indicates that the radio is muted to all conventional dispatch calls and affiliated trunking group calls. 77 English Draft Quick Call II (ASTRO P25 Digital Trunking and Conventional) This feature allows the user to broadcast a series of distinct, recognizable tones before a voice transmission from the dispatcher or a radio. The broadcasting dispatcher or radio user can select this alert tone transmission to be sent to an individual Talkgroup or over the entire system. Specific tone or series of tones are pre-programmed into the radios to allow the dispatcher or supervisor to select a list of tones to broadcast before they make their voice transmission. Each tone is distinctive to indicate different situation or different broadcaster. The transmitting radio also plays back the tones for the broadcaster to listen. Note:

The receiving radios must be configured with the Quick Call II tone in order for the radio to sound the selected tone and also to sound a preconfigured alert tone after the selected tone has sound. Initiating a Quick Call II Transmission The broadcasting or transmitting radio must be pre-

programmed to see the tone in the Quick Call II tone list. The receiving radio must also be pre-

programmed to decode the tone to broadcast. 1 2 or to QCII, and press the Menu Select button directly below QCII. or to select the tone to broadcast. 3 Press the PTT to broadcast the selected tone, or press and hold the PTT to broadcast the selected tone and transmit with your vocal transmission. You hear the radio sounds the selected tone. You can begin your call after the tone ends. 4 Release PTT to listen. Emergency Operation The Emergency feature is used to indicate a critical situation. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 78 English Draft A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s If the Orange button is preprogrammed to send an emergency signal, this signal overrides any other communication over the selected channel. Your radio supports the following Emergency modes:

Emergency Alarm Emergency Call (Trunking Only) Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call Silent Emergency Alarm Special Considerations for Emergencies Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on the programming of this feature. Only one of the Emergency modes above can be assigned to the preprogrammed Emergency button or the Emergency footswitch. Note:

To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. This timer is programmable from 0 6250 milliseconds by a qualified technician. Sending an Emergency Alarm This feature allows you to send a data transmission, which identifies the radio sending the emergency, to the dispatcher. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. A tone sounds and the display alternates EMERGENCY and the home display. A dispatcher acknowledgment ACK RECEIVED display follows. For trunking system, the radio also sounds a high-

pitched tone that indicates the alarm has been received by the trunked systems central controller. 2 Press and hold the EMERGENCY button or the PTT button to return to normal operation. Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) This feature gives your radio priority access to a talkgroup. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. One of the following scenarios occurs:

A tone sounds and the display alternates EMERGENCY and the home display. 79 English Draft You hear the radio sounds a short low-pitched tone to indicate the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. 2 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.0 to 2.5 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 5 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call This feature gives your radio priority access on a channel for conventional system, and to a talkgroup for trunking system. If the radio has both emergency call and alarm features enabled, it automatically proceeds to the call mode after the alarm is acknowledged. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 80 English The display alternates EMERGENCY and the home display. A high-pitched tone sounds, indicating that the trunked system central controller has received the alarm. A dispatcher acknowledgment

(four high-pitched tones) follows, accompanied by an ACK RECEIVED display. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 5 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. Turning off the radio also cancels the emergency state. Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to the system without triggering any audio or visual indicators. Draft This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. Note:

If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. The display shows no changes, the LED does not light up, and you hear no tones. The silent emergency state continues until you perform the next step. 2 Press and hold the emergency button until a tone sounds to exit the silent alarm mode. If silent emergency alarm is used with emergency call, pressing the PTT button exits the silent mode and initiates the emergency call. Special Considerations for Emergencies If you press the emergency button while in a channel that has no emergency capability, a low-

pitched tone sounds. If the unit is out of the range of the system and/or the emergency alarm is not acknowledged, a tone sounds and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. If you press the emergency button, then change to a mode that has no emergency capability, the display shows NO EMERGENCY and a continuous low-pitched tone sounds until a valid emergency mode is selected or until the emergency is cancelled. When an emergency is active, changing to another mode where emergency is enabled

(trunked or conventional) causes an emergency alarm and/or emergency call to be active on the new mode. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Automatic Registration Service (ARS) This feature provides an automated data application registration for the radio. When you turn on the radio, the device automatically registers with the server. Data applications within the fixed network can determine the presence of a device on the system and send data to the device. For example: Text Messaging Service (TMS). 81 English Draft The Automatic Registration Service for the radio consists of two (2) modes:

ARS Server Mode (default mode) ARS Non-Server Mode Note:

The default ARS mode can be changed by a qualified radio technician using the radios programming software. Selecting or Changing the ARS Mode The following methods are options on how to select or change the ARS Mode. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Selecting or Changing the ARS mode via the radio menu:

a) Press and hold or to CHAN. b) Press the Menu Select button directly below CHAN. The display shows the current zone is not blinking, and the channel is blinking. or or press the Mode Knob once and rotate the Mode Knob to the desired channel. c) t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 82 English One of the following scenarios occur:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS server channel. In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS non-server channel. If the channel or mode selected is unprogrammed, the display shows UNPROGRAMMED. Repeat this step. d) Press channel. to confirm the displayed zone and Selecting the ARS mode via the Mode Knob:

a) After the zone you want is displayed, toggle until the display shows the required channel. The display shows the current zone is not blinking, and the channel is blinking. or or press the Mode Knob once and rotate the Mode Knob to the desired channel. One of the following scenarios occur:

b) In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS server channel. Draft In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS non-server channel. If the channel or mode selected is unprogrammed, the display shows UNPROGRAMMED. Repeat this step. to confirm the displayed zone and c) Press channel. User Login Feature This feature allows you as the user to be associated with the radio. With this association, every data application (Example: Text Messaging Service) takes on a friendly username. You can still send text messages without logging in as a user. The user login feature only enables the recipient of your message to identify you as the sender by assigning a username to your message. Note:

Valid characters for a username entry are capital letters (A Z), small letters (a z), numbers (0 9), symbols (*, #, -, /), and the space character. The maximum length for a username is eight

(8) characters. Usernames are not case sensitive in server mode but are case sensitive in non-server mode. A predefined username may sometimes be invalid because the programming software that is used to set predefined usernames allows you to set usernames comprising of eight (8) characters or more. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Logging In as a User 1 or to USER and press the Menu Select button directly below USER. The display shows the User Login screen. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to [ID Entry] and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to enter ID. A blinking cursor appears on the screen. Use the keypad to type or edit a user name. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to submit. or to scroll through the list of predefined user names. Press the Menu Select button 83 English Draft directly below SEL to select the predefined user name. Press and hold or to scroll through the list of predefined user names at a fast scroll rate. Press the Menu Select button directly below LOGN to select the predefined user name. If the selected predefined username has more than eight (8) characters, or an invalid character in it, the display momentary shows INVALID ID. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below PIN. A blinking cursor appears beside PIN. 4 Enter your Personal Identification Number (PIN) number. The maximum PIN length is 4 digits. The PIN number will appear as asterisks. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOGN. One of the following scenarios occurs:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and IN PROGRESS, with CNCL. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 84 English In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and LOGGED IN, with LOGT and EXIT. In non-ARS enabled mode, the display shows OFFLINE, with LOGT and EXIT. One of the following scenarios occurs:

If the user name is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also shows momentary LOGIN FAILED. If the PIN is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also shows momentary LOGIN FAILED. Wait for the logged in confirmation screen. If the login process is successful, the display shows the successful user login indicator (IP indicator) icon and LOGGED IN, with LOGT and EXIT. Note:

To cancel the login process and return to the initial user login screen, press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL. Logging Out Once the data application registration is completed, you can log out. Draft Note:

Private data refers to all messages in the text messaging Inbox, Draft, and Sent folder. The next user is able to access the Inbox, Draft and Sent messages if private data is not deleted. 1 or to LOGT and press the Menu Select button directly below LOGT. The display shows the User Login Indicator icon and CLEAR PRIVATE DATA?. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Select YES to clear all your private data. The display shows momentary PRIVATE DATA CLEARED. Select NO to keep your private data. Text Messaging Service (TMS) This features allows you to quickly send and receive messages and run database queries directly from your radios. The maximum length of characters for a text message is 200. The types of text messages available:

A new text message (free form message). A predefined message (quick text message). An edited quick text message. The main menu consists of the following options:

Inbox Compose Drafts Sent A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Note:

See Status Icons on page 35 for more information on the TMS icons and TMS Menu Options on page 39 for more information on each menu option. Accessing the Messaging Features 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. Press and hold the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. 85 English Draft Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. 2 or to TMS. During the numeric mode, except for the keypad only enters the numeric digits. Subsequent presses of the same key inserts the same digit to the text message (no multi-tap).

, pressing 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 1 or to TMS. 4 or to scroll through the main menu options. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. Composing and Sending a New Text Message During the uppercase and lowercase mode, multi-

tapping the keys only scrolls through the letters. For example, A->B->C, a->b->c. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below COMP to see the compose options. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below NEW to compose a new message. A blinking cursor appears on the COMPOSE screen. 5 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN once the message is composed. 7 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 86 English Draft or to [OTHER RECPNT] and press the Menu Select button below EDIT. When a blinking cursor appears in the ENTER ADDRESS screen, use the keypad to type the address entry. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEND or press the PTT button to send the message. Drafts Folder on page 93 for more information. Sending a Quick Text Message Quick Text messages are messages that are predefined and usually consist of messages that are used most frequently. The display shows the SEND MESSAGE screen and SENDING MSG. Each Quick Text message has a maximum length of 50 characters. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows MSG SENT. If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone, the display shows SEND FAILED and returns to the main TMS screen. Note:

You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 88 for more information. You can also select the DRFT option to save your message in the Drafts folder to send it at a later time. See Accessing the 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Text button and proceed to Step 4. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below COMP to see the compose options. 87 English Draft Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to return to the Home screen. cursor appears on the ENTER ADDRESS screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below LIST 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEND to see the quick text list. 5 or to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to select the required message. The message appears on the COMPOSE screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. Use the keypad to edit the message, if required. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. 8 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. or to [OTHER RECPNT] and press the Menu Select button below EDIT. When a blinking or press the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the SEND MESSAGE screen and SENDING MSG. If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows MSG SENT. If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone, the display shows SEND FAILED and returns to the main TMS screen. Note:

You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 88 for more information. Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message Before sending your message, you can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 88 English Draft Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 86 for more information. Note:

The Priority Status icon on a message does not imply that the message gets higher priority over the other messages when it is being transmitted. It is just an indication that can be embedded into a message to let the receiver know that the message is important. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s and Sending a New Text Message on page 86 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below IMPT to remove the priority status icon. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 86 for more information 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below IMPT to indicate the message as important. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. The priority status icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message Ensure there is an outgoing message composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below RQRP to request for a reply. The request reply icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. 89 English Draft Removing a Request Reply from a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 86 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below RQRP to remove the reply status icon. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 86 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below IMPT to indicate the message as important. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 90 English 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below RQRP to request for a reply. The priority status and request reply icons appear beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message Ensure that a outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 86 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below IMPT to remove the priority status icon. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below RQRP to remove the reply status icon. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Draft Receiving a Text Message Note:

When you receive a message that is flagged with the Request Reply icon, you must manually respond to the sender that you have received the message. The system will not automatically send a notification to acknowledge that the message was received. The following methods are options on how to receive a text message. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Receiving a text message via the Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button:

a) When you receive a message, press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. Receiving a text message via the radio menu:

a) When the new message icon appears and the display shows momentary NEW MSG, press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the Inbox. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox The Inbox can hold up to thirty (30) messages. Note:

or to read the message if the content fills more than one screen. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. Press the Menu Select button directly below INBX. Press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 91 English Draft screen. Press the Menu Select button directly below INBX. The display shows the latest received message. 2 While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below RPLY, DEL, or BACK to access the option. Select RPLY to reply the message. Select DEL to delete the message. Select BACK to return to the previous screen. Note:

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators on page 38 for more information. Replying to a Received Text Message Note:

The original date and time stamp, address and message content is automatically appended to the reply message. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below RPLY to reply to a message. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below NEW to compose a new message. Press the Menu Select button directly below LIST to select a predefined message. or to scroll through the list of predefined messages and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to select the required message. One of the following scenarios occurs:

A blinking cursor appears on the Compose screen. The predefined message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. 3 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN once you have completed the message. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEND to send the message. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 92 English Draft The display shows the Send Message screen and SENDING MSG. Note:

Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK at any time to return to the previous screen. You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 88 for more information. Accessing the Drafts Folder This folder stores the messages that were saved previously. The Drafts folder can hold up to 10 messages. The oldest draft in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. 1 or to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Press the Menu Select button below DRFT. The display shows the latest drafted text message. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT, DEL, or BACK to access the option. Select EDIT to edit the message before sending it. Select DEL to delete the message. Select BACK to return to the previous screen. Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in the Sent folder. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent list. The Sent folder is capable of storing a maximum of ten (10) last sent messages. When the folder is full, the oldest message in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. Viewing a Sent Text Message 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. 93 English Draft or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 2 Press the Menu Select button below SENT. The display shows the latest sent message. 3 While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN, DEL or BACK to access the option. Select OPTN to configure the message settings. Select DEL to delete the message. Select BACK to return to the previous screen. Note:

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators on page 38 for more information. Sending a Sent Text Message 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN while viewing the message. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. or to [OTHER RECPNT] and press the Menu Select button below EDIT. When a blinking cursor appears in the ENTER ADDRESS screen, use the keypad to type the address entry. 4 Press the Menu Select button below SEND or the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the SEND MESSAGE screen and SENDING MSG. Note:

Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK at any time to return to the previous screen. You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 88 for more information. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 94 English Draft Deleting Text Messages Enabling Secure Transmission 1 From the Inbox, Draft, or Sent screen, or to 1 scroll through the messages. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below DEL to view the delete options. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below CURR to delete the current message. Press the Menu Select button directly below ALL to delete all the messages. Secure Operations Secure radio operation provides the highest commercially available level of voice security on both trunked and conventional channels. Unlike other forms of security, Motorola digital encryption provides signaling that makes it virtually impossible for others to decode any part of an encrypted message. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s or to SEC and press the Menu Select button directly below SEC. The display shows key has been enabled. and the current key if multi-

2 Monitor the mode to be sure it is not in use. 3 Press PTT button to transmit. Note:

If the selected channel is preprogrammed for clear-only operation when you press the PTT button, an invalid mode tone sounds and the display shows CLEAR TX only. The radio does not transmit until you disable the secure mode. The radio can be configured to ignore the clear voice or unsecured transmission when the radio is in secured transmission. Check with your agent for details. 95 English Draft Accessing the Secure Feature Press the Menu Select button below GROUP for 1 or to SEC. 2 Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below SEC to display Secure feature screen. The display shows the Secure screen. Managing Encryption Loading the Encryption Key(s) Note:

Refer to the key-variable loader (KVL) manual for equipment connections and setup. 1 Attach the KVL to your radio. The display shows KEYLOADING, and all other radio functions are locked out, except for power down, and volume. 2 Press the Menu Select button below TARGET. 3 Press the Menu Select button below LOAD. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button below KEY for single-key. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 96 English multikey. 5 or to the required key or group. 6 Press the Menu Select button below LOAD to load the key to your radio. When the key has been loaded successfully, one of the following scenarios occurs:

You hear a short tone for single-key radios. You hear an alternating tone for multikey radios. Multikey Feature This feature allows the radio to be equipped with different encryption keys and supports the DES-OFB algorithm. There are two types:

Conventional Multikey The encryption keys can be tied

(strapped), on a one-per-channel basis, through Customer Programming Software. In addition, you can have operator-selectable keys, operator-selectable keysets, and operator-selectable key Draft Trunked Multikey erasure. If talkgroups are enabled in conventional, then the encryption keys are strapped to the talkgroups. If the radio is used for both conventional and trunked applications, strap the encryption keys for trunking on a per-talkgroup or announcement-group basis. In addition, a different key can be strapped to other features, such as dynamic regrouping, failsoft, or emergency talkgroup. You can have operator-selectable key erasure. Selecting an Encryption Key 1 or to KEY. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below KEY. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. 3 or to scroll through the encryption keys or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to save the newly selected key and return to the Home screen. Press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. Turn the 16-Position Select knob to exit. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Note:

When the selected key is erased, you hear a momentary keyfail tone and the display shows KEY FAIL. When the selected key is not allowed, you hear a momentary illegal key tone and the display shows ILLEGAL KEY. Selecting a Keyset This feature allows you to select one or more groups of several encryption keys from among the available keys stored in the radio. For example, you could have a group of three keys structured to one keyset, and another group of three different keys structured to another keyset; by 97 English Draft changing keysets, you would automatically switch from one set of keys to the other. Every channel to which one of the original keys was tied now has the equivalent new key instead. or to KSET and press the Menu Select button directly below KSET. The display shows the last user-selected and stored keyset, and the available keyset menu selections. 1 2 or to scroll through the keysets or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired keyset. b) Erasing the Selected Encryption Keys This feature allows you to erase all or selected encryption keys. Erasing the selected encryption keys via the radio menu:

a) or to ERAS and press the Menu Select button directly below ERAS. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. or to the desired encryption key or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to save the newly selected keyset. The radio exits keyset selection and returns to the Home screen. Note:

, the PTT button, or the EXIT Press menu selection to exit this menu at any time without changing the keyset selection. c) Press the Menu Select button directly below ALL to delete all keys, or press the Menu Select button directly below SNGL to delete current shown key. You can abort this screen and return to Home screen by pressing the Menu Select button directly below ABRT. Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey (ASTRO Conventional Only) Ensure that the Unique Shadow Key (USK) is loaded into the radio with the key-variable loader (KVL) t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 98 English Draft before the rekey request can be sent. Refer to your local key management supervisor for more information. This feature, also known as OTAR, allows the dispatcher to reprogram the encryption keys in the radio remotely. The dispatcher performs the rekey operation upon receiving a rekey request from the user. 1 or to REKY. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below REKY. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the PTT button to send the rekey request. Press the PTT button again, or the or Emergency button, to exit the feature and transmit in normal mode. If the rekey operation fails, you hear a bad-key tone and the display shows REKEY FAIL. Note:

The rekey operation failure indicates that your radio does not contain the Unique Shadow Key (USK). MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) Page This feature allows you to view or define MDC Over-

the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) features. It is applied only when operating in secure encrypted mode and only for conventional communications. In additional to Rekey Requests, OTAR transmissions include Delayed Acknowledgements, and Power-up Acknowledgements. Some of the options selected may also need to be set up at the Key Management Controller (KMC) site to work properly. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Infinite UKEK Retention This feature enables Unique Key Encryption Key

(UKEK) to be permanently stored in the radio even A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 99 English Draft Random FM Noise Canceller

(Flutter Fighter) Expander signal at transmitting radio. Expands the speech while the noise flow remains the same at receiving radio. Reduces the unwanted effects of random FM noise pulses caused by channel fading under high Signal-to-

Noise (S/N) conditions such as in a moving transportation. The fading effects, heard as audio pops and clicks, are cancelled without affecting the desired audio signal. The Random FM Noise Canceller operates only in receive mode. when all of the encryption keys is erased. Without this UKEK key, the radio cannot be rekeyed over the air. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Hear Clear Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. There are two components of Hear Clear. Companding Reduces the channel noise, e.g. OTA transmission, that is predominantly present in UHF2 and 900 MHz channel with the following features. Compressor Reduces the background noise flow and the speech t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 100 English Draft Global Positioning System / Global Navigation Satellite System Note:

This feature is addressed as GPS across the manual as the naming convention of the buttons and strings remain the same as the legacy feature of GPS. The availability and accuracy of this location information (and the amount of time that it takes to calculate it) varies depending on the environment in which you are using the GPS feature. For example, GPS location fixes are difficult to obtain indoors, in covered locations, between high buildings, or in situations where you have not established a clear broad view of the sky. GPS Operation The GPS technology uses radio signals from earth orbiting satellites to establish location coordinates. Therefore, maximizing your view of unobstructed sky is essential for optimum performance. Where adequate signals from multiple satellites are not available (usually because you cannot establish a view of a wide area of the sky), the GPS feature of your radio will not work. Such situations include but are not limited to:

Inside buildings, trains, or covered vehicles Underground locations Under any metal, or concrete roof, or structure Between tall buildings or under dense tree-cover In temperature extremes outside the operating limits of your radio Even where location information can be calculated in such situations, it may take longer to do so, and your location estimate may not be as accurate. Therefore, in any emergency situation, always report your location to your dispatcher. Keep in mind that the accuracy of the location information and the time it takes to obtain it varies depending upon circumstances, particularly the ability to receive signals from an adequate number of satellites. Note:

Even where adequate signals from multiple satellites are available, your GPS feature only provides an approximate location, usually within 10 meters from your actual location, but sometimes farther away. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 101 English Draft The satellites used by the GPS feature are controlled by the U.S. government and are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense GPS user policy and the Federal Radio Navigation Plan. These changes may affect the performance of the GPS feature on your radio. GPS Performance Enhancement Sometimes, the GPS feature may be unable to complete a location calculation successfully. You then see a message indicating that your radio cannot connect to enough visible satellites. To maximize the ability of your radio to determine a fix, take note of the following guidelines:

For your initial fix, hold the radio in the face position. Stay in the open. The GPS feature works best where there is nothing between your radio and the open sky. The Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS) This feature allows you to determine your current location using a location menu, as well as your current distance and bearing in relation to another t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 102 English location. Radio location may be requested and reported over-the-air. Your radio stores up to a maximum of sixty (60) programmable location coordinates, also known as waypoints. When the memory is full, the next waypoints automatically replaces the oldest waypoints in the radio. The radio also stores four (4) preprogrammed waypoints. These coordinates cannot be deleted. The following table shows the differences between programmable waypoints and preprogrammed waypoints. Programmable Way-

points Preprogrammed Way-

points User-configurable loca-

tion coordinates. Fixed location coordi-

nates:

Home Emergency Last Known Location Destination Draft Programmable Way-

points Preprogrammed Way-

points Only the alias is editable, not the coordinates. Coordinates can be de-

leted one at a time, or all at once. The Home and Destina-

tion coordinates are edit-

able. Coordinates cannot be deleted. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature Note:

An ON radio menu may be present on the Location menu screen if it is preprogrammed by the dealer or system administrator. 1 or to LOC. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s The display shows LOCATION OFF <LATITUDE>. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below On to turn on the GPS. The display shows PREVIOUS LOC <LATITUDE>. 4 or to check the longitude, time and date of the last successful location fix. 5 To obtain a new location fix, press the Menu Select button directly below RFSH. The top line temporarily displays PLEASE WAIT while the new location is being determined. While the new location is being determined, the location signal can be a solid or blinking icon. The location coordinates are updated automatically every 5 seconds while the location signal is present. 6 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. Turning Off GPS 1 or to LOC. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOC. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOC. 103 English Draft The display shows PREVIOUS LOC <LATITUDE>. 3 or to check the time and date of the last successful location fix. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 5 or to TURN OFF GPS (if preprogrammed). 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to turn off the GPS. The display shows LOCATION OFF. 7 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. Saving a Waypoint Ensure that your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 104 English or to SAVE AS WAYPT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. or to SAVE AS HOME and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL and proceed to step 5. or to SAVE AS DEST. and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL and proceed to step 5. A blinking cursor appears in the screen. 3 Use the keypad to edit the auto-generated waypoint, if required, or press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to return to the Location main screen. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. One of the following scenarios occur:

The display shows SAVED AS <WAYPOINT NAME>. The display shows SAVED AS HOME. The display shows SAVED AS DEST.. Draft 5 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, the preprogrammed GPS button or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. 5 To view the longitude, time and date of the selected waypoint, or to VIEW and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. Viewing a Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 6 To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below BACK, or to return to the Home screen, press or the PTT button. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Editing the Alias of a Waypoint A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s OPTN. 2 or to WAYPOINTS and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the list. or to select a waypoint to view the location information in full. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 3 4 or to WAYPOINTS and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. or to EDIT NAME and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 105 English Draft A blinking cursor appears in the EDIT NAME screen. Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 5 Use the keypad to edit the alias. 6 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. Press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to return to the Waypoints main screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 or to WAYPOINTS and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

7 The display shows <WAYPOINT NAME> UPDATED or to [HOME] and press the Menu Select and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. 8 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to the previous screen. Press or the PTT button to return to the Home screen. Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint Note:

Only the preprogrammed coordinates of Home and Destination can be edited by the user. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 106 English button directly below OPTN. or to [DESTINATION] and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 4 or to EDIT LOCATION and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The first number blinks. 5 Utilize the following control buttons to select the number/coordinates if required, then press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT to change the number/coordinates. Draft Press to move to the previous number/

coordinates. Press to move to the next number/

coordinates. or Press to change the North (N), South

(S), East (E) or West (W) direction. A blinking cursor appears in the EDIT LOCATION screen. 6 Utilize the following control buttons or menu to change the number/coordinates if required then press the Menu Select button directly below OK once. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to return to the previous screen 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once complete setting up the new Home or Destination. One of the following scenarios occurs:

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s The display shows [HOME] UPDATED and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows [DESTINATION] UPDATED and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 or to WAYPOINTS and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select OPTN. or to Edit name and press the Menu Select button directly below Del. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del. 107 English Draft 4 The display shows <WAYPOINT NAME> CONFIRM 4 DEL?. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below YES to delete the waypoint or press the Menu Select button directly below NO to return to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows <WAYPOINT NAME> DELETED . Deleting All Saved Waypoints Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. Note:

You cannot delete any of the preprogrammed waypoints. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 3 or to WAYPOINTS and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 108 English or to DELETE ALL and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows ALL SAVED WAYP CONFIRM DEL?. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below YES to delete all waypoints or press the Menu Select button directly below NO to return to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows ALL SAVED WAYP DELETED. Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 3 or to DIST FRM HERE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required waypoint and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. Draft The display shows the distance and bearing from the current to the selected coordinates. Location Feature in Emergency Mode When the Emergency feature is activated by pressing the emergency button, the radio exits the Location menu and returns to the Home (default) screen so that you can see which channel the emergency signal is going out on. However, you may re-enter the Location menu while still in emergency mode, provided that Silent Emergency has not been activated. If you have turned Location off using the ON/OFF menu key, it automatically turns back on when Emergency is activated. If there is a solid location signal during Emergency, the current location and the location information received is saved as Emergency and Last Known Location waypoints, respectively. Peer-Location on the Display (ASTRO Conventional only) This feature is only available for radio-to-radio voice transmissions, dispatch call and selective call in conventional ASTRO system. For radio-to-radio transmission, in order to allow the radio to show peer-

location, the voice should be directly sent from one radio to another radio without passing through any infrastructure facility such as repeaters, phone or DVRS system. Both the transmitting radio and receiving radio must be configured to enable them to send and/or receive the GPS coordinates. You can check with your nearest qualified technician for more details. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Note:

If the receiving radio is operating in a Mixed Mode channel, and the voice transmission is via conventional ASTRO system then the radio can receive the location coordinates of its peers. This feature is also operable in a Scan Active channel or Scan Talkback channel. Upon receiving a voice transmission with GPS coordinates enabled on the receiving radio, the display shows the coordinates available in full or in short coordinates. There are two different formats available. Refer to the following list for the details shown in the Peer-Location quick text. Consult your agent to pick the best format to configure to your radio. 109 English Draft Full location coordinates PTT ID (This is optional.) Longitude and latitude Relative distance or direction. Short location coordinates PTT ID (This is optional.) Longitude and latitude Note:

If the transmitting radio is stale at its location after a period of time, the receiving radio display shows LAST KNWN LOC:

<Coordinates> <distance> on top of ID:<PTT ID>. The PTT ID seen here is optional to be shown on the display per requirement of usage. If the transmitting radio does not have GPS or the receiving radio could not decode the GPS signal of the received signal, the receiving radio display shows UNKNOWN LOC on top of ID:<PTT ID>. If the radio is not configured to show PTT ID, you see only UNKNOWN LOC. Geofence (ASTRO 25 Trunking System) Geofence is a virtual perimeter based on the GPS to define a geographical area on earth. Check with your dealer or qualified technician to programme the geofence coordinates and actions. When the radio enters the predefined Geofence area, your radio receives the Dynamic Regroup command from the system and immediately connects to a Dynamic Regroup talkgroup. The radio display shows the new selected Dynamic Regrouped talkgroup with green intelligent light for your attention. On top of that, additional features are Voice Announcement of the new channel, and also direct content display of a text message to indicate that you are currently at Geofence area. Check with your nearest qualified technician on the requirements for these enhancements to work in Geofence. Any new text messages received at Geofence shall have its content displayed immediately on the radio display. Note:

If the radio is set up in DVRS, only mobile radio is supported for this feature. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 110 English Draft Entering the Geofence Area The Voice Announcement and TMS display in this feature are optional. They must be configured to enable you to hear and see these indicators. When the radio enters a Geofence area, the radio immediately sends a message ACK back to the system. The radio searches the current zone for the channel with same talkgroup assigned as the Dynamic Talkgroup and also with same system ID of current trunk system. Once matched, the radio display shows the first matched and connected channel alias. If there is no channel with matching Talkgroup ID and trunk system ID, the radio display shows the channel alias of <DYNAMIC talkgroup>. Once the radio is connected, you hear a dynamic regroup tone, the radio display shows <DYNAMIC channel> with temporary green color intelligent backlight and you hear a Voice Announcement. Note:

When the radio loses the GPS signal, the GPS icon blinks and the radio sounds two high-

pitched tones repetitively to indicate that the A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s GPS has failed to operate. The radio display shows the red intelligent light. Note:

If the first matched channel is not configured with Voice Announcement, no Voice Announcement is played. The system sends a message to your radio. The radio display shows a direct text message content without any user operation. This message indicates you are currently present in a Geofence area. This TMS remains open on the display until user presses exit/

home to exit this screen. Note:

If there is another incoming text message before you exit the previous message, the message screen shall be refreshed to show the latest message. The following procedure guides you to exit the text message received. Press the Menu Select button below EXIT or to return to Home screen. The other operations are the same as normal dynamic regroup command. 111 English Draft When the radio exits the Geofence area, your radio reverts to original channel or newly assigned talkgroup. The radio display shows the new channel together with Voice Announcement to indicate the changes. Voice Announcement of the new channel only works if that channel is configured with Voice Announcement. Mission Critical Geofence This feature allows the radio to use the GPS receiver to determine radio location at frequent intervals. This feature also allows the radio to evaluate if the radio is within the Geofence area in real time. Check with your dealer or qualified technician to programme the geofence coordinates and actions. Entering Mission Critical Geofence When the radio enters the predefined Geofence area, the radio displays <Geofence Alias> with intelligent backlight and the user hears a Voice Announcement. Zone and channel alias of the Geofence area is displayed. If the radio is set to manual, the user can choose either to proceed with zone and channel change or cancel the change. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 112 English The radio then connects to the designated talkgroup. The radio displays the talkgroup alias and dynamic regroup tone sounds. The transmit power level changes and the radio shows a direct text message content without any user operation. Note:

Depending on how your radio is programmed, you may or may not be alerted by Voice Announcement (VA), TMS display, Intelligent Backlight, and the Transmit Power Level. The user will be alerted only if these indicators are configured in the radio. The VA can be programmed to alert continuously or momentarily. Note:

If Site Selectable Alert (SSA) is enabled, the radio mutes any alert that is received when entering the Geofence area and unmutes when exiting. Exiting Mission Critical Geofence When the radio exits the Geofence area, the radio reverts to the original transmit power level, intelligent lighting, channel or newly assigned talkgroup. Voice announcement is cancelled or the user hears a pre-

programmed VA tone. The radio displays the new Draft channel and a message is received to indicate the changes. Trunking System Controls Operating in Failsoft System The failsoft system ensures continuous radio communication during a trunked system failure. If a trunking system fails completely, the radio goes into failsoft operation and automatically switches to its failsoft channel. During failsoft operation, your radio transmits and receives in conventional operation on a predetermined frequency. You hear a medium-

pitched tone and the display shows FAILSOFT. When the trunking system returns to normal operation, your radio automatically leaves failsoft operation and returns to trunked operation. To continue in Failsoft and to communicate with other talkgroups, refer to the following procedure. 1 Rotate the Mode Knob to change to a different repeater frequency. 2 Press the PTT button to talk, and release the button to listen. Out-of-Range Radio When your radio goes out of the range of the system, it can no longer lock onto a control channel. You hear a low-pitched tone and/or the display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and OUT OF RANGE. Your radio remains in this out-of-

range condition until it locks onto a control channel, it locks onto a failsoft channel, or it is turned off. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s SmartZone The SmartZone feature extends communications beyond the reach of a single-trunked site (antenna location) when operating in a SmartZone system. SmartZone units provide expanded wide-area coverage. SmartZone automatically switches the radio to a different site when the current site signal becomes unacceptable. This usually happens when the vehicle in which the radio is located is driven out of the range of one site, and into the range of another. 113 English Draft Under normal conditions, a SmartZone-enabled radio functions invisibly to the operator. However, the operator does have some manual controls on the Control Head the RSSI menu entry. This button can be used to check, or change, the SmartZone operation. Site Trunking Feature If the zone controller loses communication with any site, that site reverts to site trunking. The display shows the currently selected zone/

channel combination and SITE TRUNKING. Note:

When this occurs, you can communicate only with other radios within your trunking site. Locking and Unlocking a Site This feature allows your radio to lock onto a specific site and not roam among wide-area talkgroup sites. This feature should be used with caution, since it inhibits roaming to another site in a wide-area system. You can toggle the lock state between locked and unlocked by pressing the preprogrammed Site Lock/

Unlock button. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 114 English Follow the procedure to lock and unlock a site via the radio menu. 1 or to SITE. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SITE. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

To lock the site, press the Menu Select button directly below LOCK. The display shows SITE LOCKED. To unlock the site, press the Menu Select button directly below UNLK. The display shows SITE UNLOCKED. The radio saves the new site lock state and returns to the Home screen. Site Display and Search Button The Site Display and Site Search button allows you to view the name of the current site or force your radio to change to a new one. Viewing the Current Site Perform one of the following actions:

Draft A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Press the preprogrammed Site Search button. or to RSSI and press the Menu Select button directly below RSSI. Announcement calls are handled in two different ways, depending on the trunked central controller configuration. The two types are called ruthless and non-ruthless preemption. The display shows momentarily the name of the current site and its corresponding received signal strength indicator (RSSI). Changing the Current Site Perform one of the following actions:

Press and hold down the preprogrammed Site Search button. Press and hold down the Menu Select button directly below RSSI. You hear a tone and the display shows momentary SCANNING SITE. When the radio finds a new site, it returns to the Home screen. Trunked Announcement The announcement capability allows you to make announcements to the entire user group, as well as monitor talkgroup calls and other announcements. Ruthless Preemption When a ruthless preemption announcement call is initiated, the requesting radio begins transmitting immediately. All associated talkgroup calls taking place on other channels are immediately halted, and the radios are steered to the announcement call. Transmitting radios continue to transmit until the PTT button is released, at which time they also unmute for the announcement call. Individual calls (Private Conversation and telephone interconnect) are not affected. Non-

Ruthless Preemption When a non-ruthless preemption announcement is initiated, the initiating unit receives a telephone-

type busy tone, followed by a call 115 English Draft back when all associated talkgroup conversations end. Once an announcement call is pending, any attempts by other users to initiate a talkgroup call will result in a telephone-type busy tone. These users will not receive a call back until the announcement call is complete. Initiating an Announcement Ensure your radio has been programmed to allow announcement calls. Blank This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the current state of the Ignition. Tx Inhibit This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the current state of the Ignition. In addition, if the Ignition is not present, then all transmissions are inhibited. This includes receiving any Trunking dispatch communications since the radio will not affiliate with the Trunking systems. 1 Turn the Mode Knob to locate the announcement-

PTT Tx Inhibit t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A group mode. 2 Press the PTT button to initiate the announcement. Ignition Switch Options This feature allows the user to select the functionality of the radio based on the Ignition State of the radio users vehicle. The following options are available. 116 English This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the current state of the Ignition. In addition, if the Ignition is not present, then all PTT button transmissions are inhibited. However, the radio is able to affiliate with the Trunking systems. Required This option allows the user to power on the radio only if the Ignition is present. The radio can be powered off either through Power button press or when Ignition is Draft lost. In addition, the radio automatically powers on when the Ignition is present only if the radio was turned off due to the ignition being removed. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. Soft Power Off This option allows the user to power on the radio either through Power button presses or when the Ignition is detected. Meanwhile, if the Power button was pressed or the Ignition was removed, the radio will be turned off. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. Ignition Only Power Up This option allows the user to power on the radio only when Ignition is detected and will power off when it is removed. The radio does not power on or off with the Power button press. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. Note:

While Ignition is not present, the radio powers-off with a radio-user Power Off button / knob selection if the radio was powered-up with an Emergency Power Up footswitch-press or Ignition Auto Power Off timer is running. While Ignition is present, the radio powers-on with a radio-user Power On button / knob selection only if the radio was powered-down with Inactivity Auto Power Off timer. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Using Emergency Power Up This feature allows the user to power on the radio and automatically transmits an emergency mode transmission on personalities with emergency enabled, with the use of a footswitch. In addition, when the Ignition Switch option is set to either Tx Inhibit or PTT Tx Inhibit, this feature will not be available to the users. Press the footswitch to turn on the radio and launch Emergency. A tone sounds and the display shows Emergency. 117 English Draft Auto Power Off Timer Auto Power Off feature powers off the radio when no user actions occur during a preprogrammed length of time. There are two different versions of Auto Power Off:

the timer expires or the timer is reset. The radio automatically powers off after the timer expires. The duration of the timer is preprogrammed. Voice Announcement Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer Ignition Auto Power Off Timer This timer begins once the radio is power-on. While the timer is active any user interaction with the radio resets the timer. This timer begins once the vehicle key is removed, when the voltage at the ignition sense is removed. While the timer is active any user interaction with the radio resets the timer. When the vehicle key is reapplied, the voltage at the ignition is reconnected, this timer is stopped. Although both Inactivity Auto Power Off and Ignition Auto Power Off can be enabled together, Ignition Auto Power Off timer is mutually exclusive with Inactivity Auto Power Off timer when both are enabled. During the last two minutes of the timer countdown, the radio generates continuous low tone and blinks Powering Off warning on the display until t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 118 English This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current feature mode, zone or channel the user has just assigned. This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This is typically useful when the user is having difficulty reading the content shown on the display. Each voice announcement is within a limit of three seconds maximum. The sum duration of all different voice announcements in a radio shall be no more than 1000 seconds. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your agent if Voice Announcement is available for the feature you need. The two options of priority for the Voice Announcement available are:

Draft High Enables the voice of the feature to announce even when the radio is receiving calls. Low Disables the voice of the feature from announcing when the radio is receiving calls. You hear a voice announcement when the features below are preprogrammed in the radio. The radio powers up. The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Press the preprogrammed voice announcement button (which specifically programmed to playback the current zone and channel). The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Note:

Pressing this preprogrammed playback button enables the voice feature to announce in High priority. All the three programmable buttons at the side of the radio support this feature. Change to a new zone. The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Change to a new channel remaining within the current zone. The radio announces the current channel. Press either the Menu Select button or preprogrammed button or switch of the radio to launch or terminate Scan, PL Disabled, Talkaround/Direct or Transmit Inhibit. The radio announces the corresponding feature activation or deactivation. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Site Selectable Alerts (ASTRO 25) A Site Selectable Alert (SSA) is an Intelligent Lighting indicator together with audio alert sent to radios at a site or a few sites to notify the users when there is a special situation that they need to be aware of. Only authorized radios are enabled to send SSA. Upon the activation of a SSA, the receiving radios display the alert alias and generate the periodic alert tone. Note:

Alert alias, alert tone, and alert period can be preprogrammed. Alert period is the duration for the radio to repeat the alert tone. An interval of 5 seconds might impact the battery 119 English Draft life of the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details. When mixing SSA with received voice audio, the SSA alert is reduced in volume to ensure that the voice message is still heard clearly. Therefore, it is important that the SSA audio files are created with clear loud audio to ensure they can still be heard clearly when played at reduced levels. Sending SSA Notification to Single Site 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to START ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to the desired Site Alias. Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Alert screen. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 120 English 5 or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. The display shows SENDING REQ. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows REQ FAILED. If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. If the site is not available, the display shows <SITE ALIAS> NOT AVAILABLE. If the site does not exist, the display shows <SITE ALIAS> DOES NOT EXIST. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <ALERT ALIAS> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Draft Sending SSA Notification to Single Site Via Manual Entry 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to START ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [SITEID ENTRY] to send alert via manual entry. Press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. The display shows the Enter SiteID screen. 5 Key in the desired Site ID and press the Menu Select button directly below OK. If a correct Site ID is entered, the display shows the Select Alert screen. If a wrong Site ID is entered, the display shows INVALID ID and prompts to enter the Site ID again. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 6 or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. The display shows SENDING REQ. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows REQ FAILED. If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. If the site is not available, the display shows <SITE ID> NOT AVAILABLE. If the site does not exist, the display shows <SITE ID> DOES NOT EXIST. 7 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <ALERT ALIAS> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Sending SSA Notification to All Sites 1 or to SSA. 121 English Draft 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 5 or to START ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All SITES] and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired <Alert Alias> and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. The display shows SENDING REQ. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows REQ FAILED. If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. If one or more sites are unavailable, the display shows NOT ALL SITES AVAILABLE. Repeat 3. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <ALERT ALIAS> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Sending SSA Notification to All Available Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 5 or to START ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All AVAIL] and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired <Alert Alias> and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. The display shows SENDING REQ. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows REQ FAILED. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 122 English Draft If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <ALERT ALIAS> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to STOP ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to select the desired Site Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. The display shows SENDING REQ. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows REQ FAILED. If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. If the site is not available, the display shows <SITE ALIAS> NOT AVAILABLE. If the site does not exist, the display shows <SITE ALIAS> DOES NOT EXIST. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. The SSA Alert for the designated site stops. Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site Via Manual Entry 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 or to STOP ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 123 English Draft The display shows the Select Site screen. Stopping SSA Notification of All Sites 4 or to [SITEID ENTRY] and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. The display shows the Enter SiteID screen. 5 Key in the required Site ID and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. One of the following scenarios occur:

If a wrong Site ID is entered, the display shows INVALID ID and prompts to enter the Site ID again. If a correct Site ID is entered, the display shows SENDING REQ. If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. If the single site is not available, the display shows <SITE ID> NOT AVAILABLE. If the single site does not exist, the display shows <SITE ID> DOES NOT EXIST. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. The SSA Alert for the designated site stops. 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to STOP ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [ALL SITES] and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. The display shows SENDING REQ. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows REQ FAILED. If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. If one or more sites are not available, the display shows NOT ALL SITES AVAILABLE. Repeat step 3. 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 124 English Draft The SSA Alert for all sites stop. Stopping SSA Notification of All Available Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to STOP ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All AVAIL] and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. The display shows SENDING REQ. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows REQ FAILED. If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. The SSA Alert for all available sites stop. Channel Change on Off Hook on All Channels This feature enables the mode of the radio to be changed based on the HUB on/off-hook state on all control heads. Whenever the radio goes off-hook, the radio changes to a preprogrammed zone channel specifically for off-

hook state. When the user returns the radio to on-

hook state, it reverts to its previous channel zone before the radio goes off-hook. When the radio is in off-hook state, manual mode change (including mode change triggered by third party devices) is allowed. Radio reverts back to the last mode before off-hook once the radio goes on-

hook. Note:

During PL Defeats and Suspend Scan during on-hook state, the radio is converted to work in new channel and Channel Change on Off Hook feature is suspended until these conditions end. We do not recommend that Hub Suspend Scan" and "Channel Change on Off Hook" to be enabled simultaneously. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 125 English Draft During Dynamic Regroup channel selector lock state, Emergency, Transmit Inhibit, radio lock, or when external key loaded is attached to the radio, the Channel Change on Off Hook feature is suspended until these conditions end. The Off Hook State for APX Dual Radio Setup For Dual Radio, the state of the HUB on the unselected radio is always considered as on-hook. The state of the HUB of the selected radio is always reflected as the actual states of the HUB. When the HUB is placed off-

hook, the selected radio makes channel change per CPS configuration, and the unselected radio does not trigger channel change. With Channel Change on Off Hook enabled, when the HUB is placed off-

hook, and there is radio switch, the new selected radio moves to the target channel zone on off hook, and the new unselected radio reverts to the last user selected channel before off-hook. The Off Hook State for Multiple Radios Setup When there are multi-control heads connected, the states of these HUBs reflect the active control head(s) state. Any HUB placed off-hook by active control head(s) makes the radio goes off-hook state. Only when all HUBs are placed on-hook, the radio can be in on-

hook state. Note:

This feature needs to be carefully enabled. Users must also be familiar with the functionality of this feature as they have to be aware that removing the microphone triggers mode change most of the time. Low Voltage Threshold Warning This feature is created for APX mobile radio to provide warning for low voltage threshold. A specific external device is attached to the radio to monitor the automobile voltage. When the car battery went lower than a pre-defined threshold, the external device asserts the Vehicular Interface Port (VIP) input to the radio. When the voltage of the battery becomes t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 126 English Draft A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s normal, the external device de-asserts the VIP input to the radio. Wi-Fi The voltage threshold is customized in the external device settings. When the VIP switch turns on, the VIP asserts input to the radio. The radio immediately initiates a 15 seconds of low Voltage Pre-alert Timer. If the status of the VIP changed before this time-out timer ends, the radio returns to normal operation. If the status from the VIP unchanged when the time-

out timer ends, the radio shows LOW BATTERY on the display and also sounds low battery/voltage alert tone. The radio sounds a short, high-pitched tone immediately after the PTT button is released. Note:

If the mobile radio does not have a control head connected, the bricks can only alert the user with battery alert tone and the transmit chirp. This feature allows you to turn Wi-Fi on or off. Wi-Fi can be used for wireless programming of the radio with the Radio Management tool. [3]

Note:

Wi-Fi Network Name (SSID) for the radio to connect to must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information Turning Wi-Fi On or Off The following methods are options on how to turn Wi-

Fi on or off. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Turning Wi-Fi on or off via the preprogrammed button:

3 This feature is available to capable and ordered option. 127 English Draft a) To toggle the Wi-Fi on or off, press the preprogrammed Wi-Fi button. This button must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Turning Wi-Fi on or off via the radio menu button:

a) or to WiFi and press the Menu Select button directly below WiFi. If the display shows WiFi Status being Off, press the Menu Select button directly below On. If the display shows WiFi Status as Searching, Connecting, Connected or No Service, press the Menu Select button directly below Off to turn Wi-Fi off. Checking the Wi-Fi Configuration and Status of the Radio 1 Perform one of the following actions:

The display shows the current status of the Wi-Fi as described next. Searching Looking for available Wi-Fi networks that have been preprogrammed into the radio. Connecting In the process of connecting to a found Wi-Fi network. Connected Connected to one of the preprogrammed Wi-Fi networks. No Service No available networks or connection with one of the networks failed. If the radio is Wi-Fi connected, you see a Wi-Fi on the display.In signal strength indicator, addition, the WiFi menu shows Connected under the connection Status heading, what network you are connected to under the Network heading, and the signal strength to that network under the Sig Strength heading. Long press the preprogrammed Wi-Fi button. or to WiFi and press the Menu Select button directly below WiFi. 2 Press to exit. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 128 English Draft Utilities Viewing Recent Calls This feature allows you to view the recent incoming and outgoing call information of the following call types:

Call Alert Selective Call Private Call Phone Call (Outgoing Only) Note:

The radio can also be preprogrammed to log only the radio IDs associated with incoming Dispatch Calls. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Viewing recent calls via the radio menu:

a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below or to RCNT. RCNT to access the RECENT CALLS feature screen. or to scroll through the list. c) d) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below BACK, PTT button. or the The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Selecting the Power Level Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. This feature enables you to reduce the transmit power level for specific case that requires a lower power level. You can select the power level at which your radio transmits. The radio always turns on to the default setting. Power level LOW enables a shorter transmitting distance and to conserve power. Power level HIGH enables a longer transmitting distance. The following methods are options on how to select the power level. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably 129 English Draft depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Selecting the Power Level via the Transmit Power Level switch:

a) Use the preprogrammed Transmit Power Level switch to toggle the power level between low and high power. Selecting the Power Level via the radio menu:

or to PWR. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below PWR. The display shows LOW POWER and the low power icon or the display shows HIGH POWER and the high power icon. Selecting a Radio Profile This feature allows you to manually switch the visual and audio settings of the radio. The display, backlight, alert tones, and audio settings are defined according to the preprogrammed radio settings of each radio profile. Please refer to a qualified technician for more information. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 130 English Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. The following methods are options on how to select a radio profile. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Selecting a radio profile via the preprogrammed Profile button:

a) Press the preprogrammed Profile button. b) c) Press the Menu Select button directly below or to scroll through the menu selections. SEL to select the required radio profile, or press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to exit the screen without making any changes. The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Selecting a radio profile via the radio menu:

Draft a) or to PRFL and press the Menu Select button directly below PRFL to access the Profiles feature screen. or to scroll through the menu selections. b) c) Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to select the required radio profile, or press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to exit the screen without making any changes. The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Controlling the Display Backlight You can enable or disable the radios display backlight as needed, if poor light conditions make the display or keypad difficult to read. Depending on how your radio is preprogrammed, you can also maintain a minimum backlight level on the radio's front display. Perform one of the following actions:

To toggle the backlight on or off, press the DIM button. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s To turn the backlight on, press any key of the keypad, the Menu Select or Menu Navigation buttons, or any programmable radio controls or buttons Turning the Keypad Tones On or Off You can enable and disable keypad tones as needed. Turning the tones on or off via the preprogrammed Keypad Mute button:

a) To turn the tones off or on, press the preprogrammed Keypad Mute button. Turning the tones on or off via the radio menu:

or to MUTE. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below MUTE. The display shows momentary TONES OFF, indicating that the tones are disabled or the display shows momentary TONES ON, and you hear a short tone indicating that the tones are enabled. 131 English Draft Turning Voice Mute On or Off You can enable and disable voice transmission, if needed. Turning Voice Mute off or on via the preprogrammed Voice Mute button:

a) To turn the feature off or on, press the preprogrammed Voice Mute button. Turning Voice Mute on or off via the radio menu:

a) or to VMUT and press the Menu Select button directly below VMUT. The display shows momentary VOICE MUTE OFF, and you hear a short tone, indicating that the feature is disabled or the display shows momentary VOICE MUTE ON, and you hear a short tone, indicating that the feature is enabled. Using the Time-Out Timer This feature turns off the transmitter of your radio. You cannot transmit longer than the preset timer setting. If you attempt to do so, the radio automatically stops your transmission, and you hear a talk-prohibit tone. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 132 English The timer is defaulted at 60 seconds, but it can be preprogrammed from 3 to 120 seconds, in 15-second intervals, or it can be disabled entirely for each radio mode, by a qualified radio technician. Note:

You hear a brief, low-pitched, warning tone four seconds before the transmission times out. 1 Hold down the PTT button longer than the preprogrammed time. You hear a short, low-pitched warning tone, the transmission is cut-off, and the LED goes out until you release the PTT button. 2 Release the PTT button. The timer resets. 3 To re-transmit, press the PTT button. The time-out timer restarts and the LED lights up solid red. Using Conventional Squelch Operation Features This feature filters out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels that have a higher than normal background noise. Draft 4 Press to return to the selected channel. Selective Switch 1 or to SQL. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SQL. The display shows SQUELCH XX, where XX is the value for the current squelch. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below

+ to increase the squelch volume. Press the Menu Select button directly below -

to decrease the squelch volume. Analog Options Tone Private Line (PL), Digital Private-Line (DPL), and carrier squelch can be available

(preprogrammed) per channel. Mode Result Carrier squelch (C) PL or DPL You hear all traffic on a channel. The radio responds only to your messages. Digital Options One or more of the following options may be preprogrammed in your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Option Result Digital Carrier-Operated Squelch (COS) You hear any digital traf-

fic. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Normal Squelch You hear any digital traf-

fic having the correct net-

work access code. You hear any digital traf-

fic having the correct net-

work access code and correct talkgroup. Using the PL Defeat Feature This feature allows you to override any coded squelch

(DPL or PL) that might be preprogrammed to a channel. The radio also unmutes to any digital activity on a digital channel. Place the preprogrammed PL Defeat switch in the PL Defeat position. 133 English Draft One of the following scenarios occurs:

You hear any activity on the channel. The radio is muted if no activity is present. Note:

When this feature is active, the Carrier Squelch status indicator is displayed. Digital PTT ID Support This feature allows you to see the radio ID (number) of the radio from whom you are currently receiving a transmission. This ID, consisting up to a maximum of eight characters, can be viewed by both the receiving radio and the dispatcher. The ID number of your radio is also automatically sent every time the PTT button is pressed. This is a per-

channel feature. For digital voice transmissions, the ID of your radio is sent continuously during the voice message. Smart PTT Feature (Conventional Only) Smart PTT is a per-personality, programmable feature used in conventional radio systems to keep radio users from talking over other radio conversations. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 134 English When smart PTT is enabled in your radio, you cannot transmit on an active channel. If you try to transmit on an active smart-PTT channel, you hear an alert tone, and the transmission is inhibited. The LED lights up solid yellow to indicate that the channel is busy. The following table shows the variations of smart PTT:

Mode Description Transmit Inhibit on Busy Chan-

nel with Carrier Transmit Inhibit on Busy Chan-

nel with Wrong Squelch Code Quick-Key Over-

ride You cannot transmit if any traffic is detected on the channel. You cannot transmit on an active channel with a squelch code or (if secure-equipped) encryption key other than your own. If the PL code is the same as yours, the transmission is not prevented. Your radio must be preprogram-

med to allow you to use Quick-

Key Override. This feature can work in conjunction with either of the two above variations. You Draft Mode Description can override the transmit-inhibit state by quick-keying the radio. In other words, two PTT button presses within the preprogram-

med time limit. Transmit Inhibit This feature is available for APCO 25 trunking, Type II trunking and Conventional operations for all APX radios. When Transmit Inhibit feature is enabled, the radio stops all transmission including voice and data. The radio can receive messages but is not able to reply the acknowledgment request of the received message. User can physically control the transmission of the radio especially during operation in hazardous environments with this feature. An environment is considered hazardous when the power emitted by the radio power amplifier could initiate an explosion or other dangerous reactions. When the Transmit Inhibit feature is disabled, the radio functions according to its normal operations. The radio sounds alert tone when user enters or exits this feature and also when PTT is pressed. Note:

Acknowledgement of any messages required from the radio is not transmitted if the Transmit Inhibition is enabled. Enabling Transmit Inhibition A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Perform one of the following actions:

or to TXIN. Press the Menu Select button below TXIN. Turn off the ignition through Ignition Sense Line. Note:

If the user has disabled TX Inhibit via the menu and then moves the switch to the position where TX Inhibit is enabled, the new value overwrites the menu value. The display shows TX INHIBIT ON. You hear a sequence of short, low-high tones to indicate transmission is inhibited. Pressing PTT triggers the radio sounds a constant short, low-pitched tone (reject tone). 135 English Draft Note:

The status of the Transmit Inhibit does not change after the radio powers up. The softkey TXIN is created to ease the user of inhibition transmission besides relying solely on Ignition Sense Line. Only if the Ignition Sense Line is on, the softkey TXIN works. If the Ignition Sense Line is on, user can always turn on or off the Transmit Inhibition using the softkey TXIN; but when the Ignition Sense Line is off, function of softkey TXIN is suspended, and the Transmit Inhibition function is always off. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A If PTT TX Inhibit is enabled, when using multi control head with one active configuration, with the PTT pressed on the active control head, any press on the programmable button of the other control head which meant for that control head to be active control head will cause an unstoppable long low-pitched tone (Talk Prohibit Tone). The display shows TX INHIBIT This behavior can be stopped by pressing PTT button again on the active control head Disabling Transmit Inhibition Perform one of the following actions:

136 English or to TXIN. Press the Menu Select button below TXIN. Turn on the ignition through Ignition Sense Line. Note:

If the user has disabled TX Inhibit via the softkey and then moves the switch to the position where TX Inhibit is enabled, the new value overwrites the menu value. The display shows TX INHIBIT OFF. You hear a sequence of short, high-low tone (Transmit Inhibit Off tone) to indicate transmission is back to normal operation. General Radio Information Your radio contains information on the following:

Radio Information Control Assignments IP Display Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You Draft hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Accessing the Radio Information This feature displays the following radio information:

Host Version Secure Version CH 1 4 Version (depending on the number of channels connected.) Siren Version Model Number ESN Flash Code Tuning Version DSP Version KG (Secure Algorithm) Serial Number Flash Size & Type RF Band(s) Processor Version MCHIB Version CHIB Version TIB Version TRC Version A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s VRS Version URC Version DVRS App Version (only when DVRS is available) DVRS DSP Version (only when DVRS is available) DVRS CP Version (only when DVRS is available) AUX CH Version Note:

To return to the Home screen, press time. at any 1 2 or to INFO and press the Menu Select button directly below INFO. or to RADIO INFO and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Information screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the various information. Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to the previous screenp. to return to the Home screen . Press 137 English Draft Viewing the IP Information Viewing the Control Assignments This feature displays the device name, IP address, and status of your radio. Note:

The device name of your radio is preprogrammed. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. This feature displays the programmable radio functions assigned to the controls of your radio for the currently selected channel. See Programmable Features on page 23 for more information on the various programmable features of your radio. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Info button. or to INFO and press the Menu Select button directly below INFO. 2 or to IP INFO and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the various information. Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to the previous screen. Press to return to the Home screen. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A Press the preprogrammed Info button. or to INFO and press the Menu Select button directly below INFO. 2 or to CONTROL MAP and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Control Map screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the various information. Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to the previous screen. Press to return to the Home screen. 138 English Draft A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s External Alarms (Horn and Lights) Using Permanent Horn and Lights All control heads can be equipped for external alarms

(horn and lights) that are activated when a Call Alert page, Private Conversation call, or phone call is received. The radio always powers up with the horn and lights feature enabled. Note:

The horn and lights feature must be enabled by a qualified radio technician. Using Non-Permanent Horn and Lights 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily. The last selected alarm(s) are enabled, and the display shows the enabled alarm(s) alternating with the selected mode, until it is turned off. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to turn off the alarm(s). The display shows HORN/LITES OFF. If Permanent Horn and Lights is enabled, horn and lights will automatically turn on when the radio powers up. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L once to turn off the alarm(s). 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to enable the last selected alarm(s). The display briefly shows the enabled alarms, and then reverts back to the selected mode. Changing the Selected Alarms 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L until the display shows the required alarm. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below H

+L to turn on both horn and lights. Press the Menu Select button directly below Lgts to turn on the lights. Press the Menu Select button directly below Horn to turn on the horn. 139 English Draft One of the following scenarios occurs:

If you choose H+L, the display shows HORN/

LITES ON. If you choose LGTS, the display shows LIGHTS ON. If you choose HORN, the display shows HORN ON. An OFF entry is shown at the softkey when one of the alarms is active. Selecting OFF deactivates the current active alarm. Receiving a Call While Alarms are Turned On When you receive a call with the Alarms turned on, you hear the vehicles horn sounds for four seconds, and/or the car lights turn on for 60 seconds. The display shows the type of call received (CALL, PAGE, or PHONE) and the selected mode name. The time interval can be modified by a qualified radio technician. Turning Off Non-Rearmable External Alarms 1 Perform one of the following actions:

t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 140 English Press the Menu Select button directly below CALL, PAGE or PHON to turn off the external alarm(s) and access that feature. Press the PTT button or any control-head button to turn off the external alarm(s). The Volume Knob and the DIM button have no effect on the state of the external alarm(s). 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to rearm the horn and lights feature. Turning Off Rearmable External Alarms Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below CALL, PAGE or PHON to turn off the external alarm(s) and access that feature. The external alarm(s) is turned off and automatically rearmed so that when you exit the entry, the external alarm(s) will automatically turn on. Press the PTT button or any control head button other than the Menu Select button directly below H/L to turn off the external alarm(s). The external alarm(s) is turned off and automatically rearmed so that when you Draft exit the entry, the external alarm(s) will automatically turn on. Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L to turn off the external alarm(s) and exit the Horn and Lights feature. Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to rearm the horn and lights feature. The Volume Knob and the DIM button have no effect on the state of the external alarm(s). A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 141 English Draft Helpful Tips Radio Care The following are suggestions to assist you in troubleshooting possible operating problems. Caution:

The cables that connect to the rear of the radio could have live voltage on some of their pins. Do not remove or reconnect these cables. Only a qualified radio technician should perform this task. Service performed by unauthorized personnel may cause the radio to transmit an emergency alarm even if the unit is turned off. If your radio is locked up or the display shows FAIL 01/09, turn the radio off and then back on. If this does not correct the condition, take the radio to a qualified radio technician for service. If radio operation is intermittent, check with other persons using the system for similar problems before taking the radio in for service. Similar problems indicate a system malfunction rather than a radio failure. If symptoms persist or, if your unit exhibits other problems, contact a qualified radio technician. Cleaning the External Surface of the Radio Caution:

Do not use solvents to clean your radio. Spirits may permanently damage the radio housing. Do not submerge the radio in detergent solution. 1 Combine one teaspoon of mild diswashing detergent to one gallon of water (0.5% solution). 2 Apply the solution sparingly with a stiff, non-

metallic, short-bristled brush, making sure excess detergent does not get entrapped near the connectors, controls or crevices. 3 Dry the radio thoroughly with a soft, lint-free cloth. Cleaning the External Plastic Surface The detergent-water solution should be applied sparingly with a stiff, non-metallic, short-bristled brush to work all loose dirt away from the radio. s p T i l u f p e H l 142 English Draft A soft, absorbent, lint-free cloth or tissue should be used to remove the solution and dry the radio. Make sure that no water remains entrapped near the connectors, cracks, or crevices. H e p l f u l i T p s 143 English Draft Accessories The accessory link below is for APX radios. Not all accessories are FCC certified to operate with all APX models and/or bandsplits. Please refer to the specific APX radio price pages for a list of FCC certified accessories or contact your sales representative for accessory compatibility. http://www.motorolasolutions.com/APX Note:

GPS only antenna is only used in either a single band UHF or 700/800 application where the Public Safety Microphone (PSM) is used with the corresponding PSM antenna. This antenna is only for GPS reception and cannot be used for receive/transmit operation at UHF, VHF or 700/800. This antenna is never to be used on the PSM. s e i r o s s e c c A 144 English Draft Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:

1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. 3 Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. 4 WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:

latitude and longitude bearing (state whether you are using true or magnetic north) distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination 5 State the nature of the distress. 6 Specify what kind of assistance you need. 7 State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. 9 OVER. 10 Wait for a response. 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. Non-Commercial Call Channel For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9. Operating Frequency Requirements M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:

145 English Draft on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency. on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:

in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025 157.425 MHz frequency band, and in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. Note:

Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard. Table 1: VHF Marine Channel List Channel Num-

Frequency (MHz) ber Transmit Receive e g n a R y c n e u q e r F F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M 146 English 1 2

*

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13**

14 15**

16 17**

156.050 156.100 156.150 156.200 156.250 156.300 156.350 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 160.650 160.700 160.750 160.800 160.850 160.950 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 Draft 18 19 20

*

22

*

24 25 26 27 28 60

*

62 63

*

65 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 157.150 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.275 161.500 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 161.750 161.800 161.850 161.900 161.950 162.000 160.625 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 160.875 66 67**

68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 77**

78 79 80

*

*

*

156.325 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 156.675 156.725

***

***

156.875 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 160.925 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.675 156.725

***

***

161.525 161.575 161.625 161.675 161.725 161.775 M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e 147 English Draft maritime use when it operates on the distress and safety frequencies specified in RSS-182 Section 7.3. Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources RS232 18V USB 3.6V SB9600 5V Input Volt-

age (Volts Peak-to-

peak) Max Data 115 Kbps 12 Mbps 9.6 Kbps Rate Impedance 5000 Ohm 90 Ohm 120 Ohm 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425 161.825 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025 84 85 86 87 88 Note:

* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.

** Low power (1 W) only.

*** Guard band. Note:

A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies The radio equipment does not employ a modulation other than the internationally adopted modulation for e g n a R y c n e u q e r F F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M 148 English Draft Glossary This glossary is a list of specialized terms used in this manual. ACK Acknowledgment of communication. Active Channel A channel that has traffic on it. Analog Signal ARS ASTRO 25 ASTRO Conventional Autoscan An RF signal that has a continuous nature rather than a pulsed or discrete nature. Automatic Registration Service Motorola standard for wireless digital trunked communications. Motorola standard for wireless digital conventional communications. A feature that allows the radio to automatically scan the members of a scan list. Call Alert Carrier Squelch l G o s s a r y Privately page an individual by sending an audible tone. Feature that responds to the presence of an RF carrier by opening or unmuting (turning on) a receivers audio circuit. A squelch circuit silences the radio when no signal is being received so that the user does not have to listen to noise. Central Controller A software-controlled, computer-driven device that receives and generates data for the trunked radios assigned to it. It monitors and directs the operations of the trunked repeaters. A group of characteristics such as transmit/ receive frequency pairs, radio parameters, and encryption encoding. Channel AUX CH Auxiliary Control Head CHIB Control Head Interface Board 149 English Draft Control Channel Conventional In a trunking system, one of the channels that is used to provide a continuous, two-way/

data communications path between the central controller and all radios on the system. Typically refers to radio-to-

radio communications, sometimes through a repeater

(see Trunking). Conventional Scan List A scan list that includes only conventional channels. CP Cursor Deadlock Codeplug A visual tracking marker (a blinking line) that indicates a location on the display. Displayed by the radio after three failed attempts to unlock the radio. The radio must be powered off and on prior to another attempt. Digital Private Line (DPL) A type of coded squelch using data bursts. Similar to PL Digital Signal Dispatcher DSP Dynamic Regrouping DVRS ESN Failsoft except a digital code is used instead of a tone. An RF signal that has a pulsed, or discrete, nature, rather than a continuous nature. An individual who has radio system management duties. Digital Signal Processing A feature that allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a single special channel so they can communicate with each other. Digital Vehicular Repeater System Electrical Serial Number A feature that allows communications to take place even though the central controller has failed. Each trunked repeater in the system transmits a data word informing y r a s s o G l 150 English Draft every radio that the system has gone into failsoft. Monitor FCC FM Federal Communications Commission. Frequency Modulation Hang Up Disconnect. Home screen KVL LCD LED MCHB Menu Entry The first display information after the radio completes its self test. Key-variable loader: A device for loading encryption keys into the radio. Liquid crystal display. Light-emitting diode. Millennium Control Head Board A software-activated feature shown at the bottom of the display selection of these features is controlled by the button. Multi-System Talkgroup Scan List Network Access Code Non-Tactical/

Revert l G o s s a r y Check channel activity by pressing the Monitor button. If the channel is clear, you hear static. If the channel is in use, you hear conversation. It also serves as a way to check the volume level of the radio, since the radio opens the squelch when the monitor button is pressed. A scan list that can include both talkgroups (trunked) and channels (conventional). Network Access Code (NAC) operates on digital channels to reduce voice channel interference between adjacent systems and sites. The user talks on a preprogrammed emergency channel. The emergency alarm is sent out on this same channel. OTAR Over-the-air rekeying. 151 English Draft Page Personality A one-way alert, with audio and/or display messages. A set of unique features specific to a radio. PIN Personal Identification Number Preprogrammed Private

(Conversation) Call Private Line (PL) Programmable PTT Refers to a software feature that has been activated by a qualified radio technician. A feature that lets you have a private conversation with another radio user in the talkgroup. A sub-audible tone that is transmitted such that only receivers decoding the tone receives it. Refers to a radio control that can have a radio feature assigned to it. Push-To-Talk. The PTT button engages the transmitter and puts the radio in transmit Radio Frequency

(RF) Repeater Selective Call Selective Switch

(send) operation when pressed. The part of the general frequency spectrum between the audio and infrared light regions (about 10 kHz to 10,000,000 MHz). A conventional radio feature, where you talk through a receive/transmit facility that re-

transmits received signals, in order to improve communications range and coverage. A feature that allows you to call a selected individual, intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations of no interest to you. Any digital P25 traffic having the correct Network Access Code and the correct talkgroup. y r a s s o G l 152 English Draft Squelch Standby Status Calls Tactical/ Non-

Revert Talkaround Talkgroup Special electronic circuitry, added to the receiver of a radio, that reduces, or cuts off, unwanted signals before they are heard in the speaker. An operating condition whereby the radios speaker is muted but still continues to receive data. Pre-defined text messages that allow the user to send a conditional message without talking. The user talks on the channel that was selected before the radio entered the emergency state. Bypass a repeater and talk directly to another unit for easy local unit-to-unit communications. An organization or group of radio users who communicate TMS Trunking Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List USK UTC with each other using the same communication path. Text Messaging Service The automatic sharing of communications paths between a large number of users (see Conventional). A scan list that includes talkgroups that are all from the same trunking system. Unique Shadow Key. Coordinated Universal Time. The international time standard

(formerly Greenwich Mean Time, or GMT). Zero hours UTC is midnight in Greenwich, England, which is located at 0 degrees longitude. Everything east of Greenwich (up to 180 degrees) is later in time;

everything west is earlier. There are 42 time authorities around the world that are constantly synchronizing with l G o s s a r y 153 English Draft each other. Abbreviated as UTC (English backronym =

Universal Time, Coordinated), it is also known as Zulu (Z) Time. Vehicular Repeater System A grouping of channels. VRS Zone y r a s s o G l 154 English Draft Limited Warranty MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

ASTRO APX Mobile Ra-

dios One (1) Year Product Accessories One (1) Year MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. 155 English Draft MOTOROLA offers the following optional extended service contracts. SERVICE FROM THE START (SfS) COMPREHENSIVE Provides for extended hardware repair coverage INCLUDING CHEMICAL, LIQUID, FIRE, AND OTHER PHYSICAL DAMAGE. Comprehensive coverage is available in conjunction with MOTOROLAS standard Commercial Warranty and starts from the FIRST DAY the radio is put into use. Service performed under this plan consists of repair or replacement of the covered equipment as set forth in the terms and conditions. Repairs will be made only at the designated MOTOROLA repair depot. Local services are not included. MOTOROLA will pay the inbound shipping charges only with use of the MOTOROLA designated delivery service. MOTOROLA will pay for outbound shipping via MOTOROLA'S normal shipping methods. SERVICE FROM THE START (SfS) LITE Provides extended hardware normal wear and tear repair coverage beginning AFTER MOTOROLAS standard Commercial Warranty period expires. Service performed under this plan consists of repair of the covered equipment as set forth in the terms and conditions. Repairs will be made only at the designated MOTOROLA repair depot. Local services are not included. MOTOROLA will pay for outbound shipping via MOTOROLA'S normal shipping methods. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAs option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 156 English Draft i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at 1-800-927-2744 US/Canada. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

1 Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. 2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. 3 Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. 4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. 5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with MOTOROLA's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. 6 Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. 157 English Draft 7 Rechargeable batteries if:

any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. 8 Freight costs to the repair depot. 9 A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAs published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. 10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. 11 Normal and customary wear and tear. VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA will y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 158 English pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

1 that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim, 2 that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise, and 3 should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAs opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the Draft combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. VII. GOVERNING LAW:

This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. VIII. For Australia Only This warranty is given by Motorola Solutions Australia Pty Limited (ABN 16 004 742 312) of Tally Ho Business Park, 10 Wesley Court. Burwood East, Victoria. Our goods come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australia Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the goods repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure. Motorola Solutions Australias limited warranty above is in addition to any rights and remedies you may have under the Australian Consumer Law. If you have any queries, please call Motorola Solutions Australia at 1800 457 439. You may also visit our website:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/XA-EN/Pages/

Contact_Us for the most updated warranty terms. i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y 159 English Draft SERVICE Proper repair and maintenance procedures will assure efficient operation and long life for this product. A Motorola maintenance agreement will provide expert service to keep this and all other communication equipment in perfect operating condition. A nationwide service organization is provided by Motorola to support maintenance services. Through its maintenance and installation program, Motorola makes available the finest service to those desiring reliable, continuous communications on a contract basis. For a contract service agreement, please contact your nearest Motorola service or sales representative, or an authorized Motorola dealer. Express Service Plus (ESP) is an optional extended service coverage plan, which provides for the repair of this product for a period of three years from the date of shipment from the factory, or the date of delivery if purchased from an authorized Motorola two-way radio dealer. For more information about ESP, contact the Motorola Radio Support Center, 2204 Galvin Drive, Elgin, IL 60123, 1-800-227-6772. y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 160 English Draft Draft Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 East Algonquin Road Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 U.S.A. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 20122016 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved.

*6875947M01*

6875947M01-HC Draft

 

 

"RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-

Way Radios Installed in Vehicles, Vessels or as Fixed Site Control Stations" revision leaflet ATTENTION!

BEFORE USING THIS RADIO, READ THIS LEAFLET WHICH CONTAINS IMPORTANT OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR SAFE USAGE & RF ENERGY AWARENESS & CONTROL INFORMATION FOR COMPLIANCE WITH RF ENERGY EXPOSURE LIMITS IN APPLICABLE NATIONAL & INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS. For additional information on exposure requirements and training information, visit this link which supersedes page 7 of the current safety manual 6881095C99_:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/corporate-

responsibility/governance-and-policies/rf-exposure-and-assessment-standards.html IMPORTANT NOTICE:

FOR MOTORCYCLE INSTALLATIONS, BYSTANDERS SHOULD BE KEPT AT LEAST 2 FT (60 cm) FROM THE MOTORCYCLE BODY AND INSTALLED ANTENNAS. FOR VEHICLE INSTALLATIONS, BYSTANDERS SHOULD BE KEPT AT LEAST 3 FT

(90 cm) FROM THE VEHICLE BODY AND INSTALLED ANTENNAS. THESE REQUIREMENTS APPLY FOR ALL RADIO TRANSMIT BANDS, AT THE RESPECTIVE POWER LEVELS AS APPLICABLE FOR MOTORCYCLE OR VEHICLE INSTALLATIONS, AND SUPERSEDE THE INSTRUCTIONS IN TABLE 1 OF THE CURRENT SAFETY MANUAL 6881095C99_ APX 8500 MOBILE RF and INSTALL MANUALS REVISON LEAFLET MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2005 2017 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196, U.S.A. English CUT & INSERT THIS REVISON PAGE INTO YOUR

"RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide" 6881095C99_ THAT WAS INCLUDED INSIDE THE MOBILE RADIO BOX. CUT & INSERT THIS REVISON PAGE INTO A PRINTOUT OF

"APX 8500 INSTALLATION MANUAL" MN003109A01_ THAT IS ONLY AVAILABLE ONLINE OR INSIDE THE CDROM. IMPORTANT NOTICE REGARDING INSTALLATION MANUAL Chapter: Standard Configurations Antenna Installation, Selecting an Antenna Site/Location on a Metal Body Vehicle:

"IN ORDER TO COMPLY WITH THE FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION REQUIREMENTS, THE ROOF MOUNT ANTENNAS MUST BE INSTALLED ALONG THE TRANSVERSE LINE INDICATED IN THE INSTALLATION MANUAL, WHERE THIS LINE MUST BISECT THE ROOF. IF NEEDED, THE LIGHT-BAR, OR OTHER EQUIPMENT HOSTED ON THE ROOF, MUST BE DISPLACED ACCORDINGLY. THIS REQUIREMENT SUPERSEDES THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THE CURRENT INSTALLATION MANUAL MN003109A01_, CONCERNING THE ROOF MOUNT ANTENNA LOCATIONS. POST-PUBLICATION EDITS REGARDING INSTALLATION MANUAL Chapter: Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards, page ii. Revised superseding sentence: "Be sure that the "RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide" enclosed with this radio is available to the end user upon completion of the installation of this radio". Chapter: Selecting an Antenna Site/Location on a Metal Body Vehicle. Revised superseding NOTE: A minimum of 18 inch separation is recommended between a light-bar and center-mounted LMR roof antennas, to prevent interference with the light-bar circuitry. Center-mounted LMR roof antennas require the light-bar to be off-set to maintain the separation distance. Chapter: Programming RFID (If Equipped) chapter: Revised superseding Table 2-1 and 2-2: M37TSS9PW1AN Last 2 Digits are now "MA", while characters "T0" are removed. English

 

 

6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 1 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:28 AM RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios Installed in Vehicles, Vessels or as Fixed Site Control Stations ATTENTION!

BEFORE USING THIS RADIO, READ THIS BOOKLET WHICH CONTAINS IMPORTANT OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR SAFE USAGE AND RF ENERGY AWARENESS AND CONTROL INFORMATION FOR COMPLIANCE WITH RF ENERGY EXPOSURE LIMITS IN APPLICABLE NATIONAL AND INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS. The information provided in this document supersedes the general safety information contained in user guides published prior to January 2008. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2005 2012 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196, U.S.A.

*NNTN7851D*

NNTN7851D

*6881095C99*

6881095C99-J English 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 2 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:28 AM RF Energy Exposure Awareness and Control Information, and Operational Instructions for FCC Occupational Use Requirements NOTICE: This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions, where users have full knowledge of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet FCC limits. This radio device is NOT authorized for general population, consumer, or any other use. This two-way radio uses electromagnetic energy in the radio frequency (RF) spectrum to provide communications between two or more users over a distance. It uses radio frequency (RF) energy or radio waves to send and receive calls. RF energy is one form of electromagnetic energy. Other forms include, but are not limited to, sunlight and x-rays. RF energy, however, should not be confused with these other forms of electromagnetic energy, which when used improperly, can cause biological damage. Very high levels of x-rays, for example, can damage tissues and genetic material. Experts in science, engineering, medicine, health, and industry work with organizations to develop standards for safe exposure to RF energy. These standards provide recommended levels of RF exposure for both workers and the general public. These recommended RF exposure levels include substantial margins of protection. All Motorola two-way radios are designed, manufactured, and tested to ensure they meet government-established RF exposure levels. In addition, manufacturers also recommend specific operating instructions to users of two-way radios. These instructions are important because they inform users about RF energy exposure and provide simple procedures on how to control it. English 2 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 3 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:28 AM Please refer to the following Web sites for more information on what RF energy exposure is and how to control your exposure to assure compliance with established RF exposure limits. http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html Federal Communication Commission Regulations The FCC rules require manufacturers to comply with the FCC RF energy exposure limits for mobile two-way radios before they can be marketed in the U.S. When two-way radios are used as a consequence of employment, the FCC requires users to be fully aware of and able to control their exposure to meet occupational requirements. Exposure awareness can be facilitated by the use of a label directing users to specific user awareness information. Your Motorola two-way radio has a RF exposure product label. Also, your Motorola user manual, or separate safety booklet, includes information and operating instructions required to control your RF exposure and to satisfy compliance requirements. Compliance with RF Exposure Standard Your Motorola two-way radio is designed and tested to comply with a number of national and international standards and guidelines (listed below) regarding human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy. This radio complies with the IEEE and ICNIRP exposure limits for occupational/

controlled RF exposure environment at duty factors of up to 50% talk-50%

listen and is authorized by the FCC for occupational use only. In terms of measuring RF energy for compliance with the FCC exposure guidelines, your radio antenna radiates measurable RF energy only while it is transmitting

(during talking), not when it is receiving (listening) or in standby mode. 3 English 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 4 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:28 AM Your Motorola two-way radio complies with the following RF energy exposure standards and guidelines:

United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC), Code of Federal Regulations; 47 CFR et seq. FCC, OET Bulletin 65 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1 International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) Ministry of Health (Canada) Safety Code 6 Industry Canada RSS-102 Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications Standard et seq. ANATEL ANNEX to Resolution No. 303 et seq. RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions To control exposure to yourself and others and to ensure compliance with the RF exposure limits, always adhere to the following procedures. Guidelines:

User awareness instructions should accompany device when transferred to other users. DO NOT use this device if the operational requirements described herein are not met. English 4 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 5 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:28 AM Instructions:

Transmit no more than the rated duty factor of 50% of the time. To transmit

(talk), push the Push-To-Talk (PTT) button or, for radios equipped with VOX, speak into the microphone. The red LED will illuminate when the radio is transmitting. To receive calls, release the PTT button, or, for radios equipped with VOX, stop talking. The red LED will extinguish when the radio stops transmitting. Transmitting 50% of the time, or less, is important because this radio generates measurable RF energy exposure only when transmitting (in terms of measuring for standards compliance). Transmit only when people outside the vehicle are at least the recommended minimum lateral distance away, as shown in Table 1, from the body of a vehicle with a properly installed antenna. This separation distance will ensure that there is sufficient distance from a properly installed

(according to installation instructions) externally-mounted antenna to satisfy the RF exposure requirements in the standards listed above. NOTE: Table 1 below lists the recommended lateral distance for people in an uncontrolled environment from the body of a vehicle with an approved, properly installed transmitting antenna (i.e., monopoles over a ground plane, or dipoles) at several different ranges of rated radio power for mobile radios installed in a vehicle. Table 1. Rated Power of Vehicle-Installed Mobile Two-Way Radio and Recommended Minimum Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body Mobile Radio Rated Power (see Note) Less than 7 watts 7 to 14 watts 15 to 39 watts 40 to 110 watts Minimum Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body 8 inches (20 centimeters) 1 foot (30 centimeters) 2 feet (60 centimeters) 3 feet (90 centimeters) 5 English 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 6 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:28 AM When a mobile radio is used in conjunction with another co-located transmitter such as a Vehicular Repeater, it is the vehicle operators responsibility to take appropriate steps to keep bystanders at the required separation distance from the vehicle to ensure compliance with the FCC's RF energy exposure limits for the general population. See the co-located transmitters user manual for more details. NOTE: If you are not sure of the rated power of your radio, contact your Motorola representative or dealer and supply the radio model number found on the radio model label. If you can not determine the rated power out, then assure 3-feet separation from the body of the vehicle. Users of multi-band radios subject to different separation distances in different operating bands according to Table 1 should select the larger applicable distance as the minimum lateral distance for bystanders outside the vehicle. The maximum power shown on the FCC Grant may be higher than the rated power allowing for production variation. Mobile Antenna Installation Guidelines These mobile antenna installation guidelines are limited to metal body motor vehicles or vehicles with appropriate ground planes. Antennas should be installed in the center area of the roof or the trunk lid taking into account exposure conditions of backseat passengers and according to the specific instructions and restrictions in the Radio Installation Manual along with the requirements of the antenna supplier. Trunk lid installations are limited to vehicles with clearly defined flat trunk lids, and in some cases, to specific radio models and antennas. See the Radio Installation Manual for specific information on how and where to install specific types of approved antennas to facilitate recommended operating distances to all potentially exposed persons. Use only the Motorola-approved, supplied antenna or a Motorola-

approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or English 6 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 7 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:28 AM attachments could damage the radio and may result in non-compliance with RF Safety Standards. Approved Accessories This radio has been tested and meets RF Safety Standards when used with the Motorola accessories supplied or designated for this product. Use of other accessories may result in non-compliance with RF Safety Standards. For a list of Motorola-approved antennas and accessories, refer to the user manual for your radio model. Additional Information For additional information on exposure requirements or other training information, visit: http://responsibility.motorolasolutions.com/index.php/

ourapproach/wirelesscommhealth/. Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions for Mobile Two-Way Radios Installed as Fixed Site Control Stations If mobile radio equipment is installed at a fixed location and operated as a control station or as a fixed unit, the antenna installation must comply with the following requirements in order to ensure optimal performance and compliance with the RF energy exposure limits in the standards and guidelines listed on page 4:

The antenna should be mounted outside the building on the roof or a tower if at all possible. As with all fixed site antenna installations, it is the responsibility of the licensee to manage the site in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements and may require additional compliance actions such as site survey measurements, signage, and site access restrictions in order to ensure that exposure limits are not exceeded. 7 English 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 8 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:28 AM For additional installation information, see the guidelines for minimum separation distances provided above in the RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions section of this document. Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions for Mobile Two-Way Radios Installed on Maritime Vessels If mobile radio equipment is installed on a vessel and operated as a fixed unit, the antenna installation must comply with the following requirements in order to ensure optimal performance and compliance with RF energy exposure limits in the standards and guidelines listed on page 4:

An antenna intended for Maritime operation should be chosen and installed according to the manufacturers recommendations. The antennas should be mounted solidly to the vessel structure at the highest location possible. As with all radio antenna installations, it is the responsibility of the operator to maintain adequate distances from the antenna and all personnel on board the vessel or adjacent to the vessel. For additional installation information, see the guidelines for minimum separation distances proved above in the RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions section of this document. Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility NOTE: Nearly every electronic device is susceptible to electromagnetic interference (EMI) if inadequately shielded, designed, or otherwise configured for electromagnetic compatibility. It may be necessary to conduct compatibility testing to determine if any electronic equipment used in or around vehicles or near fixed site antenna is sensitive to external RF energy or if any procedures need to be followed to eliminate or mitigate the potential for interaction between the radio transmitter and the equipment or device. English 8 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 9 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:28 AM Facilities To avoid electromagnetic interference and/or compatibility conflicts, turn off your radio in any facility where posted notices instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that is sensitive to external RF energy. Vehicles To avoid possible interaction between the radio transmitter and any vehicle electronic control modules, such as ABS, engine, or transmission controls, the radio should be installed only by an experienced installer and the following precautions should be used when installing the radio:

1. Refer to the manufacturers instructions or other technical bulletins for recommendations on radio installation. 2. Before installing the radio, determine the location of the electronic control modules and their harnesses in the vehicle. 3. Route all radio wiring, including the antenna transmission line, as far away as possible from the electronic control units and associated wiring. Driver Safety Check the laws and regulations on the use of radios in the area where you drive. Always obey them. When using your radio while driving, please:

Give full attention to driving and to the road. Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. Acoustic Safety Exposure to loud noises from any source for extended periods of time may temporarily or permanently affect your hearing. The louder the radio's volume, 9 English 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 10 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:28 AM the less time is required before your hearing could be affected. Hearing damage from loud noise is sometimes undetectable at first and can have a cumulative effect. To protect your hearing:

Use the lowest volume necessary to do your job. Turn up the volume only if you are in noisy surroundings. Turn down the volume before adding headset or earpiece. Limit the amount of time you use headsets or earpieces at high volume. When using the radio without a headset or earpiece, do not place the radio's speaker directly against your ear. English 10 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 11 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:28 AM Operational Warnings W A R N I N G For Vehicles with an Air Bag DO NOT mount or place a mobile radio in the area over an air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force. If a radio is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inflates, the radio may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Turn off your radio prior to entering any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. The areas with potentially explosive atmospheres include fueling areas such as below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, posted. Blasting Caps and Blasting Areas To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn off your radio when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: Turn off two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. For radios installed in vehicles fueled by liquefied petroleum gas, refer to the (U.S.) National Fire Protection Association standard, NFPA 58, for storage, handling, and/or container information. For a copy of the LP-gas standard, NFPA 58, contact the National Fire Protection Association, One Battery Park, Quincy, MA. 11 English 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 12 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:28 AM English 12 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 1 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:20 AM Folleto de normas de seguridad y de exposicin a la energa de RF al usar radios bidireccionales mviles instalados en vehculos, embarcaciones o estaciones de control en emplazamientos fijos ATENCIN ANTES DE USAR EL RADIO LEA ESTE FOLLETO, EL CUAL CONTIENE INSTRUCCIONES DE OPERACIN IMPORTANTES PARA SU USO SEGURO, AS COMO INFORMACIN SOBRE LA ENERGA DE RF Y SU CONTROL, PARA GARANTIZAR SU CONFORMIDAD CON LOS LMITES DE EXPOSICIN A LA ENERGA DE RADIOFRECUENCIA ESTABLECIDOS EN LAS NORMAS NACIONALES E INTERNACIONALES APLICABLES. La informacin incluida en este documento reemplaza la informacin de seguridad general contenida en los manuales de usuario publicados antes de enero de 2008. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS y el logotipo estilizado M son marcas de fabrica o marcas registradas de Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC y son usadas bajo licencia. Todas otras marcas registradas son la propiedad de sus dueos respectivos. 2005 2012 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Todos los derechos estn reservados. Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196, EE.UU.

*NNTN7851D*

NNTN7851D

*6881095C99*

6881095C99-J Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 2 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:20 AM Informacin sobre exposicin a la energa de RF y su control, e instrucciones operacionales para satisfacer los requisitos de la FCC sobre el uso como herramienta ocupacional AVISO: Este radio est diseado para uso en ambientes ocupacionales controlados, donde los usuarios estn plenamente conscientes de la exposicin a la energa de radiofrecuencia a la que estn sujetos, y pueden ejercer control sobre dicha exposicin para mantenerse dentro de los lmites establecidos por la FCC. Esta unidad de radio NO est aprobada para la venta al pblico en general en el mercado de consumo masivo, ni para uso en entornos diferentes al aqu descrito. Este radio bidireccional usa energa electromagntica en el espectro de radiofrecuencia (RF) para permitir las comunicaciones a distancia entre dos o ms usuarios. El mismo emplea la energa de radiofrecuencia u ondas de radio para enviar y recibir llamadas. La energa de RF es una forma de energa electromagntica. Este tipo de energa se presenta en otras formas, entre las que se encuentran la luz solar y los rayos X. La energa de RF, sin embargo, no debe confundirse con estas otras formas de energa electromagntica que, cuando son usadas indebidamente, pueden ocasionar daos biolgicos. Niveles muy elevados de rayos X, por ejemplo, pueden producir daos en tejidos y en material gentico. Expertos en las ciencias, la ingeniera, la medicina, la salud y la industria trabajan conjuntamente con diferentes organizaciones con el fin de desarrollar normas que definan lmites prudentes de exposicin a la energa de RF. Estas normas proporcionan los niveles recomendados de exposicin a la RF, tanto para los trabajadores como para el pblico en general. Estos niveles recomendados de exposicin a la RF incluyen mrgenes de seguridad suficientemente amplios. Todos los radios bidireccionales Motorola son diseados, fabricados y probados de manera que aseguren el cumplimiento de los niveles de exposicin a la RF establecidos por los organismos pblicos reguladores. Asimismo, los fabricantes recomiendan a los usuarios de radios bidireccionales seguir instrucciones de operacin especficas. Estas instrucciones son importantes, ya que informan a los usuarios acerca de la exposicin a la energa de RF y proporcionan procedimientos sencillos para su control. Espaol Latinoamericano 2 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 3 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:20 AM Visite los siguientes sitios Web para obtener ms informacin acerca de qu es la exposicin a la energa de RF y cmo controlar dicha exposicin para garantizar la observancia de los lmites de exposicin establecidos. http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html Regulaciones de la Comisin Federal de Comunicaciones de EE.UU. Las normas de la FCC estipulan que los fabricantes de radios mviles bidireccionales no podrn comercializar sus productos en los EE.UU., a menos que los mismos cumplan con los lmites de exposicin a la energa de RF establecidos por la FCC. Cuando la naturaleza del trabajo requiere el uso de radios bidireccionales, la FCC exige que los usuarios estn totalmente conscientes de los efectos de la exposicin, y que sean capaces de controlar el nivel de exposicin al que se someten, a fin de satisfacer los requisitos laborales. La informacin sobre exposicin puede facilitarse mediante el uso de una etiqueta que remita a los usuarios a la fuente de informacin apropiada. Su radio bidireccional Motorola tiene una etiqueta con informacin acerca de la exposicin a la energa de RF. Adems, en el manual de usuario del producto Motorola, o en un folleto de seguridad separado, se incluye la informacin e instrucciones de operacin necesarias para controlar la exposicin a la energa de RF y para garantizar el cumplimiento de las normas. Conformidad con la normativa sobre exposicin a la RF Este radio bidireccional Motorola ha sido diseado y verificado con el fin de garantizar su compatibilidad con las siguientes normas y recomendaciones nacionales e internacionales relacionadas con la exposicin de seres humanos a la energa electromagntica de radiofrecuencia. Este radio cumple con los lmites de exposicin establecidos por el IEEE y por la ICNIRP para entornos ocupacionales o con control de exposicin a la energa de radiofrecuencia, a ciclos de trabajo de hasta 50% (50% transmisin y 50% recepcin) y ha sido aprobado por la FCC para uso como herramienta ocupacional solamente. En lo que respecta a la medicin de energa de RF para la determinacin de conformidad con las directrices de exposicin de la FCC, la antena del radio irradia energa de RF medible slo cuando est transmitiendo (cuando el usuario est hablando), no cuando est recibiendo (cuando el usuario est oyendo) o cuando se encuentra en espera. 3 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 4 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:20 AM Este radio bidireccional Motorola satisface las siguientes normas y recomendaciones relacionadas con la exposicin a la energa de radiofrecuencia:

Comisin Federal de Comunicaciones de EE.UU. (FCC), Cdigo de Reglamentos Federales; 47 CFR y siguientes Comisin Federal de Comunicaciones de EE.UU. (FCC), Boletn OET 65 Instituto de Ingenieros Elctricos y Electrnicos (IEEE), C95.1 Comisin Internacional para la Proteccin contra la Radiacin No Ionizante

(ICNIRP) Ministerio de Sanidad (Canad), Cdigo de seguridad 6 Industria Canad, RSS-102 Direccin Australiana de Comunicaciones, Normativa de Radiocomunicaciones y siguientes ANATEL, Anexo a la Resolucin n 303 y siguientes. Pautas de conformidad y control de la exposicin de RF e instrucciones de operacin Para controlar la exposicin a la que tanto Ud. como otras personas se someten, y para asegurar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a la RF, observe siempre los siguientes procedimientos. Pautas:

El aparato debe ser acompaado de la informacin sobre la energa de RF cuando el mismo sea transferido a otros usuarios. No use este dispositivo sin antes satisfacer los requisitos operacionales aqu descritos. Espaol Latinoamericano 4 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 5 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:20 AM Instrucciones:

No transmita ms del 50% del tiempo, a fin de no sobrepasar el mximo ciclo de trabajo especificado del 50%. Para transmitir (hablar) presione el botn de transmisin (PTT); si el radio est equipado con VOX, hable hacia el micrfono. El LED rojo se enciende cuando el radio est transmitiendo. Para recibir llamadas, suelte el botn PTT. Si el radio est equipado con VOX, deje de hablar. El LED rojo se apaga cuando el radio termina de transmitir. Es importante no transmitir ms del 50% del tiempo, ya que este radio emite energa de RF medible slo cuando est transmitiendo (en trminos de conformidad con las normas de medicin). Transmita nicamente cuando las personas que se encuentran fuera del vehculo estn apartadas por lo menos la distancia lateral mnima recomendada (indicada en la Tabla 1) de la carrocera de un vehculo equipado con una antena debidamente instalada. Esta separacin asegura que haya suficiente distancia entre una antena exterior debidamente instalada (segn las instrucciones de instalacin) para satisfacer los requisitos de exposicin a la energa de RF estipulados en las normas antes mencionadas. NOTA: La Tabla 1 presentada a continuacin indica la distancia lateral recomendada, en un entorno no controlado, a la que los transentes deben mantenerse de la carrocera de un vehculo equipado con una antena transmisora aprobada y debidamente instalada (es decir, monopolos sobre un plano de tierra, o bipolos) para diferentes niveles de potencia nominal de radios mviles instalados en un vehculo. Tabla 1. Potencia nominal del radio bidireccional mvil instalado en un vehculo y distancia lateral mnima recomendada de la carrocera del vehculo Potencia nominal del radio mvil

(ver nota) Menos de 7 vatios 7 a 14 vatios 15 a 39 vatios 40 a 110 vatios Distancia lateral mnima de la carrocera del vehculo 20 centmetros (8 pulg.) 30 centmetros (1 pie) 60 centmetros (2 pies) 90 centmetros (3 pies) 5 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 6 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:20 AM Cuando se usa un radio mvil conjuntamente con otro transmisor ubicado en el mismo sitio como, por ejemplo, un repetidor vehicular, el operador del vehculo es responsable de tomar las medidas necesarias para mantener a los transentes alejados del vehculo la distancia mnima requerida, a fin de garantizar la conformidad con los lmites de exposicin a la energa de RF establecidos por la FCC para la poblacin en general. Para obtener ms detalles, consulte el manual de usuario de los transmisores ubicados en el mismo sitio. NOTA: Si no est seguro de cul es la potencia nominal de su radio, comunquese con el representante o concesionario Motorola e indquele el nmero de modelo del radio que aparece en la etiqueta del radio. Si no puede determinar la potencia nominal de salida, asegrese de mantener una separacin de un metro (3 pies) de la carrocera del vehculo. Los usuarios de radios multibanda sujetos a diferentes distancias de separacin en diferentes bandas de operacin conforme a la Tabla 1 deben seleccionar la distancia ms grande aplicable como la distancia lateral mnima para los transentes cercanos al vehculo. La potencia mxima mostrada en la autorizacin de la FCC puede ser mayor que la potencia nominal, tomando en consideracin las variaciones que ocurren a nivel de produccin. Pautas para la instalacin de antenas de radios mviles Las siguientes pautas para la instalacin de antenas de radios mviles son aplicables nicamente a vehculos automotores con carrocera metlica o a vehculos con planos de tierra apropiados. Las antenas deben ser instaladas en el rea central del techo o de la tapa del compartimiento de equipaje, tomando en consideracin las condiciones de exposicin de los pasajeros que viajen en el asiento trasero, as como las instrucciones y restricciones especficas mencionadas en el manual de instalacin del radio y los requisitos establecidos por el proveedor de la antena. La instalacin en la tapa del compartimiento de equipaje queda limitada a aquellos vehculos cuya tapa del compartimiento de equipaje sea una superficie plana claramente definida y, en algunos casos, a modelos especficos de radios y antenas. Consulte en el manual de instalacin del radio la informacin especfica sobre la ubicacin y la forma de instalar los diferentes tipos de antenas aprobados para satisfacer las distancias de operacin recomendadas entre las antenas y toda persona que pueda quedar expuesta. Espaol Latinoamericano 6 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 7 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:20 AM Use nicamente la antena Motorola suministrada o una antena de reemplazo aprobada por Motorola. El uso de antenas, modificaciones o accesorios no aprobados podra daar el radio y constituir una violacin de las normas de seguridad relacionadas con la energa de RF. Accesorios aprobados Este radio ha sido probado y se ha determinado que satisface las normas de seguridad relacionadas con la energa de RF siempre que se use con los accesorios Motorola suministrados o designados para este producto. El uso de otros accesorios puede constituir una violacin de las normas de seguridad relacionadas con la energa de RF. Para obtener una lista de antenas y accesorios Motorola aprobados, consulte el manual de usuario para el modelo de radio. Informacin adicional Para obtener informacin adicional sobre los requisitos de exposicin o informacin sobre capacitacin, visite: http://responsibility.motorolasolutions.com/index.php/

ourapproach/wirelesscommhealth/. Pautas de control y conformidad, e instrucciones de operacin de radios bidireccionales mviles instalados como estaciones de control en emplazamientos fijos Si un equipo de radio mvil se instala en un lugar fijo y se hace funcionar como estacin de control o como unidad fija, la instalacin de la antena deber satisfacer los siguientes requisitos, a fin de garantizar un rendimiento ptimo y de cumplir con los lmites de exposicin a la energa de radiofrecuencia establecidos en las normas y pautas enumeradas en la pgina 4:

La antena se debe montar fuera del edificio, en el techo o en una torre, siempre que sea posible. Como en todas las instalaciones de antenas en emplazamientos fijos, es responsabilidad del portador de la licencia mantener el emplazamiento de conformidad con los reglamentos aplicables, y es posible que existan requisitos adicionales como mediciones de propagacin, colocacin de letreros y restricciones de acceso al emplazamiento. 7 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 8 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:20 AM Para obtener informacin adicional sobre la instalacin, consulte las directrices relativas a las distancias de separacin antes mencionadas en la seccin de este documento titulada Pautas de conformidad y control de la exposicin de RF, e instrucciones de operacin. Pautas de Cumplimiento y Control e Instrucciones de Uso para usar radios bidireccionales mviles instalados en embarcaciones martimas Si el equipo de radio mvil est instalado en una embarcacin y funciona como una unidad fija, la instalacin de la antena debe cumplir con los siguientes requisitos con el fin de garantizar un rendimiento ptimo y cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a la energa de RF en las normas y pautas que figuran en la pgina 4:

Una antena destinada a la operacin Martima se debe elegir e instalar de acuerdo con las recomendaciones de los fabricantes. Las antenas se deben montar firmemente a la estructura de la embarcacin en el lugar ms alto posible. De la misma forma que con todas las instalaciones de antena de radio, es responsabilidad del operador mantener una distancia adecuada hasta la antena y de todo el personal a bordo del barco o que se encuentre en sus proximidades. Si desea obtener informacin adicional sobre la instalacin, consulte las directrices sobre distancias de separacin mnimas indicadas anteriormente en la seccin Pautas de conformidad y control de la exposicin de RF einstrucciones de operacin de este documento. Interferencia y compatibilidad electromagntica NOTA: Casi todos los dispositivos electrnicos son susceptibles a la interferencia electromagntica si no cuentan con el debido blindaje, o si no estn diseados o configurados de manera que sean compatibles con este tipo de seales electromagnticas. Puede que sea necesario realizar pruebas de compatibilidad para determinar si alguno de los equipos electrnicos usados en los vehculos, cerca de ellos o cerca de antenas en emplazamientos fijos, es sensible a la energa de radiofrecuencia externa, o si hay que ejecutar algn procedimiento para eliminar o reducir la posibilidad de interaccin entre el radio transmisor y el equipo o dispositivo. Espaol Latinoamericano 8 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 9 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:20 AM Edificaciones Para evitar problemas de interferencia y/o compatibilidad electromagntica, apague el radio en todos los lugares donde haya letreros que as lo establezcan. Por ejemplo, en hospitales e instalaciones de asistencia mdica podran estar usando aparatos sensibles a la energa de RF externa. Vehculos Para evitar una posible interaccin entre el radio transmisor y cualquiera de los mdulos de control electrnico del vehculo (por ejemplo, el control del sistema antibloqueo de frenos (ABS), el control del motor o el control de la transmisin), se debe contratar a un instalador experimentado para realizar la instalacin del radio, as como tomar las siguientes precauciones:

1. Consulte las instrucciones proporcionadas por el fabricante y dems boletines tcnicos que contengan recomendaciones para la instalacin del radio. 2. Antes de instalar el radio, determine la ubicacin de los mdulos de control electrnico y del tendido de los cables del vehculo. 3. Haga pasar todo el cableado del radio, incluida la lnea de transmisin de la antena, lo ms lejos posible de las unidades de control electrnico y del tendido de cables correspondiente. Seguridad al conducir Consulte las leyes y reglamentos para el uso de radios en las zonas donde conduce. Obedzcalas siempre. Cuando utilice el radio al conducir un vehculo:

Preste atencin al camino y a las condiciones de conduccin. Salga del camino y estacione el vehculo antes de realizar o contestar una llamada, si la situacin lo amerita. Seguridad acstica La exposicin a ruidos intensos provenientes de cualquier fuente por perodos de tiempo prolongados podran afectar su capacidad auditiva de forma temporal o permanente. Mientras ms alto sea el volumen del radio, ms pronto podra resultar afectada su capacidad auditiva. El dao auditivo producido por ruidos 9 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 10 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:20 AM intensos a veces puede que sea imperceptible al principio, pero puede tener un efecto acumulativo. Para proteger su capacidad auditiva:

Use el menor volumen que le permita realizar sus tareas. Aumente el volumen nicamente cuando est en un entorno ruidoso. Disminuya el volumen antes de conectar un audfono o un auricular. Lmite el tiempo de uso de audfonos o auriculares a alto volumen. Cuando use el radio sin un audfono o auricular, no se coloque el parlante del radio pegado a la oreja. Espaol Latinoamericano 10 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 11 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:20 AM Advertencias operacionales ADVERTENCIA ADVERTENCIA Vehculos con bolsas de aire No instale ni coloque un radio mvil sobre una bolsa de aire ni en el rea de despliegue de la misma. Las bolsas de aire se inflan con mucha fuerza. Si se coloca un radio en el rea de despliegue de la bolsa de aire, cuando sta se infle el radio podra salir proyectado con gran velocidad y ocasionar lesiones graves a los pasajeros. Ambientes potencialmente explosivos Apague el radio antes de entrar en reas con atmsferas potencialmente explosivas. Las chispas en atmsferas potencialmente explosivas pueden desencadenar explosiones o incendios, y ocasionar lesiones e incluso la muerte. Entre los entornos potencialmente explosivos se encuentran las reas con combustible, por ejemplo, debajo de la cubierta de barcos, instalaciones de transferencia y almacenamiento de combustible o de productos qumicos, y reas donde el aire contiene productos qumicos o partculas tales como polvo de cereales, polvo comn o polvo metlico. En las reas con atmsferas potencialmente explosivas generalmente hay seales de precaucin, aunque no siempre es as. reas de voladuras y explosivos Para evitar una posible interferencia con las operaciones de detonacin, apague el radio cuando est cerca de detonadores elctricos, en un rea de detonaciones o donde haya letreros que indiquen apagar los radios bidireccionales. Obedezca todas las seales e instrucciones. Para el caso de radios instalados en vehculos propulsados por gas licuado de petrleo, consulte la norma NFPA 58 de la Asociacin nacional estadounidense de proteccin contra incendios (National Fire Protection Association) para obtener informacin sobre almacenamiento, manejo y/

o contenedores. Para obtener una copia de la norma NFPA 58 comunquese con la Asociacin nacional estadounidense de proteccin contra incendios (National Fire Protection Association), One Battery Park, Quincy, MA, EE. 11 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 12 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:20 AM Espaol Latinoamericano 12 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 1 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Guia de Exposio Energia RF e de Segurana do Produto para Rdios Portteis de Duas Vias Instalados em Veculos, Embarcaes ou como Estaes de Controle de Local Fixo ATENO ANTES DE UTILIZAR O RDIO PROCURE LER ESTE FOLHETO, QUE CONTM IMPORTANTES INSTRUES DE OPERAO PARA O USO SEGURO, BEM COMO INFORMAES SOBRE A ENERGIA DE RF E SEU CONTROLE, COM A FINALIDADE DE GARANTIR A CONFORMIDADE COM OS LIMITES DE EXPOSIO ENERGIA DE RADIOFREQNCIA ESTABELECIDOS NAS NORMAS NACIONAIS E INTERNACIONAIS APLICVEIS. As informaes contidas neste documento substituem as informaes a respeito de segurana geral contidas nos manuais do usurio publicados antes de janeiro de 2008. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS e o logotipo do M estilizado so marcas registradas ou marcas comerciais da Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC e so usadas mediante licena. Todas as outras marcas registradas so de propriedade de seus respectivos proprietrios. 2005 2012 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Todos os direitos reservados. Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196, EUA.

*NNTN7851D*

NNTN7851D

*6881095C99*

6881095C99-J Portugus Brasileiro 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 2 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Informaes sobre a exposio energia de RF e seu controle, e instrues operacionais para satisfazer os requisitos da FCC sobre o uso como ferramenta ocupacional AVISO: Este rdio foi projetado para ser usado em ambientes ocupacionais controlados, onde os usurios estejam plenamente conscientes da exposio energia de radiofreqncia a que esto sujeitos e podem exercer o controle sobre tal exposio de modo a satisfazer as exigncias de limites de exposio estabelecidos pelo FCC. Esta unidade de rdio NO se destina a venda ao pblico em geral no mercado de consumo de massa, nem se destina ao uso em ambientes diferentes daqueles aqui descritos. Este rdio bidirecional utiliza energia eletromagntica no espectro de radiofreqncia (RF) para permitir a comunicao distncia entre dois ou mais usurios. O rdio utiliza a energia de radiofreqncia ou ondas de rdio para enviar e receber chamadas. A energia de RF uma forma de energia eletromagntica. Este tipo de energia se apresenta sob outras formas, dentre as quais se incluem a luz solar e os raios X. A energia de RF, contudo, no deve ser confundida com estas outras formas de energia eletromagntica que, quando so usadas indevidamente, podem causar danos biolgicos. Nveis muito elevados de raios X, por exemplo, podem produzir danos aos tecidos e ao material gentico. Especialistas em cincias, engenharia, medicina, sade e indstria tm trabalhado conjuntamente com as diferentes organizaes com a finalidade de desenvolver normas que definem os limites prudentes de exposio energia de RF. Estas normas proporcionam os nveis recomendveis de exposio RF, tanto para os trabalhadores quanto para o pblico em geral. Estes nveis recomendados de exposio energia de RF incluem margens de segurana suficientemente amplas. Todos os rdios bidirecionais Motorola so projetados, fabricados e testados de maneira segura de modo a assegurar o cumprimento dos nveis de exposio RF estabelecidos pelos organismos pblicos reguladores. Alm disto, os fabricantes recomendam aos usurios de rdios bidirecionais que sigam as instrues de operao especficas. Estas instrues so importantes uma vez que informam aos usurios a respeito da exposio energia de RF e oferecem procedimentos simples para seu controle. Portugus Brasileiro 2 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 3 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Visite os websites indicados a seguir para obter mais informaes sobre o que se trata a exposio energia de RF e de como controlar esta exposio de modo a garantir a observncia dos limites de exposio estabelecidos. http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html Regulamentos da Comisso Federal de Comunicaes dos Estados Unidos As normas do FCC estipulam que os fabricantes de rdios mveis bidirecionais no podero comercializar seus produtos nos Estados Unidos exceto se tais produtos cumprirem com as exigncias de limites de exposio energia de RF estabelecidos pelo FCC. Quando a natureza do trabalho requer o uso de rdios bidirecionais, o FCC exige que os usurios estejam totalmente conscientes dos efeitos da exposio e que sejam capazes de controlar o nvel de exposio a que esto submetidos de modo a satisfazer as exigncias do trabalho. As informaes sobre exposio podem ser facilitadas por meio do uso de uma etiqueta que remeta os usurios fonte de informaes apropriadas. Seu rdio bidirecional Motorola contm uma etiqueta com informaes sobre a exposio energia de RF. Alm disto, no manual do usurio do produto Motorola, ou em um folheto de segurana publicado em separado, esto includas as informaes e instrues de operao necessrias para controlar a exposio energia de RF e para garantir o cumprimento das normas. Conformidade com a normativa sobre a exposio RF Este rdio bidirecional Motorola foi projetado e testado com a finalidade de garantir a sua compatibilidade com as normas e recomendaes nacionais e internacionais descritas a seguir no que se refere a exposio de seres humanos energia eletromagntica de radiofreqncia. Este rdio atende aos limites de exposio estabelecidos pelo IEEE e pela ICNIRP para ambientes ocupacionais ou com controle de exposio energia de radiofreqncia, em ciclos de trabalho de at 50% (50% transmisso/50% recepo) e foi aprovado pelo FCC para uso somente como ferramenta ocupacional. No que se refere medio da energia de RF para a determinao de conformidade com as diretrizes de exposio do FCC, a antena do rdio irradia energia de RF mensurvel somente quando est transmitindo (quando o usurio est falando) e no quando est recebendo

(quando o usurio est ouvindo) ou quando se encontra em espera. 3 Portugus Brasileiro 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 4 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Este rdio bidirecional Motorola satisfaz s seguintes normas e recomendaes relacionadas exposio energia de radiofreqncia:

Comisso Federal de Comunicaes dos Estados Unidos (FCC), Cdigo de Regulamentos Federais; 47 CFR e seguintes Comisso Federal de Comunicaes dos Estados Unidos (FCC), Boletim OET 65 Instituto de Engenheiros Eltricos e Eletrnicos (IEEE) C95.1 Comisso Internacional para Proteo contra Radiao no Ionizante (ICNIRP) Ministrio da Sade (Canad), Cdigo de segurana 6 Indstria Canad, RSS-102 Autoridade Australiana de Comunicaes, Normativa de Radiocomunicaes e seguintes ANATEL, Anexo Resoluo N. 303 e seguintes. Orientaes gerais de conformidade e controle da exposio de RF e instrues de operao Para controlar a exposio a que tanto o usurio como outras pessoas se submetem, e para assegurar o cumprimento dos limites de exposio RF, deve-se observar sempre os procedimentos descritos a seguir. Orientaes gerais:

O equipamento deve estar acompanhado das informaes relacionadas com a energia de RF quando o mesmo for transferido a outros usurios. No utilize este dispositivo sem antes satisfazer os requisitos operacionais aqui descritos. Portugus Brasileiro 4 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 5 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Instrues:

No transmita mais de 50% do tempo, de modo a no ultrapassar o mximo ciclo de trabalho especificado de 50%. Para transmitir (falar) pressione o boto de transmisso (PTT); se o rdio estiver equipado com VOX, fale junto ao microfone. O LED vermelho acende quando o rdio est transmitindo. Para receber chamadas, solte o boto PTT. Se o rdio estiver equipado com VOX, pare de falar. O LED vermelho se apaga quando o rdio encerra a transmisso. importante no transmitir mais de 50% do tempo, uma vez que o rdio emite energia de RF mensurvel somente quando est em transmisso (em termos da conformidade com as normas de medio). Transmita somente quando as pessoas de fora do veculo se encontrarem afastadas pelo menos distncia lateral mnima recomendada (conforme mostrado na tabela 1) da carroceria de um veculo equipado com antena devidamente instalada. Esta separao assegura que haja distncia suficiente entre uma antena exterior devidamente instalada (conforme as instrues de instalao) para satisfazer os requisitos de exposio energia de RF estipulados nas normas acima mencionadas. NOTA: A tabela 1 mostrada a seguir indica a distncia lateral recomendada, em um ambiente no controlado, que deve ser mantida pelos transeuntes em relao carroceria de um veculo equipado com uma antena transmissora aprovada e devidamente instalada (isto , monopolos sobre um plano de terra, ou bipolos) para diferentes nveis de potncia nominal de rdios mveis instalados em um veculo. Tabela 1. Potncia nominal do rdio bidirecional mvel instalado em um veculo e distncia lateral mnima recomendada da carroceria do veculo Potncia nominal do rdio mvel (ver nota) Distncia lateral mnima da carroceria do veculo Menos de 7 watts 20 centmetros (8 polegadas) 7 a 14 watts 15 a 39 watts 40 a 110 watts 30 centmetros (1 p) 60 centmetros (2 ps) 90 centmetros (3 ps) 5 Portugus Brasileiro 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 6 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Quando um rdio mvel utilizado juntamente com outro transmissor co-localizado como, por exemplo, um repetidor veicular, o operador do veculo ser responsvel por tomar as medidas necessrias para manter os transeuntes distncia mnima exigida do veculo, de modo a garantir a conformidade com os limites de exposio energia de RF estabelecidos pela FCC para a populao em geral. Para obter mais detalhes, consulte o manual do usurio dos transmissores co-localizados. NOTA: Se no tiver certeza sobre o valor da potncia nominal de seu rdio, entre em contato com o representante ou a concessionria Motorola e informe o nmero de modelo do rdio que aparece na etiqueta do rdio. Se no for possvel determinar a potncia de sada nominal, assegure-se de manter a separao de 1 metro (3 ps) da carroceria do veculo. Usurios de rdios multi-banda sujeitos a diferentes distncias de separao em diferentes bandas operacionais de acordo com a Tabela 1 devem selecionar a maior distncia aplicvel como a mnima distncia lateral para expectadores fora do veculo. A energia mxima exibida da Garantia FCC pode ser maior que a energia nominal permitida para a variao de produo. Orientaes gerais para a instalao das antenas de rdios mveis As orientaes gerais descritas a seguir para a instalao de antenas de rdios mveis se aplicam somente a veculos automotores com carroceria metlica ou a veculos com planos de terra apropriados. As antenas devem ser instaladas na rea central do teto ou da tampa do porta-

malas, levando em considerao as condies de exposio aplicveis aos passageiros do banco traseiro, bem como as instrues e restries especficas mencionadas no manual de instalao do rdio e os requisitos estabelecidos pelo fornecedor da antena. A instalao na tampa do porta-malas limitada a veculos cujas tampas do compartimento de porta-malas sejam planas e claramente definidas e, em alguns casos, a modelos especficos de rdios e antenas. Consulte no manual de instalao do rdio as informaes especficas sobre a localizao e a forma de instalar os diferentes tipos de antenas aprovados para satisfazer deste modo as exigncias de operao recomendadas e assim proteger as pessoas que possam estar expostas. Portugus Brasileiro 6 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 7 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Use somente a antena Motorola fornecida ou uma antena de reposio aprovada pela Motorola. O uso de antenas, modificaes ou acessrios no aprovados poder resultar em dano ao rdio e se constituir em uma violao das normas de segurana em relao energia de RF. Acessrios aprovados Este rdio foi testado e constatou-se que satisfaz as normas de segurana em relao energia de RF sempre que utilizado com os acessrios Motorola fornecidos ou destinados a este produto. O uso de outros acessrios pode se constituir em uma violao das normas de segurana em relao energia de RF. Para uma lista de aprovados Motorola antenas e acessrios, consulte o manual do usurio manual para o seu modelo de rdio. Informaes adicionais Para obter informaes adicionais sobre os requisitos de exposio ou sobre treinamento, visite o seguinte website: http://responsibility.motorolasolutions.com/

index.php/ourapproach/wirelesscommhealth/. Orientaes gerais de controle e conformidade e instrues de operao de rdios mveis bidirecionais instalados como estaes de controle em locais fixos Se um equipamento de rdio mvel for instalado em um local fixo e o mesmo for colocado em funcionamento como uma estao de controle ou como uma unidade fixa, a instalao da antena dever satisfazer os requisitos descritos a seguir, de modo a garantir um rendimento otimizado e para atender aos limites de exposio energia de radiofreqncia estabelecidos nas normas e orientaes mencionadas na pgina 4:

Sempre que for possvel, a antena dever ser instalada fora do edifcio em um teto ou torre. Como acontece em todas as instalaes de antenas feitas em locais fixos, responsabilidade do licenciado manter o local em conformidade com os regulamentos aplicveis. Tambm possvel que existam requisitos adicionais tais como medies de propagao, colocao de sinalizao de aviso e outras restries de acesso ao local. 7 Portugus Brasileiro 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 8 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Para obter informaes adicionais sobre a instalao, consulte as orientaes relativas s distncias mnimas de separao mencionadas anteriormente na seo denominada Orientaes de conformidade e controle da exposio de RF e instrues de operao, constantes nesse documento. Diretrizes de Conformidade e Controle e Instrues Operacionais para Rdios Portteis de Duas Vias Instalados em Embarcaes Martimas Se o equipamento de rdio porttil estiver instalado em uma embarcao e operado como unidade fixa, a instalao da antena deve estar em conformidade com os seguintes requerimentos para assegurar desempenho excelente e conformidade com os limites de exposio energia RF nos padres e diretrizes listadas na pgina 4:

Uma antena destinada para operao Martima deve ser escolhida e instalada de acordo com as recomendaes do fabricante. As antenas devem ser montadas solidamente estrutura da embarcao no local mais alto possvel. Como com todas as instalaes de antena de rdio, responsabilidade do operador manter distncias adequadas da antena e todo o pessoal a bordo da embarcao ou adjacente embarcao. Para informaes adicionais de instalao, veja as diretrizes para distncias de separao mnimas provadas acima na seo Diretrizes de Conformidade e Controle e Instrues Operacionais deste documento. Interferncia e compatibilidade eletromagntica NOTA: Quase todos os dispositivos eletrnicos so susceptveis interferncia eletromagntica se no estiverem devidamente blindados ou se no tiverem sido projetados ou configurados de maneira a serem compatveis com estes tipos de sinais eletromagnticos. possvel que seja necessrio realizar testes de compatibilidade para se determinar se algum dos equipamentos eletrnicos usados nos veculos, prximo a eles ou prximo s instalaes de antenas feitas em locais fixos sensvel energia de radiofreqncia externa, ou se h necessidade de executar algum procedimento para eliminar ou reduzir a possibilidade de interao entre o rdio transmissor e o referido equipamento ou dispositivo. Portugus Brasileiro 8 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 9 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Edificaes Para evitar problemas de interferncia e/ou compatibilidade eletromagntica, desligue o rdio em todos os locais onde houver avisos instruindo neste sentido. Por exemplo, em hospitais e estabelecimentos de assistncia mdica podem estar sendo utilizados equipamentos sensveis energia de RF externa. Veculos Para evitar uma possvel interao entre o rdio transmissor e qualquer um dos mdulos de controle eletrnico do veculo (por exemplo, o controle do sistema anti-

bloqueio de freios (ABS), o controle do motor ou o controle da transmisso), recomenda-se que se contrate um instalador experiente para realizar a instalao do rdio, bem como tomar as seguintes precaues:

1. Consulte as instrues fornecidas pelo fabricante e as demais documentaes tcnicas que contenham recomendaes para a instalao do rdio. 2. Antes de instalar o rdio, determine o local dos mdulos de controle eletrnico e do cabeamento no veculo. 3. Passe toda a fiao do rdio, incluindo a linha de transmisso da antena, o mais distante possvel das unidades de controle eletrnico e do cabeamento correspondente. Segurana ao dirigir Consulte as leis e regulamentos de trnsito referentes ao uso de rdios nos locais em que estiver dirigindo. Obedea sempre estas leis. Quando estiver utilizando o rdio ao dirigir:

Preste ateno ao volante quando estiver dirigindo. Saia da pista e estacione antes de fazer ou receber uma chamada, se as condies de trnsito assim o exigirem. Segurana acstica A exposio a rudos intensos provenientes de qualquer fonte durante perodos de tempo prolongados poder afetar a sua capacidade auditiva temporariamente ou de forma permanente. Quanto mais alto for o volume sonoro do rdio, mais rapidamente sua capacidade auditiva poder ser afetada. O dano auditivo produzido por rudos intensos s vezes poder ser imperceptvel em um primeiro momento. Porm, ele tende a se tornar um efeito cumulativo. 9 Portugus Brasileiro 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 10 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Para proteger a sua capacidade auditiva:

Use a menor intensidade de volume que permita a realizao de suas tarefas. Aumente o volume somente quando estiver em um ambiente ruidoso. Abaixe o volume antes de conectar um fone de ouvido ou acessrio auricular. Limite o tempo de uso de fones de ouvido ou de acessrios auriculares em volume alto. Quando estiver utilizando o rdio sem um fone de ouvido ou acessrio auricular, no coloque o alto-falante do rdio muito prximo ao ouvido. Portugus Brasileiro 10 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 11 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM ADVERTNCIA ADVERTNCIA Advertncias operacionais Veculos com air bag No instale nem coloque um rdio mvel sobre um air bag nem na rea prxima expanso do mesmo. O air bag se expande com grande intensidade. Se houver um rdio porttil na rea de expanso do air bag quando da expanso do mesmo, o rdio poder ser lanado com grande velocidade e causar leses graves aos passageiros. Ambientes potencialmente explosivos Desligue o rdio antes de entrar em reas com atmosferas potencialmente inflamveis. As fascas lanadas em ambientes potencialmente explosivos podem causar uma exploso ou incndio e resultar em leses graves ou inclusive fatais. Entre os ambientes potencialmente explosivos esto as reas com combustveis situadas, por exemplo, na parte inferior de embarcaes, instalaes de transferncia e armazenamento de combustveis ou de produtos qumicos, e reas onde o ar possa conter produtos qumicos ou partculas tais como cereais, poeira comum ou poeira metlica. As reas com ambientes potencialmente explosivos geralmente contm avisos de advertncia, embora nem sempre seja assim. reas de detonao e exploso Para evitar uma possvel interferncia com as operaes de detonao, desligue o rdio quando estiver prximo de detonadores eltricos, em reas de detonao ou onde houver avisos indicando para desligar os rdios bidirecionais. Siga todos os avisos e instrues. No caso de rdios instalados em veculos movidos a gs liqefeito de petrleo, consulte a norma NFPA 58 da Associao Nacional de Proteo contra Incndios dos EUA (National Fire Protection Association) para obter informaes a respeito do armazenamento, manuseio e/ou recipientes. Para obter uma cpia da norma NFPA 58 entre em contato com a Associao Nacional de Proteo contra Incndios, One Battery Park, Quincy, MA, EUA. 11 Portugus Brasileiro 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 12 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Portugus Brasileiro 12 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 1 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Guide dexposition aux frquences radio (RF) et de scurit des produits pour radios mobiles bidirectionnelles installes dans des vhicules, des navires ou comme stations fixes de surveillance de sites ATTENTION AVANT DUTILISER CETTE RADIO, LISEZ CETTE BROCHURE QUI CONTIENT DIMPORTANTES INFORMATIONS SUR LE MODE DEMPLOI SCURITAIRE DU PRODUIT AINSI QUE DES INFORMATIONS RELATIVES LNERGIE DE RF ET SON CONTRLE, AFIN DASSURER LA CONFORMIT AUX LIMITES DEXPOSITION LNERGIE DE RADIOFRQUENCE TABLIES PAR LES NORMES NATIONALES ET INTERNATIONALES APPLICABLES. Les informations contenues dans ce document remplacent les informations gnrales de scurit des manuels de lutilisateur publis avant janvier 2008. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS et le logo M stylis sont des marques de commerce ou des marques enregistres de Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC et sont utilises sous licence. Toutes les autres marques de commerce appartiennent leurs propritaires respectifs. 2005 2012 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Tous droits rservs. Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196, tats-Unis.

*NNTN7851D*

NNTN7851D

*6881095C99*

6881095C99-J Franais Canadien 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 2 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Sensibilisation lexposition lnergie de RF, moyens de contrle et consignes dutilisation pour conformit aux normes du FCC en matire dusage professionnel de cette radio AVIS: Cette radio a t conue pour un usage professionnel dans un environnement contrl, o les utilisateurs sont pleinement conscients de lexposition lnergie de RF laquelle ils sont soumis et peuvent exercer un contrle sur cette exposition afin de respecter les limites tablies par le FCC. Ce dispositif radio Nest PAS autoris pour lensemble de la population, les consommateurs en gnral, ni pour une utilisation autre que celle dcrite ici. Cette radio bidirectionnelle utilise de lnergie lectromagntique dans le spectre des radiofrquences (RF) pour permettre les communications distance entre deux utilisateurs ou plus. Elle utilise lnergie de radiofrquence ou les ondes radio pour mettre et recevoir des appels. Lnergie de RF est une forme dnergie lectromagntique. Ce type dnergie se prsente sous dautres formes, notamment la lumire solaire et les rayons X. Il ne faut cependant pas confondre lnergie de RF avec dautres formes dnergie lectromagntique qui, lorsquelles sont mal utilises, peuvent occasionner des dommages biologiques. Des niveaux trs levs de rayons X, par exemple, peuvent endommager les tissus et le matriel gntique. Les experts en science, en ingnierie, en mdecine, en sciences de la sant et lindustrie travaillent en collaboration avec diffrentes organisations afin dlaborer des normes dfinissant les limites acceptables dexposition lnergie de RF. Ces normes fournissent les niveaux recommands dexposition aux RF, tant pour les travailleurs que pour le public en gnral. Ces niveaux recommands dexposition aux RF comprennent des marges de scurit apprciables. Toutes les radios bidirectionnelles Motorola sont conues, fabriques et testes de manire garantir leur conformit aux niveaux dexposition aux RF tablis par les autorits publiques comptentes. Par ailleurs, les fabricants recommandent aux utilisateurs de radios bidirectionnelles de suivre des directives de fonctionnement spcifiques. Ces directives sont importantes puisquelles informent les utilisateurs sur lexposition lnergie de RF et proposent des moyens simples pour la contrler. Franais Canadien 2 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 3 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Visitez les sites Web suivants pour obtenir plus de renseignements sur ce quest lnergie de RF et sur les mesures de contrles observer afin de respecter les limites tablies en matire dexposition aux RF. http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html Rglements du Conseil Fdral Amricain des Communications

(FCC) Les rglements du FCC stipulent que les fabricants de radios mobiles bidirectionnelles ne peuvent commercialiser leurs produits aux tats-Unis quaprs avoir vrifi leur conformit aux limites dexposition lnergie de RF tablies par le FCC. Lorsque les radios bidirectionnelles sont utilises des fins professionnelles, le FCC exige que les utilisateurs soient pleinement conscients des effets de lexposition et quils soient capables de contrler le niveau dexposition auquel ils se soumettent, afin de rpondre aux exigences de leur profession. Vous pouvez contribuer la sensibilisation lexposition aux RF en apposant des tiquettes renvoyant les utilisateurs vers la source dinformation approprie. Votre radio bidirectionnelle Motorola comporte une tiquette de produit sur lexposition lnergie de RF. Dautre part, vous trouverez dans le manuel de lutilisateur du produit Motorola ou dans la brochure de scurit fournie sparment, les informations requises et le mode demploi permettant de contrler lexposition lnergie de RF et de garantir le respect des normes. Conformit aux normes sur lexposition aux RF Cette radio bidirectionnelle Motorola a t conue et teste afin de garantir sa conformit aux normes et recommandations nationales et internationales ci-dessous lies lexposition des tres humains lnergie lectromagntique de radiofrquence. Cette radio respecte les limites dexposition tablies par l'IEEE et la ICNIRP pour les environnements professionnels ou avec contrle dexposition lnergie de radiofrquence, des cycles de travail allant jusqu 50% (50% transmission/50% rception) et est approuv par le FCC pour un usage exclusivement professionnel. En ce qui concerne la mesure de lnergie de RF afin dvaluer la conformit aux normes dexposition du FCC, la radio met de lnergie de RF mesurable seulement lorsquelle est en cours de transmission

(conversation), et non pas lorsquelle reoit (coute) ni quand elle est en mode Attente. 3 Franais Canadien 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 4 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Cette radio bidirectionnelle Motorola est conforme aux normes et aux lignes directrices suivantes relatives lexposition lnergie de RF:

Conseil fdral amricain des communications (FCC), Code de la rglementation fdrale ; 47CFR et suiv. Conseil fdral amricain des communications (FCC), Bulletin OET 65 Institut des ingnieurs lectriciens et lectroniciens (IEEE), C95.1 Comit international pour la protection contre les radiations non ionisantes

(ICNIRP) Ministre de la sant (Canada), Code de scurit 6 Industrie Canada, RSS-102 Direction australienne de communications, norme de radiocommunications, et suiv. Annexe dANATEL la rsolution No. 303 et suiv. Directives en matire de conformit et de contrle dexposition aux RF et consignes de fonctionnement Pour contrler lexposition laquelle vous-mme et dautres personnes se soumettent et garantir le respect des limites dexposition aux RF, observez toujours les consignes suivantes. Consignes:

Lorsque lappareil est cd dautres utilisateurs, il doit tre accompagn des informations de sensibilisation des utilisateurs. Nutilisez pas cet appareil si les conditions de fonctionnement dcrites ici ne sont pas runies. Franais Canadien 4 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 5 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Consignes:

Nmettez pas plus de 50% du temps afin de ne pas dpasser le cycle maximal de travail spcifi de 50%. Pour mettre (parler), appuyez sur le bouton de transmission (PTT) ou, si la radio est quipe de VOX, parlez dans le microphone. La DEL rouge sallume lorsque la radio met. Pour recevoir des appels, relchez le bouton PTT, ou, si la radio est quipe de VOX, arrtez de parler. La DEL rouge steint lorsque la radio arrte dmettre. Il est important de ne pas mettre plus de 50% du temps tant donn que cette radio gnre une nergie de RF dont lexposition nest mesurable que lors de lmission (en termes de conformit aux normes de mesure). Lmission ne doit se faire que lorsque les personnes situes lextrieur du vhicule se trouvent la distance latrale minimale recommande (indique dans le tableau 1) de la carrosserie dun vhicule quip dune antenne convenablement installe. Cette sparation garantit une distance suffisante par rapport une antenne extrieure convenablement installe (conformment aux consignes dinstallation) pour rpondre aux exigences en matire dexposition lnergie de RF stipules dans les normes mentionnes plus haut. REMARQUE: Le tableau 1 ci-dessous indique la distance latrale minimum recommande, dans un environnement non contrl, pour les passants par rapport la carrosserie dun vhicule quip dune antenne mettrice agre et convenablement installe (cest--dire, antenne unipolaire plan de sol, ou doublet) pour diffrents niveaux de puissance nominale de radios mobiles installes dans un vhicule. Tableau 1. Puissance nominale de la radio bidirectionnelle mobile installe dans un vhicule et distance latrale minimale recommande de la carrosserie du vhicule Puissance nominale de la radio mobile (voir Remarque) Moins de 7 watts 7 14 watts 15 39 watts 40 110 watts Distance latrale minimale de la carrosserie du vhicule 20 centimtres (8 pouces) 30 centimtres (1 pied) 60 centimtres (2 pieds) 90 centimtres (3 pieds) 5 Franais Canadien 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 6 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Lorsqu'une radio mobile est utilise avec un autre metteur ayant la mme position, par exemple un rpteur vhiculaire, il incombe l'oprateur du vhicule de prendre les mesures ncessaires pour maintenir les tiers la distance requise du vhicule de faon garantir la conformit aux limites d'exposition l'nergie de RF tablies par la FCC pour le public en gnral. Pour plus de renseignements, consultez le guide de l'utilisateur relatif aux metteurs ayant la mme position. REMARQUE: Si vous ntes pas sr de la puissance nominale de votre radio, contactez le reprsentant ou le concessionnaire Motorola et indiquez-

lui le numro de modle de la radio qui figure sur ltiquette de celle-ci. Si vous narrivez pas dterminer la puissance de sortie nominale, conservez une distance dun mtre (3 pieds) par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule. Les utilisateurs de radio multi-bandes soumises diffrentes distances de sparation dans diffrentes bandes de fonctionnement selon le tableau 1 devront slectionner la plus grande distance applicable comme distance latrale minimale pour les personnes se trouvant l'extrieur du vhicule. La puissance maximale indique sur lautorisation de la FCC peut tre suprieure la puissance nominale si lon tient compte des variations de production. Consignes dinstallation pour les antennes de radios mobiles Les consignes suivantes pour linstallation dantennes de radios mobiles sont applicables uniquement aux vhicules automobiles carrosserie mtallique ou aux vhicules plans de sol appropris. Les antennes doivent tre installes au centre du toit ou du capot du coffre, en tenant compte des conditions dexposition des passagers du sige arrire, ainsi que des consignes et restrictions spcifiques mentionnes dans le manuel dinstallation de la radio et des exigences tablies par le fournisseur de lantenne. Les installations sur le capot du coffre sont rserves aux vhicules quips de coffres surfaces planes clairement dfinies et dans la plupart des cas, des modles spcifiques de radios et dantennes. Consultez dans le manuel dinstallation de la radio les informations spcifiques relatives lemplacement et au mode dinstallation des diffrents types dantennes agrs, destines fournir toute personne risquant dtre expose les distances de fonctionnement recommandes. Utilisez uniquement lantenne agre fournie par Motorola ou une antenne de rechange agre Motorola. Lutilisation dantennes, de modifications ou Franais Canadien 6 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 7 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM daccessoires non agrs peut endommager la radio et constituer une violation des normes de scurit en matire dnergie de RF. Accessoires agrs Cette radio a t teste et dclare conforme aux normes de scurit en matire dnergie de RF lorsquelle est utilise avec les accessoires Motorola fournis ou dsigns pour ce produit. Lutilisation dautres accessoires peut constituer une violation des normes de scurit en matire dnergie de RF. Pour obtenir une liste de Motorola antennes approuves et accessoires, reportez-

vous l'utilisateur manuel de votre modle de radio. Informations complmentaires Pour obtenir plus de renseignements sur les exigences en matire dexposition ou des informations de formation, visitez le site: http://

responsibility.motorolasolutions.com/index.php/ourapproach/wirelesscommhealth/. Directives de contrle et de conformit et consignes de fonctionnement des radios bidirectionnelles mobiles installes comme stations de contrle emplacements fixes. Si un appareil de radio mobile est install dans un endroit fixe et quil est utilis comme station de contrle ou comme unit fixe, linstallation de lantenne doit rpondre aux exigences ci-dessous afin de garantir un rendement optimal et de respecter les limites dexposition lnergie de RF tablies dans les normes et directives numres page 4 :

Dans la mesure du possible, lantenne doit tre monte sur le toit ou sur une tour, lextrieur du btiment. Comme pour toutes les installations dantennes emplacements fixes, il incombe au grant de maintenir lemplacement en conformit avec les rglements en vigueur. Par ailleurs, dautres exigences peuvent sappliquer, telles que des mesures de propagation, la pose de panneaux et des restrictions de laccs lemplacement afin dtre certain que les limites dexposition mentionnes ne sont pas dpasses. Pour toute information d'installation supplmentaire, consultez les directives relatives aux distances de sparation minimum fournies ci-dessus dans la section de ce document intitule Directives en matire de conformit et de contrle d'exposition aux RF et consignes de fonctionnement. 7 Franais Canadien 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 8 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Directivesdeconformitetdecontrleetconsignes d'exploitationpourlesradiosmobilesbidirectionnelles installssurlesnavires Si un appareil de radio mobile est install sur un navire et utilis comme appareil fixe, l'installation de l'antenne devra tre conforme aux exigences suivantes en vue d'assurer une performance optimale et le respect des limites d'exposition aux frquences radio

(RF) stipules dans les normes et lignes directrices figurant la page 4:

Une antenne usage maritime devra tre choisie et installe conformment aux Les antennes devront tre montes solidement la structure du navire et places le recommandations du fabricant. plus haut possible. Comme avec toutes les installations d'antennes de radio, il est de la responsabilit de l'exploitant de maintenir des distances suffisantes entre l'antenne et tout le personnel bord ou proximit du navire. Pour plus d'informations sur l'installation, voir les recommandations pour les distances de sparation minimales exposes ci-dessus dans les Recommandations pour la conformit et le contrle de lexposition aux RF, ainsi que la section Instructions dutilisation de ce document. Interfrence et compatibilit lectromagntique REMARQUE: La grande majorit des dispositifs lectroniques sont sensibles leffet lectromagntique perturbateur (EMI) sils ne sont pas convenablement protgs ou sils ne sont pas conus ou configurs de telle sorte quils soient compatibles avec ce type de signaux lectromagntiques. Il se peut que des tests de compatibilit soient ncessaires afin de dterminer si lun des appareils lectroniques utiliss lintrieur ou proximit des vhicules ou proximit dantennes emplacements fixes est sensible lnergie de RF externe ou sil faut prendre des mesures quelconques pour liminer ou attnuer le risque dinteraction entre la radio mettrice et lappareil ou le dispositif. Btiments Afin dviter des problmes dinterfrence et/ou de compatibilit lectromagntique, teignez la radio dans tous les tablissements o des panneaux daffichage vous invitent le faire. Il se peut, par exemple, que les hpitaux ou les tablissements de sant utilisent des appareils sensibles lnergie de RF externe. Franais Canadien 8 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 9 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Vhicules Afin dviter une ventuelle interaction entre la radio mettrice et lun des modules de contrle lectronique du vhicule (par exemple, le contrle du systme de freinage antiblocage (ABS), le contrle du moteur ou le contrle de la transmission) il est recommand de faire appel uniquement un installateur qualifi pour raliser linstallation de la radio et de prendre les prcautions suivantes :

1. Consultez la notice du fabricant ou toute autre documentation technique contenant des recommandations pour linstallation de la radio. 2. Avant dinstaller la radio, dterminez lemplacement des modules de contrle lectronique et du cblage lintrieur du vhicule. 3. Faites passer tout le cblage de la radio, y compris la ligne de transmission de lantenne, le plus loin possible des units de contrle lectronique et du cblage correspondant. Scurit lors de la conduite Consultez la lgislation et les rglements en vigueur sur lutilisation des radios dans les zones o vous conduisez. Respectez toujours ces rgles. Lorsque vous utilisez la radio en conduisant:

Concentrez-vous entirement sur votre conduite et sur la route. Rangez-vous sur le bas-ct et stationnez votre vhicule avant de faire ou de rpondre un appel, si les conditions de conduite lexigent. Scurit acoustique L'exposition des bruits forts de n'importe quelle source pendant de longues priodes peut affecter temporairement ou de manire permanente votre audition. Plus le volume de la radio est lev, plus votre audition risque de se dtriorer rapidement. Les dommages auditifs causs par des bruits forts sont parfois indtectables au dbut et peuvent avoir un effet cumulatif. 9 Franais Canadien 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 10 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Pour protger votre audition:

Rglez le volume au plus bas niveau possible ncessaire pour effectuer votre travail. volumes. N'augmentez le volume que si vous tes dans un environnement bruyant. Baissez le volume avant d'utiliser un casque ou des oreillettes. Utilisez le moins longtemps possible un casque ou des oreillettes de forts Lorsque vous utilisez la radio sans casque ou oreillettes, ne placez pas le haut-parleur de la radio directement sur votre oreille. Franais Canadien 10 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 11 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT Avertissements de fonctionnement Vhicules quips de sac gonflable vitez de monter ou de placer une radio mobile au-dessus dun sac gonflable ou dans la zone de dploiement de ce dernier. Les sacs gonflables se dploient avec une force considrable. Si une radio se trouve dans la zone de dploiement du sac lorsque celui-ci se gonfle, la radio peut tre propulse avec une force considrable et risque alors doccasionner de graves lsions corporelles aux passagers. Atmosphres potentiellement explosives teignez la radio avant de pntrer dans une atmosphre potentiellement explosive. La moindre tincelle dans ce type d'atmosphre peut provoquer une explosion ou un incendie et entraner des lsions corporelles ou mme la mort. Parmi les zones potentiellement explosives, citons les zones davitaillement en carburant, par exemple la cale des bateaux, les installations de transfert et de stockage de carburant ou de produits chimiques et les zones dans lesquelles lair est charg en produits chimiques ou en particules telles que de la poudre de crales, de la poussire ou de la poudre mtallique. Les zones atmosphres potentiellement explosives affichent gnralement des panneaux de mise en garde, mais ce nest pas toujours le cas. Dtonateurs et zones de dynamitage Afin dviter toute interfrence ventuelle avec les oprations de dtonation, teignez la radio proximit de dtonateurs lectriques, dans une zone de dtonations ou l o sont affichs des panneaux vous invitant teindre les radios bidirectionnelles. Respectez tous les panneaux et toutes les consignes. En ce qui concerne les radios installes dans des vhicules fonctionnant au GPL, consultez la norme NFPA 58 de lAssociation amricaine pour la protection contre lincendie (National Fire Protection Association) pour obtenir des informations sur le stockage, la manipulation et/ou les conteneurs. Pour obtenir une copie de la norme GPL, NFPA 58, contactez lAssociation amricaine pour la protection contre lincendie (National Fire Protection Association), One Battery Park, Quincy, MA. 11 Franais Canadien 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 12 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Franais Canadien 12